XPR 5550 Manual

PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO
MOTOTRBO™
XPR™ 5550/XPR 5580/XPR 5550e/XPR 5580e
COLOR DISPLAY MOBILE
USER GUIDE
Volume/Channel Knob...................................17
Contents
Setting Dual Knob Operation
Contents Preference..................................... 18
Keypad Microphone Buttons..........................18
Capacity Max Operations.............. 21

Declaration of Conformity.............10
Capacity Max Operations...... 22
Important Safety Information........12 Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button.................22
Programmable Buttons....................... 22
Assignable Radio Functions............... 22
Software Version............................13 Assignable Settings or Utility
Functions....................................... 25
Accessing Programmed Functions..... 25
Computer Software Copyrights....14 Status Indicators................................. 26
Icons.........................................26
Tones....................................... 32
Basic Operations........................... 15 Registration.........................................33
Powering Up the Radio..................................15 Zone and Channel Selections.............34
Turning Off the Radio.................................... 15 Selecting Zones....................... 34
Adjusting the Volume.....................................15 Selecting Zones by Using
the Alias Search.................. 34
Selecting a Call Type............... 35
Radio Controls............................... 17 Selecting a Site........................ 35
1
English
Roam Request......................... 35 Privacy................................... 118
Site Lock On/Off.......................36 Stun........................................119
Site Restriction......................... 36 Lone Worker...........................120
Site Trunking ........................... 36 Password Lock Features........120
Calls.................................................... 37 Notification List.......................123
Group Calls.............................. 38 Over-the-Air Programming .... 124
Broadcast Call..........................44 Selecting Third-Party
Private Call...............................46 Peripherals Connection
All Calls.................................... 52 Modes............................... 124
Phone Calls..............................56 Received Signal Strength
Call Preemption........................65 Indicator............................ 125
Voice Interrupt..........................66 Front Panel Configuration...... 125
Advanced Features.............................67 Wi-Fi Operation...................... 126
Call Queue............................... 67 Utilities....................................130
Talkgroup Scan........................ 67
Bluetooth.................................. 68
Indoor Location........................ 72 Connect Plus Operations............ 149
Multi-Site Controls....................74
Home Channel Reminder.........75
Remote Monitor .......................76 Additional Radio Controls
Contacts Settings..................... 79
in Connect Plus Mode...... 150
Contents
Call Indicator Settings.............. 82

Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button...............150
Call Log Features.....................86
Programmable Buttons..................... 150
Call Alert Operation..................89
Assignable Radio Functions...151
Emergency Operation.............. 91
Assignable Settings or Utility
Text Messaging........................98
Functions.......................... 152
2 Text Entry Configuration........ 112
English
Identifying Status Indicators in Receiving and Responding
Contents
Connect Plus Mode..................... 153 to a Group Call.................. 164
Display Icons..........................153 Receiving and Responding
Call Icons............................... 156 to a Private Call.................164
Advanced Menu Icons............156 Receiving a Site All Call......... 165
Sent Item Icons ..................... 157 Receiving an Inbound
Bluetooth Device Icons.......... 157 Private Phone Call............ 165
LED Indicator......................... 158 Receiving an Inbound
Indicator Tones...................... 159 Phone Talkgroup Call....... 166
Alert Tones.............................159 Inbound Phone Multi-Group
Switching Between Connect Plus Call.................................... 167
and Non-Connect Plus Modes..... 159 Making a Radio Call..........................167
Making a Call with the
Channel Selector Knob..... 167
Making and Receiving Calls Making a Private Call with a
in Connect Plus Mode...... 161 One Touch Call Button......169
Making a Call with the
Selecting a Site................................. 161
Programmable Manual
Roam Request....................... 161
Dial Button........................ 170
Site Lock On/Off.....................161
Making an Outbound Private
Site Restriction....................... 161
Phone Call with the
Selecting a Zone............................... 162
Programmable Manual
Using Multiple Networks................... 163
Dial Button........................ 171
Selecting a Call Type........................ 163
Making an Outbound Private
Receiving and Responding to a
Phone Call via the Phone
Radio Call.................................... 163
Menu................................. 171
3
English
Making an Outbound Private Remote Monitor................................ 178
Phone Call from Contacts. 172 Initiating Remote Monitor....... 178
Waiting for the Channel Scan..................................................179
Grant in an Outbound Starting and Stopping Scan... 179
Private Phone Call............ 173 Responding to a
Making a Buffered Over-Dial Transmission During a
in a Connected Scan.................................. 180
Outbound Private Phone User Configurable Scan....................180
Call.................................... 173 Turning Scan On or Off.....................181
Making a Live Over-Dial in a Editing the Scan List......................... 181
Connected Outbound Add or Delete a Group via the Add
Private Phone Call............ 174 Members Menu............................ 183
Understanding Scan Operation.........185
Scan Talkback.................................. 185
Advanced Features in Editing Priority for a Talkgroup..........186
Connect Plus Mode.......... 175 Contacts Settings..............................187
Making a Private Call from
Home Channel Reminder................. 175
Contacts............................ 187
Auto Fallback.................................... 175
Making a Call Alias Search.... 188
Indications of Auto Fallback
Adding a New Contact........... 188
Mode................................. 175
Call Indicator Settings....................... 189
Contents
Making/Receiving Calls in
Activating and Deactivating
Fallback Mode...................176
Call Ringers for Call Alert .189
Returning to Normal
Activating and Deactivating
Operation.......................... 176
Call Ringers for Private
Radio Check..................................... 177
Calls.................................. 190
Sending a Radio Check......... 177
4
English
Activating and Deactivating Responding to an
Contents
Call Ringers for Text Emergency Call.................198
Message........................... 190 Responding to an
Selecting a Ring Alert Type....191 Emergency Alert............... 198
Escalating Alarm Tone Ignore Emergency Revert
Volume.............................. 191 Call.................................... 199
Call Log Features..............................191 Initiating an Emergency Call.. 199
Viewing Recent Calls............. 192 Initiating an Emergency Call
Deleting a Call from a Call with Voice to Follow.......... 199
List.................................... 192 Initiating an Emergency Alert. 200
Viewing Details from a Call Exiting Emergency Mode....... 200
List.................................... 192 Text Message Features.................... 201
Call Alert Operation...........................193 Sending a Quick Text
Responding to Call Alerts.......193 Message........................... 202
Making a Call Alert from the Sending a Quick Text
Contact List....................... 194 Message with the One
Making a Call Alert with the Touch Access Button........ 202
One Touch Access Accessing the Drafts Folder... 202
Button................................194 Managing Fail-to-Send Text
Emergency Operation....................... 195 Messages..........................205
Receiving an Incoming Managing Sent Text
Emergency........................ 196 Messages..........................205
Saving the Emergency Receiving a Text Message.....209
Details to the Alarm List.... 197 Reading a Text Message....... 209
Deleting the Emergency Managing Received Text
Details............................... 197 Messages..........................209
Privacy.............................................. 212 5
English
Making a Privacy-Enabled Notification List..................................224
(Scrambled) Call............... 214 Accessing the Notification
Security............................................. 214 List.................................... 224
Radio Disable.........................214 Wi-Fi Operation.................................224
Radio Enable..........................215 Turning Wi-Fi On or Off..........224
Bluetooth Operation.......................... 217 Connecting to a Network
Turning Bluetooth On and Access Point..................... 225
Off..................................... 218 Refreshing the Network List... 226
Finding and Connecting to a Adding a Network...................226
Bluetooth Device............... 218 Viewing Details of Network
Finding and Connecting Access Points................... 227
from a Bluetooth Device Removing Network Access
(Discoverable Mode)......... 219 Points................................ 227
Disconnecting from a Utilities.............................................. 228
Bluetooth Device............... 220 Turning the Radio Tones/
Switching Audio Route Alerts On or Off................. 228
between Internal Radio Setting the Tone Alert
Speaker and Bluetooth Volume Offset Level..........229
Device............................... 220 Turning the Talk Permit
Viewing Device Details...........220 Tone On or Off.................. 229
Deleting Device Name........... 221 Turning the Power Up Alert
Contents
Bluetooth Mic Gain.................221 Tone On or Off.................. 230

Indoor Location................................. 222 Setting the Power Level......... 231
Turning Indoor Location On Changing the Display Mode... 231
or Off................................. 222 Adjusting the Display
Accessing Indoor Location Brightness......................... 232
6 Beacons Information......... 223
English
Turning the Introduction
Contents
Screen On or Off............... 232
Language............................... 233 Other Systems......................252
Turning the LED Indicator Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button...............252
On or Off........................... 233 Programmable Buttons..................... 252
Identifying Cable Type........... 234 Assignable Radio Functions...252
Voice Announcement............. 234 Assignable Settings or Utility
Menu Timer............................ 235 Functions.......................... 255
Turning Horns/Lights On or Accessing Programmed
Off..................................... 235 Functions.......................... 256
Setting Dual Knob Status Indicators............................... 256
Operation Preference........236 Icons.......................................256
Digital Mic AGC (Mic AGC- Conventional Analog and Digital
D)...................................... 236 Modes.......................................... 265
Intelligent Audio......................237 Icon Information................................ 265
Turning the Acoustic IP Site Connect ..............................266
Feedback Suppressor Capacity Plus--Single Site ............. 266
Feature On or Off.............. 238 Capacity Plus--Multi-Site ............... 267
Turning GPS/GNSS On or Zone and Channel Selections...........268
Off..................................... 239 Selecting Zones..................... 268
Accessing General Radio Selecting Zones by Using
Information........................ 240 the Alias Search................ 269
Selecting Channels................ 269
Calls.................................................. 269
Other Systems..............................251 Group Calls............................ 271
Private Calls .......................273
7
English
All Calls.................................. 277 Notification List.......................361
Selective Calls ................... 279 Auto-Range Transponder
Phone Calls ....................... 280 System ...........................361
Stopping Radio Calls ......... 290 Over-the-Air Programming .362
Talkaround............................. 290 Transmit Inhibit.......................362
Advanced Features...........................291 Selecting Third-Party
Home Channel Reminder.......291 Peripherals Connection
Radio Check ...................... 292 Modes............................... 363
Remote Monitor .....................294 Received Signal Strength
Scan Lists...............................297 Indicator............................ 363
Scan....................................... 301 Password Lock Features........363
Vote Scan .......................... 303 Front Panel Configuration...... 366
Contacts Settings................... 304 Wi-Fi Operation...................... 367
Call Indicator Settings............ 308 Utilities....................................371
Call Log Features...................312
Call Alert Operation................315
Emergency Operation............ 317 Authorized Accessories List.......394
Text Messaging Features .. 324
Text Entry Configuration........ 337
Job Tickets ............................ 343
Authorized Accessories
List..................................... 395
Contents
Privacy ............................... 347

Multi-Site Controls..................348 Antennas...........................................395
Security ..............................349 Audio.................................................397
Lone Worker...........................353 Cables...............................................398
Bluetooth................................ 354 Desktop Accessories........................ 398
8 Indoor Location...................... 359 Mounting Kits.................................... 398
English
Speakers...........................................399
Contents
Miscellaneous Accessories...............399
Maritime Radio Use in the VHF
Frequency Range...............................400
Special Channel Assignments..................... 400
Operating Frequency Requirements............400
Declaration of Compliance for the Use of
Distress and Safety Frequencies............402
Technical Parameters for Interfacing
External Data Sources............................402
Limited Warranty....................................403
MOTOROLA COMMUNICATION
PRODUCTS........................................... 403
I. WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERS
AND FOR HOW LONG:......................... 403
II. GENERAL PROVISIONS........................ 404
III. STATE LAW RIGHTS:............................404
IV. HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICE..404
V. WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT
COVER...................................................405
VI. PATENT AND SOFTWARE
PROVISIONS......................................... 405
VII. GOVERNING LAW................................407
9
English
conforms to the following regulations:
Declaration of Conformity
FCC Part 15, subpart B, section 15.107(a),
This declaration is applicable to your radio only if your
15.107(d) and section 15.109(a)
radio is labeled with the FCC logo shown below.
Class B Digital Device
As a personal computer peripheral, this device com-
Per FCC CFR 47 Part 2 Section 2.1077(a) plies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. This device
complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS
standard(s). Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1 This device may not cause harmful interference,
and
2 This device must accept any interference re-

Responsible Party ceived, including interference that may cause un-
desired operation.
Name: Motorola Solutions, Inc.
Note:
Address: 1303 East Algonquin Road, Schaumburg,
This equipment has been tested and found
IL 60196-1078, U.S.A.
to comply with the limits for a Class B digital
Phone Number: 1-800-927-2744 device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC
Rules. These limits are designed to provide
Hereby declares that the product:
reasonable protection against harmful inter-
Model Name: XPR 5550/XPR 5580/XPR ference in a residential installation. This
5550e/XPR 5580e equipment generates, uses and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed
10
English
and used in accordance with the instruc-
tions, may cause harmful interference to ra-
dio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in
a particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful inter-
ference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encour-
aged to try to correct the interference by one
or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving anten-
na.
• Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on
a circuit different from that to which the
receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced ra-
dio or TV technician for help.
11
English
and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent
Important Safety Information isotropically radiated power (e.i.r.p.) is not more than
that necessary for successful communication.
RF Energy Exposure and Product Safety Guide
for Mobile Two-Way Radios This radio transmitter has been approved by Industry
Canada to operate with Motorola-approved antenna
ATTENTION!
with the maximum permissible gain and required
This radio is restricted to Occupational use only. antenna impedance for each antenna type indicated.
Before using the radio, read the RF Energy Exposure Antenna types not included in this list, having a gain
and Product Safety Guide for Mobile Two-Way greater than the maximum gain indicated for that
Radios which contains important operating type, are strictly prohibited for use with this device.
instructions for safe usage and RF energy awareness
and control for Compliance with applicable standards
and Regulations.
Important Safety Information
For a list of Motorola-approved antennas and other

accessories, visit the following website:
http://www.motorolasolutions.com
Any modification to this device, not expressly
authorized by Motorola, may void the user’s authority
to operate this device.
Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio
transmitter may only operate using an antenna of a
type and maximum (or lesser) gain approved for the
transmitter by Industry Canada. To reduce potential
radio interference to other users, the antenna type
12
English
Software Version
Software Version
All the features described in the following sections are
supported by the software version R02.50.10 or later.
See Checking Firmware and Codeplug Versions on
page 146 to determine the software version of your
radio.
Check with your dealer or system administrator for
more information.
13
English
including patent rights, copyrights and trade secrets
Computer Software Copyrights of Digital Voice Systems, Inc.
The Motorola products described in this manual may This voice coding Technology is licensed solely for
include copyrighted Motorola computer programs use within this Communications Equipment. The user
stored in semiconductor memories or other media. of this Technology is explicitly prohibited from
Laws in the United States and other countries attempting to decompile, reverse engineer, or
preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for disassemble the Object Code, or in any other way
copyrighted computer programs including, but not convert the Object Code into a human-readable form.
limited to, the exclusive right to copy or reproduce in
U.S. Pat. Nos. #5,870,405, #5,826,222, #5,754,974,
any form the copyrighted computer program.
#5,701,390, #5,715,365, #5,649,050, #5,630,011,
Accordingly, any copyrighted Motorola computer
#5,581,656, #5,517,511, #5,491,772, #5,247,579,
programs contained in the Motorola products
Computer Software Copyrights
#5,226,084 and #5,195,166.

described in this manual may not be copied,
reproduced, modified, reverse-engineered, or
distributed in any manner without the express written
permission of Motorola. Furthermore, the purchase of
Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either
directly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any
license under the copyrights, patents or patent
applications of Motorola, except for the normal non-
exclusive license to use that arises by operation of
law in the sale of a product.
The AMBE+2™ voice coding Technology embodied in
this product is protected by intellectual property rights
14
English
Basic Operations
Basic Operations Turning Off the Radio
This chapter explains the operations to get you Follow the procedure to turn off your radio.
started on using the radio. Press and hold the On/Off button.
Powering Up the Radio The radio may take up to 7 seconds to completely
turn off.
Follow the procedure to power up your radio. The display shows Powering Down.
Press the On/Off button.
Adjusting the Volume
• A tone sounds.
• The green LED lights up. Follow the procedure to change the volume level of
your radio.
• The display shows MOTOTRBO (TM), followed by a
welcome message or image. Do one of the following:
• The Home screen lights up.
• Turn the On/Off/Volume Control Knob
Note: clockwise to increase the volume.
There is no tone upon powering up if the • Turn the On/Off/Volume Control Knob
Tones/Alerts function is disabled. See Turning counterclockwise to decrease the volume.
Radio Tones/Alerts On or Off on page 131 for
more information. Note:
Your radio can be programmed to have a
Check your battery if your radio does not power up. minimum volume offset where the volume
Make sure that it is charged and properly attached. level cannot be lowered past the
Contact your dealer if your radio still does not power programmed minimum volume. Check with
up.
15
English
your dealer or system administrator for
more information.
Basic Operations
16
English
7 Return/Home Button
Radio Controls
Radio Controls 8 Front Programmable Buttons
This chapter explains the buttons and functions to 9 Accessory Connector
control the radio. 10 LED Indicators
1 2 3 4 5 6
Volume/Channel Knob
The Volume/Channel Knob can be programmed for
dual volume and channel control, or for volume
control only.
To adjust the volume, see Adjusting the Volume on
page 15.
To change the channels, press and hold the Volume/
Channel Knob until the channel selection state is
10 9 8 7 displayed. Turn the Volume/Channel Knob to select
the channel. Do one of the following to exit the
1 On/Off/Information Button channel selection state:
2 Volume/Channel Knob
• Press the Volume/Channel Knob.
3 Display
•
4 Menu/OK Button Press .
5 Scroll Up/Down Buttons •
Press .
6 Speaker
* These buttons are programmable. 17

English
• Wait for the menu timer to expire. 4
Press or to Dual Knob. Press to
Setting Dual Knob Operation Preference select.
Follow the procedure to set the dual knob operation The display shows Volume Only and Volume &
preference of the radio. Channel.
1 5
Press to access the menu. Press or to the required setting. Press
2 to select.
Press or to Utilities. Press to A appears beside the selected settings. The
select. screen returns to the previous menu.
3
Press or to Radio Settings. Press
to select.
Keypad Microphone Buttons

You can use the 3 x 4 alphanumeric keypad on the 4-Way Navigation Keypad Microphone (Motorola part number
Radio Controls
RMN5127_) to access your radio features. Many characters require that you press a key multiple times. The table
shows the number of times a key needs to be pressed to generate the required character.
Key Number of Times Key is Pressed

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
1 . , ? ! @ & ' % — : * #
18
English
Radio Controls
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
A B C 2
D E F 3
G H I 4
J K L 5
M N O 6
P Q R S 7
T U V 8
W X Y Z 9
0 Note:
Press to enter “0” and long press to activate the CAPS lock. Another long press to turn off
the CAPS lock.
19
English
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
* or Note:
del Press during text entry to delete the character. Press during numeric entry to enter a “*”.
# or Note:
space Press during text entry to insert a space. Press during numeric entry to enter a “#”.
Radio Controls
20
English
Capacity Max Operations
21
English
You hear a continuous Talk Prohibit Tone if your call
Capacity Max Operations is interrupted, for example when the radio receives an
Emergency call. You should release the PTT button.
Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button
The PTT button serves two basic purposes. Programmable Buttons
• While a call is in progress, the PTT button allows Depending on the duration of a button press, your
the radio to transmit to other radios in the call. The dealer can program the programmable buttons as
microphone is activated when the PTT button is shortcuts to radio functions.
pressed.
Short press Pressing and releasing rapidly.
• While a call is not in progress, the PTT button is
used to make a new call. Long press Pressing and holding for the
programmed duration.
Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the
PTT button to listen.
Note:
If the Talk Permit Tone or the PTT Sidetone is See Emergency Operation on page 317 for
enabled, wait until the short alert tone ends before more information on the programmed duration
talking. of the Emergency button.
If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled on Assignable Radio Functions

your radio (programmed by your dealer), you will hear
a short alert tone the moment the target radio (the The following radio functions can be assigned to the
radio that is receiving your call) releases the PTT programmable buttons by your dealer or system
button, indicating the channel is free for you to administrator.
respond.
22
English
Audio Ambience Allows the user to select an internal PA system of the
environment the radio is radio.
operating in.
Reset Home Sets a new home channel.
Audio Profiles Allows the user to select the Channel
preferred audio profile.
Silence Home Mutes the Home Channel
Bluetooth® Audio Toggles audio routing Channel Reminder Reminder.
Switch between internal radio
Indoor Location Toggles Indoor Location on or
speaker and external
off.
Bluetooth-enabled accessory.
Intelligent Audio Toggles intelligent audio on or
Contacts Provides direct access to the
off.
Contacts list.
Manual Dial Initiates a Private Call by
Call Alert Provides direct access to the
keying in any subscriber ID.
contacts list for you to select a
contact to whom a Call Alert Manual Site Roam Starts the manual site search.
can be sent.
Mic AGC Toggles the internal
Call Log Selects the call log list. microphone automatic gain
control (AGC) on or off.
Emergency Depending on the
programming, initiates or Notifications Provides direct access to the
cancels an emergency. Notifications list.
Ext Public Toggles audio routing One Touch Access Directly initiates a predefined
Address (PA) between the connected PA Broadcast, Private, Phone or
loudspeaker amplifier and the Group Call, a Call Alert or a
Quick Text message. 23
English
Option Board Toggles option board searches other sites in
Feature feature(s) on or off for option addition to the current site.
board-enabled channels.
Telemetry Control Controls the Output Pin on a
Phone Provides direct access to the local or remote radio.
Phone Contacts list.
Text Message Selects the text message
Privacy Toggles privacy on or off. menu.
Public Address Toggles the internal PA Trill Enhancement Toggles trill enhancement on
(PA) system of the radio on or off. or off.
Radio Alias and ID Provides radio alias and ID. Voice Toggles voice announcement
Announcement on or off.
Remote Monitor Turns on the microphone of a
target radio without it giving Voice Plays zone and channel
any indicators. Announcement for announcement voice
Channel messages for the current

Site Info Displays the current Capacity
channel. This function is
Max site name and ID.
unavailable when Voice
Plays site announcement Announcement is disabled.
voice messages for the
current site when Voice Wi-Fi Toggles Wi-Fi on or off.
Announcement is enabled. Zone Selection Allows selection from a list of
Site Lock When toggled on, the radio zones.
searches the current site only.
When toggled off, the radio
24
English
• Short or long press the programmed button.

Assignable Settings or Utility Functions Proceed to Step 3.
The following radio settings or utility functions can be •
assigned to the programmable buttons. Press to access the menu.
Tones/Alerts Toggles all tones and alerts on or 2

Press or to the menu function, and
off.
press to select a function or enter a sub-
Backlight Toggles display backlight on or off.
menu.
Channel Up/ Depending on the programming,
Down changes channel to previous or 3 Do one of the following:
next channel. •
Press to return to the previous screen.
Display Mode Toggles the day/night display
•
mode on or off. Long press to return to the Home screen.
Power Level Toggles transmit power level Your radio automatically exits the menu after a
between high and low. period of inactivity and returns to the Home
Toggles squelch level between screen.
Squelch
tight and normal. The Menu Navigation Buttons are also available
on a keypad microphone. See Keypad Microphone
Accessing Programmed Functions Buttons on page 18.
Follow the procedure to access programmed

functions in your radio.
1 Do one of the following:

25
English
Status Indicators Indicates a Group Call or All Call
in progress.
This chapter explains the icons, LED indicators, and In the Contacts list, it indicates a
audio tones used in the radio. Group Call/All
group alias (name) or ID
Call
Icons (number).
The Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) of your radio shows Indicates a Phone Call as Group
the radio status, text entries, and menu entries. The Call or All Call in progress.
following are the icons that appear on the radio In the Contacts list, it indicates a
display. Phone Call as
Call Icons Group/All Call
(number).
The following icons appear on the display during a
call. These icons also appear in the Contacts list to Indicates a Phone Call as Private
indicate alias or ID type. Call in progress.
In the Contacts list, it indicates a

Indicates a Bluetooth PC Call in Phone Call as
phone alias (name) or ID
progress. Private Call
(number).
In the Contacts list, it indicates a Indicates a Private Call in
Bluetooth PC
Bluetooth PC Call alias (name) or progress.
Call
ID (number).
Private Call In the Contacts list, it indicates a
The Dispatch Call contact type is subscriber alias (name) or ID
used to send a text message to a (number).
dispatcher PC through a third-
Dispatch Call Display Icons
party Text Message Server.
The following icons appear on the status bar at the
top of the radio display. The icons are arranged left
26
English
most in order of appearance or usage, and are

GPS feature is enabled.
channel-specific. The icon stays lit when a
position fix is available.
Tones are turned off. GPS Available
GPS feature is enabled but
Tones Disable is not receiving data from
the satellite.
The number of bars (0 – 4) GPS Not Available
shown indicates the charge Radio is receiving high
Battery remaining in the battery. volume data and channel
Blinks when the battery is is busy.
low. High Volume Data
The Bluetooth feature is Indoor location status is on
enabled. The icon stays lit and available.
when a remote Bluetooth
Bluetooth Connected Indoor Location
device is connected.
Available[2]
The Bluetooth feature is
Indoor location status is on
enabled but there is no
but unavailable due to
remote Bluetooth device
Bluetooth Not Bluetooth disabled or
connected. Indoor Location
Connected Beacons Scan suspended
Unavailable[2] by Bluetooth.
Radio is in Emergency
mode. Notification List has one or
more missed events.
Emergency
Notification
27
English
The Option Board is Ringing mode is enabled.
enabled. (Option board
enabled models only)
Option Board Ring Only
The Option Board is The Privacy feature is
disabled. enabled.
Secure
Option Board Non- Silent ring mode is
Function enabled.
Indicates time left before
Silent Ring
automatic restart of radio.
Over-the-Air The site roaming feature is
Programming Delay enabled.
Timer Site Roaming

Radio is set at Low power The Privacy feature is
or or Radio is set at High disabled.
Power Level power.
Unsecure
The number of bars
displayed represents the Vibrate mode is enabled.
Received Signal radio signal strength. Four
Strength Indicator bars indicate the strongest Vibrate
(RSSI) signal. This icon is only
displayed while receiving. Vibrate and Ring mode is
enabled.
28
English
Vibrate and Ring
Wi-Fi signal is excellent. Advance Menu Icons
The following icons appear beside menu items that
offer a choice between two options or as an indication
Wi-Fi Excellent[1] that there is a sub-menu offering two options.
Wi-Fi signal is excellent.
Indicates the option is
selected.
Wi-Fi Good[1] Checkbox (Checked)
Wi-Fi signal is average Indicates the option is not
selected.
Checkbox (Empty)
Wi-Fi Average[1]
Indicates the option selected
Wi-Fi signal is poor. for the menu item with a
Solid Black Box sub-menu.
Wi-Fi Poor[1]
Wi-Fi signal is unavailable.
Wi-Fi Unavailable[1]
1 Only applicable for XPR 5550e/XPR 5580e

2 Only applicable for models with the latest software and hardware. 29
English
Bluetooth Device Icons Failed Transmission
The following icons appear next to items in the list of (Negative)
Bluetooth-enabled devices available to indicate the
device type. Successful action taken.
Bluetooth-enabled audio
Successful
device, such as a headset.
Transmission (Positive)
Bluetooth Audio
Transmitting. This is
Device
seen before indication for
Bluetooth-enabled data Successful Transmission
Transmission in
device, such as a scanner. or Failed Transmission.
Progress (Transitional)
Bluetooth Data
Device Sent Item Icons
The following icons appear at the top right corner of
Bluetooth-enabled PTT the display in the Sent Items folder.

device, such as a PTT-Only
Device (POD). The text message to a
Bluetooth PTT
subscriber alias or ID is
Device or
pending transmission,
In Progress followed by waiting for
Mini Notice Icons
The following icons appear momentarily on the acknowledgement.
display after an action to perform a task is taken. The text message to a
group alias or ID is pending
Failed action taken. transmission.
30
English
The text message has been Radio is receiving or sending an
read. emergency transmission.
or
Radio is transmitting in low battery
Individual or Group state.
Message Read
Radio has moved out of range if Auto-
The text message has not Range Transponder System is
or been read. configured.
Individual or Group Solid Radio is powering up.
Message Unread Green Radio is transmitting.
The text message cannot
Blinking Radio is receiving a non-privacy-
be sent.
or Green enabled call or data.
Send Failed Radio is retrieving Over-the-Air
Programming transmissions over the
The text message has been air.
successfully sent.
or Radio is detecting activity over the air.
Sent Successfully Note:
LED Indicator This activity may or may not
The LED indicator shows the operational status of affect the programmed channel
your radio. of the radio due to the nature of
the digital protocol.
Blinking Radio has failed the self-test upon
Red powering up.
31
English
Double Radio is receiving a privacy-enabled Audio Tones
Blinking call or data. Audio tones provide you with audible indications of
Green the status, or response to data received on the radio.
Solid Radio is in Bluetooth Discoverable A monotone sound. Sounds

Yellow Mode. continuously until termination.
Continuous Tone
Blinking Radio is receiving a Call Alert.
Sounds periodically depending
Yellow
on the duration set by the radio.
Periodic Tone
Double Radio has Auto Roaming enabled. Tone starts, stops, and repeats
Blinking Radio is actively searching for a new itself.
Yellow site. A single tone that repeats itself
Radio has yet to respond to a Group until it is terminated by the user.
Repetitive Tone
Call Alert.
Radio is locked. Sounds only once for a duration

set by the radio.
Radio is not connected to the system. Momentary Tone
Tones Indicator Tones
The following are the tones that sound through on the Indicator tones provide you with audible indications of
radio speaker. the status after an action to perform a task is taken.
High Pitched Tone Positive Indicator Tone
Low Pitched Tone Negative Indicator Tone
32
English
the current site. Typically, this indication means that

Registration the radio is outside of the geographic outbound radio
There are a number of registration-related messages frequency (RF) coverage range.
that the radio user may receive. When Out of Range is displayed on the radio, a
Registering repetitive tone sounds and the red LED flashes.
Typically, registration is sent to the system during Contact your dealer or system administrator if the
power up, Talkgroup change, or during site roaming. radio still receives out of range indications while being
If a radio fails registration on a site, the radio in an area with good RF coverage.
automatically attempts to roam to another site. The
radio temporarily removes the site where registration Talkgroup Affiliation Failed
was attempted from the roaming list. A radio tries to affiliate to the Talkgroup specified in
The indication means that the radio is busy searching the channels or Unified Knob Position (UKP) during
for a site to roam, or that the radio has found a site registration.
successfully but is waiting for a response to the A radio that is in affiliation fail state is unable to make
registration messages from the radio. or receive calls from the Talkgroup that the radio is
When Registering is displayed on the radio, a tone trying to affiliate to.
sounds and the yellow LED double flashes to indicate When a radio fails to affiliate with a Talkgroup, UKP
a site search.
Alias is displayed in the home screen with a
If the indications persist, the user should change highlighted background.
locations or if allowed, manually roam to another site.
Contact your dealer or system administrator if the
Out of Range radio receives affiliation failure indications.
A radio is deemed to be out of range when the radio
is unable to detect a signal from the system or from
33
English
Register Denied • Press the programmed Zone Selection button.
Proceed to Step 3.
Registration denied indicators are received when the
registration with the system is not accepted. •
Press to access the menu.
The radio does not indicate to the radio user the
2
specific reason the registration was denied. Normally, Press or to Zone. Press to
a registration is denied when the system operator has select.
disabled the access of the radio to the system. The display shows and the current zone.
When a radio is denied registration, RegisterDenied
3
is displayed on the radio and the yellow LED double Press or to the required zone. Press
flashes to indicate a site search.
to select.
Zone and Channel Selections The display shows <Zone> Selected
momentarily and returns to the selected zone
This chapter explains the operations to select a zone screen.

or channel on your radio.
Selecting Zones by Using the Alias Search
The radio can be programmed with a maximum of
250 Capacity Max Zones with a maximum of 160 Follow the procedure to select the required zone on
Channels per zone. Each Capacity Max zone your radio by using the alias search.
contains a maximum of 16 assignable positions.
1
Selecting Zones Press to access the menu.
Follow the procedure to select the required zone on 2
your radio. Press or to Zone. Press to
select.
1 Do one of the following: The display shows and the current zone.
34
English
with the Talkgroup ID that has been programmed for

3 Enter the first character of the required alias.
The display shows a blinking cursor. the new Channel Selector Knob position call type.
Your radio does not operate when selected to an
4 Enter the rest of the characters of the required
unprogrammed channel, use the Channel Selector
alias.
Knob to select a programmed channel instead.
The alias search is case-insensitive. If there are
two or more entries with the same name, the Once the required zone is displayed (if you have
display shows the entry listed first in the list. multiple zones in your radio), turn the programmed
The first text line shows the characters you Channel Selector Knob to select the call type.
entered. The following text lines show the
Selecting a Site
shortlisted search results.
A site provides coverage for a specific area. In a
5 multi-site network, the Capacity Max radio will
Press to select.
automatically search for a new site when the signal
The display shows <Zone> Selected
level from the current site drops to an unacceptable
level.
screen.
Roam Request
Selecting a Call Type
A Roam Request tells the radio to search for a
Use the Channel Selector Knob to select a call type. different site, even if the signal from the current site is
This can be a Group Call, Broadcast Call, All Call, or acceptable.
Private Call, depending on how your radio is
programmed. If you change the Channel Selector If there are no sites available,
Knob to a different position (that has a call type • The radio display shows Searching and
assigned to it), this causes the radio to re-register continues to search through the list of sites.
with the Capacity Max System. The radio registers
35
English
• The radio will return to the previous site, if the • The display shows Site Unlocked.
previous site is still available.
Site Restriction
Note:
This is programmed by your dealer. In Capacity Max system, your radio administrator has
the ability to decide which network sites your radio is
Press the programmed Manual Site Roam button. and is not allowed to use. The radio does not have to
You hear a tone, indicating the radio has switched be reprogrammed to change the list of allowed and
to a new site. The display shows Site ID <Site disallowed sites. If your radio attempts to register at a
Number>. disallowed site, your radio receives indication that the
site is denied. The radio then searches for a different
Site Lock On/Off network site.
When toggled on, the radio searches the current site When experiencing site restrictions, your radio
only. When toggled off, the radio searches other sites displays RegisterDenied and the yellow LED double
in addition to the current site.
flashes to indicate a site search.
Press the programmed Site Lock button. Site Trunking
If the Site Lock function is toggled on: A site must be able to communicate with the Trunk
Controller to be considered as System Trunking. If
• You hear a positive indicator tone, indicating the site cannot communicate with the Trunk Controller
the radio has locked to the current site. in the system, a radio enters Site Trunking mode.
• The display shows Site Locked. While in Site Trunking, the radio provides a periodic
If the Site Lock function is toggled off: audible and visual indication to the user to inform the
user of their limited functionality.
• You hear a negative indicator tone, indicating
the radio is unlocked. When a radio is in Site Trunking, the radio displays
Site Trunking and a repetitive tone sounds.
36
English
The radios in Site Trunking are still able to make

Alias Search This method is used for Group,
group and individual voice calls as well as send text Private and All Calls only with a
messages to other radios within the same site. Voice keypad microphone
consoles, logging recorders, phone gateways, and
data applications cannot communicate to the radios Contacts List This method provides direct
at the site. access to the Contacts list.
Once in Site Trunking, a radio that is involved in calls Manual Dial (via This method is used for Private
across multiple sites will only be able to communicate Contacts) and Phone Calls only with a
with other radios within the same site. Communication keypad microphone.
to and from other sites would be lost. Programmed This method is used for Group,
Note: Number Keys Private, and All Calls only with a
If there are multiple sites that cover the current keypad microphone.
location of the radio and one of the sites Note:
enters Site Trunking, the radios roam to You can only have one
another site if within coverage. alias or ID assigned to a
number key, but you can
Calls have more than one
This chapter explains the operations to receive, number key associated
respond to, make, and stop calls. to an alias or ID. All the
number keys on a
You can select a subscriber alias or ID, or group alias keypad microphone can
or ID after you have selected a channel by using one be assigned. See
of these features: Assigning Entries to
Programmable Number
37
English
Note:
Keys on page 306 for
The LED lights up solid green while the radio
more information.
is transmitting and double blinks green when
Programmed This method is used for Group, the radio is receiving a privacy-enabled call.
One Touch Private, and Phone Calls only. To unscramble a privacy-enabled call, your
Access Button radio must have the same Privacy Key, OR
Note:
You can only have one the same Key Value and Key ID (programmed
ID assigned to a One by your dealer), as the transmitting radio (the
Touch Access button radio you are receiving the call from).
with a short or long See Privacy on page 347 for more
programmable button information.
press. Your radio can
have multiple One Group Calls
Touch Access buttons
Your radio must be configured as part of a group to

programmed. receive a call from or make a call to the group of
users.
Programmable This method is used for Phone
Button Calls only. Making Group Calls
To make a call to a group of users, your radio must
Volume/Channel This method manually selects a be configured as part of that group. Follow the
Selector Knob subscriber alias or ID, or group procedure to make Group Calls on your radio.
alias or ID.
The LED lights up solid green while the radio is
• Select a channel with the active group alias or
transmitting and blinks green when the radio is
ID. See Selecting a Call Type on page 35.
receiving.
38
English
• Press the programmed One Touch Access

button. The call initiator can press to end a Group
Call.
2 Press the PTT button to make the call.
The green LED lights up. The first text line shows Making Group Calls by Using the Contacts List
the Group Call icon and alias. Follow the procedure to make Group Calls on your
radio by using the Contacts list.
1
• Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak Press to access the menu.
clearly into the microphone if enabled.
2
• Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak Press or to Contacts. Press to
clearly into the microphone if enabled select.
4 Release the PTT button to listen. 3

The green LED lights up when the target radio Press or to the required alias or ID.
responds. The display shows the Group Call icon, Press to select.
and alias or ID, and the transmitting radio alias or
ID. 4 Hold the microphone 1 inch to 2 inches (2.5 cm to
5.0 cm) from your mouth.
5 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled,
you hear a short alert tone the moment the 5 Press the PTT button to make the call.
transmitting radio releases the PTT button, The green LED lights up.
indicating the channel is free for you to respond.
The first line displays the subscriber alias or ID.
Press the PTT button to respond to the call.
The second line displays Group Call and the
The call ends when there is no voice activity for a Group Call icon.
predetermined period.
39
English
6 Do one of the following: Making Group Calls by Using the Programmable
Number Key
• Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak Follow the procedure to make Group Calls on your
clearly into the microphone if enabled. radio by using the programmable number key.
• Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak
clearly into the microphone if enabled. 1 Long press the programmed number key to the
predefined alias or ID when you are on the Home
7 Release the PTT button to listen. screen.
The green LED blinks when any user in the group If a number key is assigned to an entry in a
responds. The display shows the Group Call icon, particular mode, this feature is not supported when
and alias or ID, and the transmitting radio alias or you long press the number key in another mode.
ID.
A negative indicator tone sounds if the number key
8 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, is not associated to an entry.
you hear a short alert tone the moment the
2 Hold the microphone 1 inch to 2 inches (2.5 cm to

transmitting radio releases the PTT button,
Press the PTT button to respond to the call. 3 Press the PTT button to make the call.
The call ends when there is no voice activity for a The green LED lights up.
4 Release the PTT button to listen.
The call initiator can press to end the Group The green LED blinks when any user in the group
Call. responds.
You hear a short tone. The display shows Call 5 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled,
Ended. you hear a short alert tone the moment the
40
English

Phone Number:. The second line of the display
Press the PTT button to respond to the call. shows a blinking cursor. Use the keypad to enter a
The call ends when there is no voice activity for a telephone number.
predetermined period. The radio returns to the
screen you were on before initiating the call. 4
Press to select. If the entry selected is
empty, a negative indicator tone sounds and the
The call initiator can press to end the Group display shows Phone Call Invalid #.
Call.
5
See Assigning Entries to Programmable Number Press or to Call Phone and Press
Keys on page 306 for more information. to select. If the access code was not
Making Group Calls by Using the Alias Search preconfigured in the Contacts list, the first line of
Follow the procedure to make any calls by using the the display shows Access Code:. The second line
alias search. of the display shows a blinking cursor. Enter the
access code and press the button to
1
Press to access the menu. proceed. If successful, the DTMF tone sounds.
You hear the dialing tone of the telephone user.
2 The first line of the display shows the subscriber
Press or to Contacts. Press to
alias or ID, and the RSSI icon. The second line of
select.
the display shows Phone Call and the Phone
The display shows the entries in alphabetical
Call icon. If unsuccessful, a tone sounds and the
order.
display shows Phone Call Failed. Your radio
3 returns to the Access Code input screen. If the
Press or to the required subscriber access code was preconfigured in the Contacts
alias or ID. The first line of the display shows
41
English
list, the radio returns to the screen you were on
prior to initiating the call. Enter the deaccess code and press to
proceed. The radio returns to the previous screen.
6 Press the PTT button to talk and release it to The DTMF tone sounds and the display shows
listen. The RSSI icon disappears during Ending Phone Call. If successful, a tone sounds
transmission. and the display shows Phone Call Ended. Your
radio returns to the Phone Call screen. If
7 To enter extra digits, if requested by the Phone unsuccessful, your radio returns to the Phone Call
Call, do one of the following. screen. When you press the PTT button while in
the Phone Contacts screen, as tone sounds and
• Press any keypad key to begin the input of the
the display shows Press OK to Place Phone
extra digits. The first line of the display shows
Call. When the telephone user ends the call, a
Extra Digits:. The second line of the display
tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call
shows a blinking cursor. Enter the extra digits
Ended. If the call ends while you are entering the
and press the button to proceed. The extra digits requested by the Phone Call, your
DTMF tone sounds and the radio returns to the radio returns to the screen you were on prior to
previous screen. initiating the call.
• Press One Touch Access button. The DTMF 9 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled,
tone sounds. If the entry for the One Touch you hear a short alert tone the moment the
Access button is empty, a negative indicator transmitting radio releases the PTT button,
tone sounds. indicating the channel is free for you to respond.
8
Press to end the call. If deaccess code was The call ends when there is no voice activity for a
not preconfigured in the Contacts list, the first line predetermined period. A tone sounds. The display
of the display shows De-Access Code:. The shows Call Ended.
42 second line of the display shows a blinking cursor.
English
• The display shows the Group Call icon at the top

The call initiator can press to end the Group right corner.
Call.
• The first text line shows the caller alias.
Note: • The second text line displays the group call alias.
• Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds
During the channel access, press to through the speaker.
dismiss the call attempt and a tone sounds
button or to exit alias search. Press
• If the Channel Free Indication feature is
button or to exit alias search. During the enabled, you hear a short alert tone the
call, when you press One Touch Access moment the transmitting radio releases the
button with the deaccess code preconfigured PTT button, indicating the channel is free for
or enter the deaccess code as the input for you to respond. Press the PTT button to
extra digits, your radio attempts to end the respond to the call.
call. During channel access and access/
• If the Voice Interrupt feature is enabled, press
deaccess code or extra digits transmission,
the PTT button to interrupt the audio from the
you radio responds to On/Off button, Volume
transmitting radio and free the channel for you
Knob, and Channel Rocker only. A tone
to respond.
sounds for every invalid input.
The green LED lights up.
Responding to Group Calls
Follow the procedure to respond to Group Calls on 2 Do one of the following:
your radio.
• Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak
When you receive a Group Call: clearly into the microphone if enabled.
• The green LED blinks.
43
English
• Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak • Press the programmed One Touch Access
clearly into the microphone if enabled. button.
3 Release the PTT button to listen. 2 Press the PTT button to make the call.
The call ends when there is no voice activity for a The green LED lights up.The displays shows the
predetermined period. Group Call icon and alias.
Broadcast Call 3 Do one of the following:

A Broadcast Call is a one-way voice call from any • Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak
user to an entire talkgroup. clearly into the microphone if enabled.
The Broadcast Call feature allows only the call
initiating user to transmit to the talkgroup, while the
recipients of the call cannot respond.
The call initiator can press to end the
The broadcast initiator can also end the broadcast Broadcast Call.
call. To receive a call from a group of users, or to call
a group of users, the radio must be configured as part Making Broadcast Calls Using the Contact List
of a group. Follow the procedure to make Broadcast Calls on
your radio using the Contacts list.
Making Broadcast Calls
Follow the procedure to make Broadcast Calls on 1
your radio. Press to access the menu.
1 Do one of the following: 2

• Select a channel with the active group alias or select.
ID. See Selecting a Call Type on page 35.
44
English
3 1 Long press the programmed number key to the
Press or to the required alias or ID. predefined alias or ID when you are on the Home
Press to select. screen.
If a number key is assigned to an entry in a
4 Press the PTT button to make the call. particular mode, this feature is not supported when
The green LED blinks. you long press the number key in another mode.
The first line displays the subscriber alias or ID. A negative indicator tone sounds if the number key
The second line displays Group Call and the is not associated to an entry.
Group Call icon.
5 Do one of the following: The green LED lights up.The display shows the
Group Call icon at the top right corner. The first
• Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak text line shows the caller alias.
• Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak 3 Do one of the following:
The call initiator can press to end the
Broadcast Call. • Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak
Making Broadcast Calls Using the Programmable
Number Key The call initiator can press to end the
Follow the procedure to make Broadcast Calls on Broadcast Call.
your radio using the programmable number key.
45
English
Receiving Broadcast Calls performing a radio presence check and completes
Follow the procedure to receive a Broadcast Call on the call automatically.
your radio. • The second type is called Full Off Air Call Set-Up
When you receive a Broadcast Call: (FOACSU). FOACSU also sets up the call after
performing a radio presence check. However,
• The green LED blinks. FOACSU calls require user acknowledgement to
• The display shows the Group Call icon at the top complete the call and allows the user to either
right corner. Accept or Decline the call.
• The first text line shows the caller alias. The type of call is configured by the system
• The second text line displays the group call alias. administrator.
through the speaker. Note:
Both the call initiator and recipient are able to
Note: terminate an on-going Private Call by pressing
Recipient users are not allowed to Talkback

during a Broadcast Call. The display shows .
Talkback Prohibit. The Talkback Prohibit Making Private Calls
Tone will sound momentarily if the PTT button Your radio must be programmed for you to initiate a
is pressed during a Broadcast Call. Private Call. You hear a negative indicator tone when
Private Call you initiate the call if this feature is not enabled.If the
target radio is not available, you hear a short tone
A Private Call is a call from an individual radio to and see Party Not Available on the display.
another individual radio. Follow the procedure to make Private Calls on your
There are two ways to set up a Private Call. radio.
• The first call type is called Off Air Call Set-Up 1 Do one of the following:
46 (OACSU). OACSU sets up the call after
English
• Select a channel with the active subscriber Both the call initiator and recipient are able to

alias or ID. See Selecting a Call Type on page terminate an on-going Private Call by pressing
35.
.
button. Making Private Calls by Using the Programmable
Number Key
2 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm)
Follow the procedure to make Private Calls on your
from your mouth.
radio by using the programmable number key.
3 Press the PTT button to make the call. 1 Long press the programmed number key to the
The green LED lights up.The display shows the predefined alias or ID when you are on the Home
Private Call icon, the subscriber alias, and call screen.
status.
4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak particular mode, this feature is not supported when
clearly into the microphone if enabled. you long press the number key in another mode.
A negative indicator tone sounds if the number key
5 Release the PTT button to listen. is not associated to an entry.
The green LED lights up when the target radio
responds. 2 Press the PTT button to make the call.
The green LED lights up. The display shows the
6 The call ends when there is no voice activity for a Private Call icon at the top right corner. The first
predetermined period. You will hear a short text line shows the caller alias. The second text
tone.The display shows Call Ended. line shows the call status.
47
English
The green LED blinks when the target radio shows a blinking cursor. Use the keypad to enter a
responds. The display shows the destination alias. telephone number.
4 The call ends when there is no voice activity for a 4

predetermined period. You will hear a short Press to select. If the entry selected is
tone.The display shows Call Ended. empty, a negative indicator tone sounds and the
display shows Phone Call Invalid #.
terminate an on-going Private Call by pressing 5
Press or to Call Phone and Press
.
to select. If the access code was not
See Assigning Entries to Programmable Number preconfigured in the Contacts list, the first line of
Keys on page 306 for more information. the display shows Access Code:. The second line
Making Private Calls by Using the Alias Search of the display shows a blinking cursor. Enter the

1 proceed. If successful, the DTMF tone sounds.
You hear the dialing tone of the telephone user.
2 The first line of the display shows the subscriber
Press or to Contacts. Press to alias or ID, and the RSSI icon. The second line of
select. the display shows Phone Call and the Phone
The display shows the entries in alphabetical Call icon. If unsuccessful, a tone sounds and the
order. display shows Phone Call Failed. Your radio
returns to the Access Code input screen. If the
3 access code was preconfigured in the Contacts
Press or to the required subscriber
alias or ID. The first line of the display shows list, the radio returns to the screen you were on
Phone Number:. The second line of the display before initiating the call.
48
English
The DTMF tone sounds and the display shows

6 Press the PTT button to talk and release it to
DTMF tone sounds and the radio returns to the radio returns to the screen you were on before
• Press One Touch Access button. The DTMF 9 The call ends when there is no voice activity for a
tone sounds. If the entry for the One Touch predetermined period. You will hear a short
Access button is empty, a negative indicator tone.The display shows Call Ended.
tone sounds.
8 terminate an on-going Private Call by pressing
Press to end the call. If deaccess code was
not preconfigured in the Contacts list, the first line .
of the display shows De-Access Code:. The
Note:
second line of the display shows a blinking cursor.
During the channel access, press to
Enter the deaccess code and press to
dismiss the call attempt and a tone sounds
proceed. The radio returns to the previous screen. 49
English
button or to exit alias search. Press 3 Press the PTT button to make the call.
The LED lights up solid green.
button or to exit alias search. During the
call, when you press One Touch Access The display shows the Private Call alias or ID.
button with the deaccess code preconfigured
or enter the deaccess code as the input for 4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled)
extra digits, your radio attempts to end the and speak clearly into the microphone.
call.
Making a Private Call with a One Touch Call
When the target radio responds, the LED blinks
Button
green.
The One Touch Call feature allows you to easily If there is no voice activity for a predetermined
make a Private Call to a pre-defined Private Call alias period of time, the call ends.
or ID. This feature can be assigned to a short or long
programmable button press.

terminate an on-going Private Call by pressing
You can ONLY have one alias or ID assigned to a
.
One Touch Call button. Your radio can have multiple
One Touch Call buttons programmed. Making Private Calls by Using the Manual Dial
1 Press the programmed One Touch Call button to Follow the procedure to make Private Calls on your
make a Private Call to the pre-defined Private Call radio by using the manual dial.
alias or ID. 1
from your mouth.
50
English

2
Press or to Contacts. Press to responds. The display shows the transmitting user
select. alias or ID.
3 9 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled,

Press or to Manual Dial. Press
to select.
4 indicating the channel is free for you to respond.
Press or to Radio Number. Press Press the PTT button to respond to the call.
to select. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a
predetermined period. A tone sounds. The display
5 Do one of the following: shows Call Ended.
• Both the call initiator and recipient are able to
Enter the subscriber ID, and press to terminate an on-going Private Call by pressing
proceed.
.
• Edit the previously dialed subscriber ID, and
press to proceed. Responding to Private Calls
When you receive a Private Call:
The green LED lights up. The display shows the • The green LED blinks.
destination alias. • Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds
through the speaker.
7 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak
clearly into the microphone if enabled. Note:
Depending on how your radio is configured,
8 Release the PTT button to listen. either Off Air Call Set-Up (OACSU) or Full Off
51
English
Air Call Set-Up (FOACSU), responding to • Release the PTT button to listen.
Private Calls may or may not require user
The call ends when there is no voice activity for a
acknowledgement.
predetermined period. A tone sounds.The display
For the OACSU configuration, your radio shows Call Ended.
unmutes and the call connects automatically.
Note:
The following are methods on how to respond to Both the call initiator and recipient are able
Private Calls configured as FOACSU. to terminate an on-going Private Call by
• To decline a Private Call, do one of the following: pressing .

• All Calls
Press or to Reject and press
An All Call is a call from an individual radio to every
to decline a Private Call. radio on the site or every radio at a group of sites,
•
Press to decline a Private Call. depending on system configuration. An All Call is

used to make important announcements, requiring full
• To accept a Private Call, do one of the following: attention from the user. The users on the system
cannot respond to an All Call.
•
Press or to Accept and press Capacity Max supports Site All Call and Multi-site All
to answer a Private Call. Call. The system administrator may configure one or
both of these in your radio.
• Press the PTT button on any entry.
Note:
• The green LED lights up. Subscribers can support System-Wide All
Calls but Motorola infrastructure does not
• Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak support System-Wide All Calls.
52
English
Making All Calls Making All Calls by Using the Programmable

Number Key
Your radio must be programmed for you to make an
Follow the procedure to make All Calls on your radio
All Call. Follow the procedure to make All Calls on
by using the programmable number key.
your radio.
1 Long press the programmed number key assigned
1 Select a channel with the active All Call group
to the predefined alias or ID when you are on the
alias or ID. See Selecting a Call Type on page 35.
Home screen.
2 Press the PTT button to make the call. If a number key is assigned to an entry in a
The green LED lights up. The display shows the particular mode, this feature is not supported when
Group Call icon and either All Call, Site All you long press the number key in another mode.
Call, or Multi Site Call depending on the A negative indicator tone sounds if the number key
type of configuration. is not associated to an entry.
3 Do one of the following: 2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0
• Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak cm) from your mouth.
• Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak The green LED lights up.The display shows the
clearly into the microphone if enabled. Group Call icon and either All Call, Site All
Users on the channel cannot respond to an All Call, or Multi Site Call depending on the
Call. type of configuration.
The call initiator can press to end the All 4 Do one of the following:
Call. • Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak
53
English
• Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak 4
clearly into the microphone if enabled. Press to select. If the entry selected is
The call initiator can press to end the All display shows Phone Call Invalid #.
Call.
5
Press or to Call Phone. Press to
See Assigning Entries to Programmable Number select. If the access code was not preconfigured in
Keys on page 306 for more information. the Contacts list, the first line of the display shows
Making All Calls by Using the Alias Search Access Code:. The second line of the display
shows a blinking cursor. Enter the access code
1
Press to access the menu. and press the button to proceed. If
successful, the DTMF tone sounds. You hear the
2 dialing tone of the telephone user. The first line of
the display shows the subscriber alias or ID, and

select.
the RSSI icon. The second line of the display
shows Phone Call and the Phone Call icon. If
order.
unsuccessful, a tone sounds and the display
3 shows Phone Call Failed. Your radio returns to
Press or to the required subscriber the Access Code input screen. If the access code
alias or ID. The first line of the display shows was preconfigured in the Contacts list, the radio
Phone Number:. The second line of the display returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating
shows a blinking cursor. Use the keypad to enter a the call.
telephone number.
54
English
The DTMF tone sounds and the display shows

6 Press the PTT button to talk and release it to
• Press One Touch Access button. The DTMF Note:
tone sounds. If the entry for the One Touch
Access button is empty, a negative indicator The call initiator can press to end the All
tone sounds. Call.
Receiving All Calls
8
Press to end the call. If deaccess code was When you receive an All Call:
not preconfigured in the Contacts list, the first line
of the display shows De-Access Code:. The • A tone sounds.
second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. • The green LED blinks.
Enter the deaccess code and press to
right corner.
proceed. The radio returns to the previous screen. 55
English
• The first text line shows the caller alias ID. In Capacity Max, your radio is able to receive calls
• The second text line displays either All Call, and talkback even if the Phone Call capability is
Site All Call, or Multi Site Call disabled.
depending on the type of configuration. The Phone Call capability can be enabled by
• Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds assigning and setting up phone numbers on the
through the speaker. system. Check with your system administrator to
The radio returns to the screen before receiving the determine how your radio has been programmed.
All Call when the call ends. Making Phone Calls
If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you Follow the procedure to make Phone Calls on your
hear a short alert tone when the transmitting radio radio.
releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is
1 Press the programmed One Touch Access
free for you to use. You cannot respond to an All Call.
button to the predefined alias or ID.
Note:
If the entry for the One Touch Access button is

The radio stops receiving the All Call if you empty, a negative indicator tone sounds. If the
switch to a different channel while receiving access code is not preconfigured in the Contact
the call. You are not able to continue with any List, the display shows Access Code:.
menu navigation or editing until the call ends
during an All Call. 2
Enter the access code, and press to
Phone Calls proceed.
A Phone Call is a call from an individual radio to a The access or deaccess code cannot be more
telephone. than 10 characters.
3 Press the PTT button to respond to the call.

56
English
The DTMF Tone sounds and the display shows

Ending Phone Call.
5 Enter extra digits with the keypad if requested by
If the call ends successfully:
the call, and press to proceed. • A tone sounds.
If the call ends while you are entering the extra • The display shows Call Ended.
digits requested by the call, your radio returns to
the screen you were on before initiating the call. If the call fails to end, the radio returns to the
Phone Call screen. Repeat the last two steps or
The DTMF Tone sounds. Your radio returns to the
wait for the telephone user to end the call.
previous screen.
Making Phone Calls by Using the Contacts List
6
Press to end the call. Follow the procedure to make Phone Calls on your
radio by using the Contacts list.
1
• If the deaccess code was not preconfigured, Press to access the menu.
enter the deaccess code when the display
2
shows De-Access Code:, and press to Press or to Contacts. Press to
proceed. select.
The radio returns to the previous screen. order.
3
button. Press or to the required alias or ID.
If the entry for the One Touch Access button Press to select.
is empty, a negative indicator tone sounds.
57
English
When you press the PTT button while on the • The DTMF Tone sounds.
Phone Contacts screen: • You hear the dialing tone of the telephone
• The first line of the display shows Phone user.
Number:. • The first text line shows the subscriber alias or
ID, and the RSSI icon.
• The second line of the display shows a blinking
cursor. • The second text line shows Phone Call, and
the Phone Call icon.
If the selected entry is empty:
If the call is unsuccessful:
• A negative indicator tone sounds.
• • A tone sounds.
The display shows Phone Call Invalid #.
• The display shows Phone Call Failed and
4 then, Access Code:.
Press or to Call Phone. Press
• Your radio returns to the screen you were on
to select.
prior to initiating the call if the access code has
The display shows Access Code: if the access been preconfigured in the Contacts list.
code was not preconfigured.
5 The RSSI icon disappears.
proceed.
The access or deaccess code cannot be more
than 10 characters. 8 Enter extra digits with the keypad if requested by
The first text line shows Calling. The second text
the call, and press to proceed.
line shows the subscriber alias or ID, and the
Phone Call icon.
58 If the call is successful:
English
If the call ends while you are entering the extra When the telephone user ends the call, a tone

digits requested by the call, your radio returns to sounds and the display shows Phone Call
the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. Ended.
The DTMF Tone sounds. Your radio returns to the If the call ends while you are entering the extra
previous screen. digits requested by the Phone Call, your radio
returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating
9
Press to end the call. the call.
10 If the deaccess code was not preconfigured, enter Note:

the deaccess code when the display shows De-
During the channel access, press to
Access Code:, and press to proceed. dismiss the call attempt and a tone sounds.
The radio returns to the previous screen. The
DTMF Tone sounds and the display shows During the call, when you press One Touch
Ending Phone Call. Access button with the deaccess code
preconfigured or enter the deaccess code as
If the call ends successfully: the input for extra digits, your radio attempts to
• A tone sounds. end the call.
• The display shows Call Ended. During channel access and access/ deaccess
If the call fails to end, the radio returns to the code or extra digits transmission, you radio
Phone Call screen. Repeat Step 9 and Step 10, or responds to On/Off button, Volume Knob,
wait for the telephone user to end the call. When and Channel Rocker only. A tone sounds for
you press the PTT button while in the Phone every invalid input.
Contacts screen, as tone sounds and the display Making Phone Calls by Using the Alias Search
shows Press OK to Place Phone Call.
59
English
Press to access the menu. You hear the dialing tone of the telephone user.
The first line of the display shows the subscriber
2 alias or ID, and the RSSI icon. The second line of
select. the display shows Phone Call and the Phone
The display shows the entries in alphabetical Call icon. If unsuccessful, a tone sounds and the
order. display shows Phone Call Failed. Your radio
3 access code was preconfigured in the Contacts
Press or to the required subscriber list, the radio returns to the screen you were on
alias or ID. The first line of the display shows prior to initiating the call.
Phone Number:. The second line of the display
shows a blinking cursor. Use the keypad to enter a 6 Press the PTT button to talk and release it to
telephone number. listen. The RSSI icon disappears during
transmission.
4
Press to select. If the entry selected is
7 To enter extra digits, if requested by the Phone
Call, do one of the following.
display shows Phone Call Invalid #.
5 extra digits. The first line of the display shows
to select. If the access code was not shows a blinking cursor. Enter the extra digits
preconfigured in the Contacts list, the first line of
and press the button to proceed. The
the display shows Access Code:. The second line
DTMF tone sounds and the radio returns to the
of the display shows a blinking cursor. Enter the
previous screen.
60 access code and press the button to
English

Access button is empty, a negative indicator During the channel access, press to
tone sounds. dismiss the call attempt and a tone sounds
button or to exit alias search. Press
8
Press to end the call. If deaccess code was button or to exit alias search. During the
not preconfigured in the Contacts list, the first line call, when you press One Touch Access
of the display shows De-Access Code:. The button with the deaccess code preconfigured
second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. or enter the deaccess code as the input for
Enter the deaccess code and press to extra digits, your radio attempts to end the
proceed. The radio returns to the previous screen. call. During channel access and access/
The DTMF tone sounds and the display shows deaccess code or extra digits transmission,
Ending Phone Call. If successful, a tone sounds you radio responds to On/Off button, Volume
and the display shows Phone Call Ended. Your Knob, and Channel Rocker only. A tone
radio returns to the Phone Call screen. If sounds for every invalid input.
unsuccessful, your radio returns to the Phone Call Making Phone Calls by Using the Manual Dial
screen. When you press the PTT button while in Follow the procedure to make Phone Calls on your
the Phone Contacts screen, as tone sounds and radio by using the manual dial.
Call. When the telephone user ends the call, a 1
Ended. If the call ends while you are entering the 2
extra digits requested by the Phone Call, your Press or to Contacts. Press to
radio returns to the screen you were on prior to select.
initiating the call.
61
English
3 • You hear the dialing tone of the telephone
Press or to Manual Dial. Press user.
to select. • The first text line shows the subscriber alias.
• The display continues to show the Phone Call
4
Press or to Phone Number. Press icon at the top right corner.
to select. If the call is unsuccessful:

The display shows Number: and a blinking cursor. • A tone sounds.
5 • The display shows Phone Call Failed and
Enter the telephone number, and press to then, Access Code:.
proceed. • Your radio returns to the screen you were on
The display shows Access Code: and a blinking before initiating the call if the access code has
cursor if the access code was not preconfigured. been preconfigured in the Contacts list.
6 8
Enter the access code, and press to Press to end the call.
proceed.
The access or deaccess code cannot be more 9 Do one of the following:
than 10 characters. • If the deaccess code was not preconfigured,
enter the deaccess code when the display
7 The green LED lights up. The display shows the
Phone Call icon at the top right corner. The first shows De-Access Code:, and press to
text line shows the subscriber alias. The second proceed.
text line shows the call status.
The radio returns to the previous screen.
If the call is successful:
62 • The DTMF Tone sounds. button.
English
If the entry for the One Touch Access button

is empty, a negative indicator tone sounds. During the channel access, press to
dismiss the call attempt and a tone sounds.
Ending Phone Call. During the call, when you press One
Touch Access button with the deaccess
If the call ends successfully: code preconfigured or enter the deaccess
• A tone sounds. code as the input for extra digits, your radio
attempts to end the call.
• The display shows Call Ended.
During channel access and access/
If the call fails to end, the radio returns to the
deaccess code or extra digits transmission,
Phone Call screen. Repeat Step 11 and Step 12,
you radio responds to On/Off button,
or wait for the telephone user to end the call.
Volume Knob, and Channel Rocker only.
Note: A tone sounds for every invalid input.
When you press PTT button while in the Dual Tone Multi Frequency
Phone Contacts screen, a tone sounds and The Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF) feature
the display shows Press OK to Place allows the radio to operate in a radio system with an
Phone Call. interface to the telephone systems.
When the telephone user ends the call, a You can turn off the DTMF tone by disabling all radio
tone sounds and the display shows Call tones and alerts. See Turning Radio Tones/Alerts On
Ended. or Off on page 131 for more information.
If the call ends while you are entering the
extra digits requested by the Phone Call,
your radio returns to the screen you were
on before initiating the call.
63
English
Initiating DTMF Calls 2 Release the PTT button to listen.
Follow the procedure to initiate DTMF Calls on your
radio. 3
Press to end the call.
1 Press and hold the PTT button to initiate a Dual The display shows Ending Phone Call.
Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF) call.
Note:
2 If Phone Call capability is not enabled in
Enter the desired number, or . your radio, the radio is not able to
You can turn off the DTMF tone by disabling all terminate a phone call as a group call. The
radio tones and alerts. See Turning Radio Tones/ telephone user must end the call. The
Alerts On or Off on page 131. recipient user is only allowed to talkback
during the call.
Responding to Phone Calls as Group Calls
Follow the procedure to respond to Phone Calls as
Group Calls on your radio. • A tone sounds.

When you receive a Phone Call as a Group Call:
• The display shows the Phone Call icon at the top If the call fails to end, the radio returns to the
right corner. Phone Call screen. Repeat Step 3 or wait for the
telephone user to end the call.
• The display shows Phone Call.
• The green LED blinks. Responding to Phone Calls as All Calls
• Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds When you receive a Phone Call as an All Call, the
through the speaker. receiving radio is unable to talkback or respond. The
recipient user is also not allowed to end the All Call.
When you receive a Phone Call as an All Call:
64
English
• The display shows the Phone Call icon at the top

The display shows Ending Phone Call.
right corner.
Note:
• The display shows either All Call, Site All If Phone Call capability is not enabled in
Call, or Multi Site Call depending on the your radio, the radio is not able to
type of configuration and Phone Call. terminate a phone call as a private call.
• The green LED blinks. The telephone user must end the call. The
• Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds recipient user is only allowed to talkback
through the speaker. during the call.
Responding to Phone Calls as Private Calls If the call ends successfully:
Follow the procedure to respond to Phone Calls as
• A tone sounds.
Private Calls on your radio.
When you receive a Phone Call as a Private Call:
• The display shows the Phone Call icon at the top Phone Call screen. Repeat Step 3 or wait for the
right corner. telephone user to end the call.
• The display shows Phone Call.
• The green LED blinks. Call Preemption
• Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds Call Preemption allows a radio to stop any in-
through the speaker. progress voice transmission and initiate a priority
transmission.
With the Call Preemption feature, the system
2 Release the PTT button to listen. interrupts and preempts ongoing calls in instances
where trunked channels are unavailable.
3
65
English
Higher priority calls such as an Emergency Call or an Enabling Voice Interrupt
All Call preempt the transmitting radio to Follow the procedure to initiate Voice Interrupt on
accommodate the higher priority call. If no other your radio.
Radio Frequency (RF) channels are available, an
Your radio must be programmed to allow you to use
Emergency Call preempts an All Call as well.
this feature. Check with your dealer or system
Voice Interrupt administrator for more information.
Voice Interrupt allows the user to shut down an in- 1 Press the PTT button during an on-going call to
progress voice transmission. interrupt the transmission.
This feature uses reverse channel signaling to stop On the interrupted radio, the display shows Call
the in-progress voice transmission of a radio, if the Interrupted. The radio sounds a negative
interrupting radio is configured to Voice Interrupt, and indicator tone until the PTT button is released.
the transmitting radio is configured to be Voice Call
Interruptible. The interrupting radio is then allowed to 2 Wait for acknowledgement.
make a voice transmission to the participant in the If successful:

stopped call.
• A positive indicator tone sounds.
The Voice Interrupt feature significantly improves the
If unsuccessful:
probability of successfully delivering a new
transmission to the intended parties when a call is in • A negative indicator tone sounds.
progress.
Voice Interrupt is accessible to the user only if this
feature has been set up in the radio. Check with your • Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak
dealer or system administrator for more information. clearly into the microphone if enabled.
66
English
If the call setup is unsuccessful, the following occur:

Advanced Features
• If enabled, the Reject Tone sounds.
This chapter explains the operations of the features
• The display shows the failure notice screen
available in your radio.
momentarily.
Note: • The call is terminated and the radio exits the call
Your dealer or system administrator may have setup.
customized your radio for your specific needs.
Check with your dealer or system Talkgroup Scan
administrator for more information. This feature allows your radio to monitor and join calls
for groups defined by a Digital Receive Group List.
Call Queue
The Digital Receive Group List is programmed by the
When there are no resources available to process a system administrator. When the radio detects a call in
call, Call Queue enables the call request to be placed progress on one of these talkgroups, the radio plays
in the system queue for the next available resources. the transmission. User can then push the PTT button
You hear a Call Queue Tone after pressing the PTT and reply to that Talkgroup.
button indicating that the radio has entered Call Your radio is only allowed to join a Talkgroup scan
Queue State. The PTT button may be released once call at the site where another radio has already
the Call Queue Tone is heard. registered with using that Talkgroup, at the desired
If the call setup is successful, the following occur: site.
• The green LED blinks. Note:

Check with your system administrator to
• If enabled, the Talk Permit Tone sounds.
determine how your radio has been
• The display shows the call type icon, ID or alias. programmed.
• The radio user has up to 4 seconds to press the
PTT button to begin voice transmission.
67
English
Bluetooth connections with Bluetooth-enabled devices of the
same type are not supported.
This feature allows you to use your radio with a
Bluetooth-enabled device (accessory) via a Bluetooth Refer to the user manual of your respective
connection. Your radio supports both Motorola and Bluetooth-enabled device for more details on the full
COTS (Commercially available Off-The-Shelf) capabilities of your Bluetooth-enabled device.
Bluetooth-enabled devices.
Note:
Bluetooth operates within a range of 10 meters (32 If disabled via the CPS, all Bluetooth-related
feet) line of sight. This is an unobstructed path features are disabled and the Bluetooth device
between your radio and your Bluetooth-enabled database is erased.
device. It is not recommended that you leave your
Turning Bluetooth On and Off
radio behind and expect your Bluetooth-enabled
device to work with a high degree of reliability when 1
they are separated. Press to access the menu.
At the fringe areas of reception, both voice and tone 2

quality will start to sound "garbled" or "broken". To Press or to Bluetooth. Press to
correct this problem, simply position your radio and select.
Bluetooth-enabled device closer to each other (within
the 10-meter defined range) to re-establish clear 3
Press or to My Status. Press to
audio reception. The Bluetooth function of your radio select.
has a maximum power of 2.5 mW (4 dBm) at the 10- The display shows On and Off. The current status
meter range. is indicated by a .
Your radio can support up to three simultaneous
Bluetooth connections with Bluetooth-enabled 4 Do one of the following:
devices of unique types. For example, a headset, a
68 scanner, and a PTT-Only Device (POD). Multiple
English
• •

Press or to On. Press to Press or to Find Devices to
select. The display shows beside On.
locate available devices. Press or
•
Press or to Off. Press to
to the required device. Press to select.
select. The display shows beside Off.
5
Connecting to Bluetooth Devices Press or to Connect. Press to
select.
Turn on your Bluetooth-enabled device and place it in
pairing mode. Your Bluetooth-enabled device may require
additional steps to complete the pairing. Refer to
1 the user manual of your Bluetooth-enabled device.
The display shows Connecting to <Device>.
2
Press or to Bluetooth. Press to Wait for acknowledgment.
select.
If successful:
3 • A positive indicator tone sounds.
Press or to Devices. Press to
select. • The display shows <Device> Connected and the
Bluetooth Connected icon.
4 Do one of the following: • The display shows beside the connected device.
• If unsuccessful:
Press or to the required device.
Press to select.
• The display shows Connecting Failed.
69
English
Note: • The display shows beside the connected device.
If pin code is required, refer Accessing Radios
If unsuccessful:
by Using Passwords on page 120.
Connecting to Bluetooth Devices in Discoverable
Mode • The display shows Connecting Failed.
Turn on your Bluetooth-enabled device and place it in Disconnecting from Bluetooth Devices
pairing mode. 1
1
2
Press or to Bluetooth. Press to
2 select.
select.
3

3 select.
Press or to Find Me. Press to
select. The radio can now be found by other
4
Bluetooth-enabled devices for a programmed Press or to the required device. Press
duration. This is called Discoverable Mode.
to select.
Wait for acknowledgment.
5
If successful: Press or to Disconnect. Press
to select.
• A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows Disconnecting from
• The display shows <Device> Connected and the <Device>.
70
English
Note: Viewing Device Details

Your Bluetooth-enabled device may require Follow the procedure to view the device details on
additional steps to disconnect. Refer to your radio.
respective user manuals of any Bluetooth-
enabled devices. 1
Wait for acknowledgment. 2
• A tone sounds.
select.
• The display shows <Device> Disconnected and
the Bluetooth Connected icon disappears. 3
• The disappears beside the connected device. Press or to Devices. Press to
select.
Switching Audio Route between Internal Radio
Speaker and Bluetooth Device 4
Follow the procedure to toggle audio routing between Press or to the required device. Press
internal radio speaker and external Bluetooth device. to select.
Press the programmed Bluetooth Audio Switch 5
button. Press or to View Details. Press
The display shows one of the following results: to select.
• A tone sounds. The display shows Route Audio Deleting Device Name
to Radio. You can remove a disconnected device from the list
• A tone sounds. The display shows Route Audio of Bluetooth-enabled devices.
to Bluetooth.
1
71
English
2 3
Press or to Bluetooth. Press to Press or to BT Mic Gain. Press
select. to select.
3 4
Press or to Devices. Press to Press or to the BT Mic Gain type and
select.
the current values. Press to select. You can
4 edit the values here.
Press or to the required device. Press
5
to select. Press or to increase or to decrease
5 values. Press to select.

Press or to Delete. Press to
select. The display shows Device Deleted. Indoor Location
Bluetooth Mic Gain Note:

This feature allows the user to control the microphone Indoor Location feature is applicable for
gain value of the connected Bluetooth-enabled models with the latest software and hardware.
device. Check with your dealer or system
administrator for more information.
1
Press to access the menu. Indoor Location can be used to keep track of radio
users location while indoors. When Indoor Location is
2 activated, the radio is in a limited discoverable mode.
select. Dedicated beacons are used to locate the radio and
determine its position.
72
English
Turning Indoor Location On or Off

The display shows Indoor Location Off.
You hear a good key tone.
You can turn on or turn off Indoor Location by
performing one of the following actions. One of the following scenarios occurs.
• Access this feature via the menu. • If successful, the Indoor Location Available
icon disappears on the Home screen
a)
Press to access the menu. display.
a) • If unsuccessful, the display shows Turning
Press or to Bluetooth and press Off Failed. You hear a bad key tone.
to select.
• Access this feature via the programmed button.
a)
Press or to Indoor Location and a) Long press the programmed Indoor Location
button to turn on Indoor Location.
press to select. The display shows Indoor Location On. You
b) hear a positive tone.
Press to turn on Indoor Location.
The display shows Indoor Location On. You One of the following scenarios occurs.
hear a good key tone.
• If successful, the Indoor Location Available
One of the following scenarios occurs. icon appears on the Home screen display.
• If unsuccessful, the display shows Turning
icon appears on the Home screen display. On Failed. If unsuccessful, you hear a
negative tone.
b) Press the programmed Indoor Location button
On Failed. You hear a bad key tone.
to turn off Indoor Location.
c)
Press to turn off Indoor Location. The display shows Indoor Location Off.
You hear a positive tone.
73
English
One of the following scenarios occurs. Multi-Site Controls
• If successful, the Indoor Location Available Starting Manual Site Search
icon disappears on the Home screen Follow the procedure to start manual site search
display. when the received signal strength is poor in order to
• If unsuccessful, the display shows Turning attempt to find a site with better signal. .
Off Failed. If unsuccessful, you hear a
negative tone. If the radio finds a new site:
Accessing Indoor Location Beacons Information
If the radio fails to find a new site:
Displays information on Indoor Location Beacons
1
Press to access the menu. Site Lock On/Off
2 When toggled on, the radio searches the current site

Press or to Bluetooth and press only. When toggled off, the radio searches other sites
in addition to the current site.
to select.
Press the programmed Site Lock button.
3
Press or to Indoor Location and If the Site Lock function is toggled on:
press to select. • You hear a positive indicator tone, indicating
the radio has locked to the current site.
4
Press or to Beacons and press • The display shows Site Locked.
to select. If the Site Lock function is toggled off:
74 The display shows the beacons information.
English
• You hear a negative indicator tone, indicating If this feature is enabled when your radio is not set to

the radio is unlocked. the home channel for a period of time, the following
• The display shows Site Unlocked. occurs periodically:
• The Home Channel Reminder tone and
Accessing Neighbor Sites List
announcement sound.
This feature allows the user to check the adjacent
sites list of the current home site. Follow the • The first line of the display shows Non.
procedure to access the Neighbor Sites List: • The second line shows Home Channel.
Muting the Home Channel Reminder
1
Press to access the menu. When the Home Channel Reminder occurs, you can
temporarily mute the reminder.
2
Press or to Utilities.Press to Press the Silence Home Channel Reminder
select. programmable button.
The first line of the display shows HCR and the
3
Press or to Radio Info. Press second line shows Silenced.
to select.
Setting New Home Channels
4 When the Home Channel Reminder occurs, you can
Press or to Neighbor Sites. Press set a new home channel.
to select. 1 Do one of the following:
Home Channel Reminder • Press the Reset Home Channel
This feature provides a reminder when the radio is programmable button to set the current
not set to the home channel for a period of time. channel as the new Home Channel. Skip the
following steps.
75
English
The first line of the display shows the channel this feature to remotely monitor any audible activity
alias and the second line shows New Home Ch. surrounding the target radio.
• Both your radio and the target radio must be
programmed to allow you to use this feature.
2 If initiated, the green LED blinks once on the target
Press or to Utilities. Press to
select. radio. This feature automatically stops after a
programmed duration or when there is any user
3 operation on the target radio.
Initiating Remote Monitors
to select. Follow the procedure to initiate Remote Monitor on
your radio.
4
Press or to Home Channel. Press
1 Press the programmed Remote Monitor button.
to select.
2
Press or to the required alias or ID.
5
Press or to the desired new home
Press to select.
channel alias. Press to select. The display shows a transitional mini notice,
The display shows beside the selected home indicating the request is in progress. The green
channel alias. LED lights up.
Remote Monitor 3 Wait for acknowledgment.

If successful:
This feature is used to turn on the microphone of a
target radio with a subscriber alias or ID. You can use • A positive indicator tone sounds.
76 • The display shows a positive mini notice.
English
• The audio from the monitored radio starts

4
playing for a programmed duration, and the Press or to Remote Mon.. Press
display shows Rem. Monitor. Once the timer to select.
expires, an alert tone sounds, and the LED The display shows a transitional mini notice,
turns off. indicating the request is in progress. The green
LED lights up.
If unsuccessful:
• A negative indicator tone sounds. 5 Wait for acknowledgment.
If successful:
• The display shows a negative mini notice.
Initiating Remote Monitors by Using the Contacts • The display shows a positive mini notice.
List
Follow the procedure to initiate Remote Monitor on
playing for a programmed duration, and the
your radio by using the Contacts list.
display shows Rem. Monitor. Once the timer
1 expires, an alert tone sounds, and the LED
Press to access the menu. turns off.
2 If unsuccessful:
select. • A negative indicator tone sounds.
3
Press to select.
77
English
Initiating Remote Monitors by Using the Manual 6
Dial Press or to Remote Mon.. Press
Follow the procedure to initiate Remote Monitor on to select.
your radio by using the manual dial. The display shows a transitional mini notice,
indicating the request is in progress. The green
1 LED lights up.
7 Wait for acknowledgment.
2
Press or to Contacts. Press to If successful:
select. • A positive indicator tone sounds.
Press or to Manual Dial. Press • The audio from the monitored radio starts
to select. playing for a programmed duration, and the

Press or to Radio Number. Press
turns off.
to select.
If unsuccessful:
5 Do one of the following: • A negative indicator tone sounds.
• Enter the subscriber alias or ID, and press • The display shows a negative mini notice.
to proceed.
•
Edit the previously dialed ID, and press to
proceed.
78
English
Stopping Remote Monitors Each entry, depending on context, associates with

Follow the procedure to stop Remote Monitor on your the different call types: Group Call, Private Call,
radio. Broadcast Call, Site All Call, Multi-site All Call, PC
Call or Dispatch Call.
1 Press the programmed Transmit Interrupt
Remote Dekey button. PC Call and Dispatch Call are data-related. They are
The display shows a transitional mini notice, only available with the applications. Refer to the data
indicating the request is in progress. The green applications documentation for further details.
LED lights up. Additionally, Contacts menu allows you to assign
each entry to a programmable number key or more
on a keypad microphone. If an entry is assigned to a
If successful:
number key, your radio can perform a quick dial on
• A positive indicator tone sounds. the entry.
• The display shows a positive mini notice. Note:
If unsuccessful: You see a checkmark before each number key
that is assigned to an entry. If the checkmark
• A negative indicator tone sounds. is before Empty, you have not assign a
• The display shows a negative mini notice. number key to the entry.
Contacts Settings Each entry within Contacts displays the following
information:
Contacts provides address book capabilities on your
radio. Each entry corresponds to an alias or ID that • Call Type
you use to initiate a call. The entries are • Call Alias
alphabetically sorted. • Call ID
79
English
Note: 5 Do one of the following:
If the Privacy feature is enabled on a channel, • If the desired number key has not been
you can make privacy-enabled Group Calls,
Private Calls, All Calls, and Phone Calls on assigned to an entry, press or to
that channel. Only target radios with the same
the desired number key. Press to select.
Privacy Key, or the same Key Value and Key
ID as your radio will be able to decrypt the • If the desired number key has been assigned
transmission. to an entry, the display shows The Key is
Already Assigned and then, the first text line
Assigning Entries to Programmable Number Keys shows Overwrite?. Do one of the following:
Follow the procedure to assign entries to
programmable number keys on your radio. Press or to Yes. Press to
select.
1
The radio sounds a positive indicator tone and
2 the display shows Contact Saved and a

Press or to Contacts. Press to positive mini notice.
select.
Press or to No to return to the
3 previous step.
Each entry can be associated to different number
Press to select.
keys. You see a before each number key that is
4 assigned to an entry. If the is before Empty, that
Press or to Program Key. Press number key is not assigned.
to select.
80
English

4
particular mode, this feature is not supported when Press or to Program Key. Press
you long press the number key in another mode. to select.
The screen automatically returns to the previous 5
menu. Press or to Empty. Press to
select.
Removing Associations Between Entries and The first text line shows Clear from all keys.
Programmable Number Keys
Follow the procedure to remove the associations 6
Press or to Yes. Press to select.
between entries and programmable number keys on
your radio. Note:
When an entry is deleted, the association
1 Do one of the following: between the entry and its programmed
• Long press the programmed number key to the number key(s) is removed.
required alias or ID. Proceed to Step 4. A positive indicator tone sounds. The display
• shows Contact Saved.
The screen automatically returns to the previous
2 menu.
select. Adding New Contacts
Follow the procedure to add new contacts on your
3
Press or to the required alias or ID. radio.
Press to select. 1
81
English
2 Call Indicator Settings
Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Private
select.
Calls
3 Follow the procedure to activate or deactivate call
Press or to New Contact. Press ringers for Private Calls on your radio.
to select.
1
4 Press to access the menu.
Press or to select contact type Radio
2
Contact or Phone Contact. Press to select. Press or to Utilities. Press to
select.
5 Enter the contact number with the keypad, and
3
press to proceed. Press or to Radio Settings. Press
6 Enter the contact name with the keypad, and to select.
press to proceed. 4
Press or to Tones/Alerts. Press
7 to select.
Press or to the required ringer type.
Press to select. 5
Press or to Call Ringers. Press
A positive indicator tone sounds. The display
shows a positive mini notice. to select.
82
English
6 4
Press or to Private Call. Press Press or to Tones/Alerts. Press
to select. to select.
7 5
Press or to the required tone. Press Press or to Call Ringers. Press
If enabled appears besides Enabled. If
disabled, disappears beside Enabled. 6
Press or to Text Message. Press
Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Text to select.
Messages The display shows and the current tone.
Follow the procedure to activate or deactivate call
ringers for text messages on your radio. 7
Press or to the required tone. Press
1
Press to access the menu. to select. The display shows beside the
selected tone.
2
Press or to Utilities. Press to Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Call
select. Alerts
3
Press or to Radio Settings. Press ringers for Call Alerts on your radio.
to select. 1
83
English
2 Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for
Press or to Utilities. Press to Selective Calls
select. Follow the procedure to activate or deactivate call
ringers for Selective Calls on your radio.
3
1
to select.
2
4 Press or to Utilities. Press to
Press or to Tones/Alert. Press
select.
to select.
3
5 Press or to Radio Settings. Press
to select.
to select.
4
6 Press or to Tones/Alerts. Press
Press or to Call Alert. Press
7 5
Press or to the required tone. Press Press or to Call Ringers. Press
to select. The display shows beside the to select.
selected tone.
6
Press or to Selective Call. Press
to select.
84
English
The display shows and the current tone.

5
7
Press or to the required tone. Press to select.
to select. The display shows beside the 6
selected tone. Press or to Telemetry. Press to
select.
Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for The current tone is indicated by a
Telemetry Status with Text
Follow the procedure to activate or deactivate call Assigning Ring Styles
ringers for telemetry status with text on your radio. The radio can be programmed to sound one of ten
predefined ringing tones when receiving a Call Alert
1 or a Text Message from a particular contact. The
radio sounds out each ring style as you navigate
2 through the list. Follow the procedure to assign ring
Press or to Utilities. Press to styles on your radio.
select.
1
3
2
to select. Press or to Contacts. Press to
select.
4 The entries are alphabetically sorted.
to select. 3
Press to select.
85
English
4 You can perform the following tasks in each of your
Press or to Edit. Press to call lists:
select.
• Store Alias or ID to Contacts
5 • Delete Call
Press or to Edit Ringtone. Press
• Delete All Calls
to select. • View Details
6 Viewing Recent Calls

Press or to the required tone. Press Follow the procedure to view recent calls on your
radio.
to select.
A appears beside the selected tone. 1
Escalating Alarm Tone Volume 2
The radio can be programmed to continually alert, Press or to Call Log. Press to
when a radio call remains unanswered. This is done select.
by automatically increasing the alarm tone volume
over time. This feature is known as Escalert. 3
Press or to the preferred list. Press
Call Log Features
to select.
Your radio keeps track of all recent outgoing, The options are Missed, Answered, and Outgoing
answered, and missed Private Calls. The call log lists.
feature is used to view and manage recent calls.
The display shows the most recent entry.
Missed Call Alerts may be included in the call logs,
depending on the system configuration on your radio. 4
Press or to view the list.
86
English
You can start a Private Call with the alias or ID the

display is currently showing by pressing the PTT
button. alias. Press to select.
You can store an ID without an alias.
Storing Aliases or IDs from the Call List
The display shows a positive mini notice.
Follow the procedure to store aliases or IDs on your
radio from the Call list. Deleting Calls from the Call List
1 Follow the procedure to delete calls on your radio
Press to access the menu. from the Call list.
2 1
Press or to Call Log. Press to Press to access the menu.
select.
2
Press or to Call Log. Press to
3
Press or to the required list. Press select.
to select. 3
Press or to the required list. Press
4
Press or to the required alias or ID. to select.
If the list is empty:
Press to select.
• A tone sounds.
5 • The display shows List Empty.
Press or to Store. Press to
select.
The display shows a blinking cursor.
87
English
4 2
Press or to the required alias or ID. Press or to Call Log. Press to
select.
Press to select.
3
5 Press or to the required list. Press
Press or to Delete Entry?. Press
to select.
to select.
4
6 Do one of the following: Press or to the required alias or ID.
• Press to select.
Press to select Yes to delete the entry.
The display shows Entry Deleted. 5
Press or to Delete All. Press
• to select.
Press or to No. Press to
select.
•
Press to select Yes to delete all entries.
Deleting All Calls from the Call List
Follow the procedure to delete all calls on your radio The display shows a positive mini notice.
from the Call list. •
1 select.
88
English
Viewing Details from the Call List This feature is applicable for subscriber aliases or IDs

Follow the procedure to view details on your radio only and is accessible through the menu via
from the Call list. Contacts, manual dial, or a programmed One Touch
Access button.
1
Press to access the menu. In Capacity Max, the Call Alert feature allows a radio
user or a dispatcher to send an alert to another radio
2 user requesting the radio user to call back the
select. initiating radio user when available. Voice
communication is not involved in this feature.
3 The Call Alert Operation can be configured by the
Press or to the required list. Press
dealer or the system administrator in two ways:
to select.
• The radio is configured to allow the user to press
4 the PTT button to respond directly to the call
Press or to the required alias or ID. initiator by making a Private Call.
Press to select. • The radio is configured to allow the user to press
the PTT button and continue with other Talkgroup
5 communication. Pressing the PTT button on the
Press or to View Details. Press call alert entry will not allow the user to respond to
to select. the call initiator. The user must navigate to the
The display shows the details. Missed Call Log option at the Call Log menu and
respond to the Call Alert from there.
Call Alert Operation An Off Air Call Set-Up (OACSU) private call allows
Call Alert paging enables you to alert a specific radio the user to respond immediately while an Full Off Air
user to call you back when they are able to do so. Call Set-Up (FOACSU) private call requires user
89
English
acknowledgement for the call. OACSU type calls are 2
therefore, recommended to be used for the call alert Press or to Contacts. Press to
feature. See Private Call on page 46. select.
Making Call Alerts 3
Follow the procedure to make Call Alerts on your Press or to the required alias or ID.
radio.
Press to select.
4
button. Press or to Call Alert. Press
The display shows Call Alert and the to select.
subscriber alias or ID. The green LED lights up. The display shows Call Alert and the
subscriber alias or ID. The green LED lights up.
If the Call Alert acknowledgment is received, the 5 Wait for acknowledgment.
display shows a positive mini notice. If the Call Alert acknowledgment is received, the
If the Call Alert acknowledgment is not received, display shows a positive mini notice.
the display shows a negative mini notice. If the Call Alert acknowledgment is not received,
the display shows a negative mini notice.
Making Call Alerts by Using the Contacts List
Follow the procedure to make Call Alerts on your Responding to Call Alerts
radio by using the Contacts list. Follow the procedure to respond to Call Alerts on
your radio.
1
Press to access the menu. When you receive a Call Alert:
• A repetitive tone sounds.
• The yellow LED blinks.
90
English
• The display shows the notification list listing a Call When an Emergency Alarm is received, the recipient

Alert with the alias or ID of the calling radio. may choose to either delete the alarm and exit the
Alarm List, or respond to the Emergency Alarm by
Depending on the configuration by your dealer or pressing the PTT button and transmitting non-
system administrator, you can respond to a Call emergency voice.
Alert by doing one of the following:
Your dealer or system administrator can set the
• Press the PTT button and respond with a duration of a button press for the programmed
Private Call directly to the caller. Emergency button, except for long press, which is
• Press the PTT button to continue normal similar with all other buttons:
talkgroup communication.
Short Press Duration between 0.05 seconds and
The Call Alert is moved to the Missed Call 0.75 seconds.
option at the Call Log menu. You can respond
to the caller from the Missed Called log. Long Press Duration between 1.00 second and
3.75 seconds.
See Notification List on page 123 and Call Log
Features on page 86 for more information. The Emergency button is assigned with the
Emergency On/Off feature. Check with your dealer for
Emergency Operation the assigned operation of the Emergency button.
An Emergency Alarm is used to indicate a critical Note:
situation. You are able to initiate an Emergency at
any time even when there is activity on the current If short press the Emergency button is
channel. assigned to turn on the Emergency mode,
then long press the Emergency button is
In Capacity Max, the receiving radio can only support assigned to exit the Emergency mode.
a single Emergency Alarm at a time. If initiated, a
second Emergency Alarm will override the first alarm.
91
English
If long press the Emergency button is Note:
assigned to turn on the Emergency mode, Only one of the Emergency Alarms above can
then short press the Emergency button is be assigned to the programmed Emergency
assigned to exit the Emergency mode. button or the Emergency footswitch.
Your radio supports three Emergency Alarms: Sending Emergency Alarms
This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm,
• Emergency Alarm
a non-voice signal, which triggers an alert indication
• Emergency Alarm with Call on a group of radios. Follow the procedure to send
• Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow Emergency Alarms on your radio.
In addition, each alarm has the following types: Your radio does not display any audio or visual
indicators during Emergency mode when it is set to
Regular Radio transmits an alarm signal and
Silent.
shows audio and/or visual indicators.
1 Press the programmed Emergency On button.
Silent Radio transmits an alarm signal without

any audio or visual indicators. Radio You see one of these results:
receives calls without any sound • The display shows Tx Alarms and the
through the speaker, until the destination alias.
programmed hot mic transmission
• The display shows Tx Telegram and the
period is over and/or you press the PTT
destination alias.
button.
The green LED lights up. The Emergency icon
Silent Radio transmits an alarm signal without
appears.
with any audio or visual indicators, but allow
Voice incoming calls to sound through the Note:
speaker. If programmed, the Emergency Search
tone sounds. This tone is muted when the
92
English
radio transmits or receives voice, and stops from the system, or when channel access

when the radio exits Emergency mode. attempts have been exhausted.
The Emergency Search tone can be
No voice call is associated with the sending of
programmed by the dealer or system
an Emergency Alarm when operating as
administrator.
Emergency Alarm Only.
2 Wait for acknowledgment. Sending Emergency Alarms with Call
If successful: This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm
• The Emergency tone sounds. with Call to a group of radios or a dispatcher. Upon
acknowledgement by the infrastructure within the
group, a group of radios can communicate over a
• The display shows Alarm Sent. programmed Emergency channel. Follow the
If unsuccessful after all retries have been procedure to send Emergency Alarms with call on
exhausted: your radio.
• A tone sounds. The radio must be configured for Emergency Alarm
• The display shows Alarm Failed. and Call to perform an emergency call after the alarm
process.
The radio exits the Emergency Alarm mode and
returns to the Home screen. 1 Press the programmed Emergency On button.
You see the following:
Note: The display shows Tx Alarm and the destination
When configured for Emergency Alarm only, alias. The Emergency icon appears. The green
the emergency process consists only of the LED lights up.
Emergency Alarm delivery. The emergency Note:
ends when an acknowledgement is received If programmed, the Emergency Search
tone sounds. This tone is muted when the 93
English
radio transmits or receives voice, and stops • Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak
when the radio exits Emergency mode. clearly into the microphone if enabled.
If an Emergency Alarm acknowledgment is • Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak
successful received: clearly into the microphone if enabled.
• The Emergency tone sounds. 4 Release the PTT button to listen.

• The green LED blinks. The display shows the caller and group aliases.
• The display shows Alarm Sent.
5 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled,
• Your radio enters the Emergency call mode you hear a short alert tone the moment the
when the display shows Emergency and the transmitting radio releases the PTT button,
destination group alias. indicating the channel is free for you to respond.
If an Emergency Alarm acknowledgment is not Press the PTT button to respond to the call.
successfully received:
6 Press the Emergency Off button to exit the
• All retries are exhausted. Emergency mode.

• A low-pitched tone sounds. The radio returns to the Home screen.
• The display shows Alarm Failed.
Note:
• The radio exits the Emergency Alarm mode. Depending on how your radio is
programmed, you may or may not hear a
2 Press the PTT button to initiate a voice
Talk Permit tone. Your radio dealer or
transmission.
system administrator can provide more
The green LED lights up.The display shows the
information on how your radio has been
Group Call icon.
programmed for Emergency.
94
English
Note: for a programmed duration. During Emergency Cycle

The Emergency Call initiator may press Mode, received calls sound through the speaker.
to end an on-going emergency call. If you press the PTT button during the programmed
The radio returns to a call idle state but the receiving period, you hear a prohibit tone, indicating
emergency call screen remains open. that you should release the PTT button. The radio
ignores the PTT button press and remains in
Sending Emergency Alarms with Voice to Follow Emergency mode.
This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm
If you press the PTT button during hot mic, and
with Voice to Follow to a group of radios. Your radio
continue to press it after the hot mic duration expires,
microphone is automatically activated, allowing you to
the radio continues to transmit until you release the
communicate with the group of radios without
PTT button.
pressing the PTT button. This activated microphone
state is also known as hot mic. If the Emergency Alarm request fails, the radio does
not retry to send the request, and enters the hot mic
Note:
state directly.
Your radio cannot detect a non-IMPRES
microphone that is attached to the rear Note:
accessory connector. Some accessories may not support hot mic.
Check with your dealer or system
When no microphone is detected at the
specified programmed connector, your radio
checks the alternative connector. Here, your Follow the procedure to send Emergency Alarms with
radio gives priority to the detected voice to follow on your radio.
microphone.
1 Press the programmed Emergency On button or
If your radio has Emergency Cycle Mode enabled, the Emergency footswitch.
repetitions of hot mic and receiving period are made You see one of these results:
95
English
• The display shows Tx Alarm and the the procedure to receive and view Emergency Alarms
destination alias. on your radio.
• The display shows Tx Telegram and the When you receive an Emergency Alarm:
destination alias.
• A tone sounds.
• The red LED blinks.
appears.
• The display shows the Emergency Alarm List, the
2 Once the display shows Alarm Sent, speak Emergency Talkgroup ID or alias, and the ID or
clearly into the microphone. alias of the transmitting radio.
The radio automatically stops transmitting when: 1

Press to view the alarm.
• The cycling duration between hot mic and
receiving calls expires, if Emergency Cycle 2
Press to view the action options and details
Mode is enabled.
of the entry in the Alarm List.

• The hot mic duration expires, if Emergency
Cycle Mode is disabled. 3
Press and select Yes to exit the Alarm list.
3 Press the Emergency Off button to exit the The radio returns to the home screen with an
Emergency mode. Emergency Icon displayed at the top, indicating
The radio returns to the Home screen. the unresolved Emergency Alarm. The
Emergency Icon disappears once the entry in the
Receiving Emergency Alarms Alarm List is deleted.
The receiving radio can only support a single
Emergency Alarm at a time. If initiated, a second 4
Emergency Alarm will override the first alarm. Follow Press to access the menu.
96
English

5 Select Alarm List to revisit the Alarm list.
Press the PTT button to transmit non-emergency
6 The tone sounds and the red LED blinks until you voice to the same group the Emergency Alarm
exit the Emergency mode. However, the tone can targeted.
be silenced. Do one of the following: The green LED lights up.
• Press the PTT button to call the group of radios 3 Do one of the following:
which received the Emergency Alarm.
• Press any programmable button. clearly into the microphone if enabled.
Responding to Emergency Alarms
When an Emergency Alarm is received, the recipient
may choose to either delete the alarm and exit the 4 Release the PTT button to listen.
Alarm List, or respond to the Emergency Alarm by When the emergency initiating radio responds:
pressing the PTT button and transmitting non-
emergency voice. Follow the procedure to respond to • The red LED blinks.
Emergency Alarms on your radio. • The display shows the Emergency Call icon,
the Emergency Talkgroup ID or alias, and the
1 If the Emergency Alarm Indication is enabled, the ID or alias of the transmitting radio.
Emergency Alarm List appears when the radio
Note:
receives an Emergency Alarm. Press or If the Emergency Call Indication is not
enabled, the display shows the Group Call
to the required alias or ID.
icon, Emergency Talkgroup ID or alias, and
2 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, the ID or alias of the transmitting radio.
transmitting radio releases the PTT button, 97
English
Responding to Emergency Alarms with Call 2 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak
Follow the procedure to respond to Emergency clearly into the microphone if enabled.
Alarms with Call on your radio.
When you receive an Emergency Call:
When the emergency initiating radio responds:
• The Emergency Call Tone sounds if the
Emergency Call Indication and Emergency Call
Decode Tone is enabled. The Emergency Call • The display shows the Emergency Call icon,
Tone will not sound if only the Emergency Call the Emergency Talkgroup ID or alias, and the
Indication is enabled. ID or alias of the transmitting radio.
• The display shows the Emergency Call icon at Note:
the top right corner. If the Emergency Call Indication is not
• The text line shows the Emergency Talkgroup ID enabled, the display shows the Group Call
or alias, and the ID or alias of the transmitting icon, Emergency Talkgroup ID or alias, and
radio. the ID or alias of the transmitting radio.

through the speaker. Text Messaging
Your radio is able to receive data, for example a text
1 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, message, from another radio or a text message
you hear a short alert tone the moment the application.
indicating the channel is free for you to respond. There are 2 types of text messages, DMR Short Text
Press the PTT button to respond to the call. Message and text message.
The green LED lights up. The maximum length of characters when you send
and receive a text message is 280 characters which
includes the subject line. You see the subject line
98
English
when you receive messages from e-mail applications.

3
The maximum length of 280 characters is applicable Press or to Inbox. Press to
only for models with the latest software and select.
hardware. Check with your dealer or system If the Inbox is empty:
• The display shows List Empty.
For DMR Short Text Message, the maximum length is • A tone sounds, if the Keypad Tone is turned
23 characters. on.
The radio exits the current screen once the inactivity
timer expires. 4
Press or to the required message.
Note: Press to select.
Long press at any time to return to the The display shows a subject line if the message is
Home screen. from an e-mail application.
Text Messages Viewing Telemetry Status Text Messages

The text messages are stored in an Inbox, and sorted Follow the procedure to view a telemetry status text
according to the most recently received. message from the inbox.
Viewing Text Messages
Follow the procedure to view text messages on your 1
radio.
2
1 Press or to Messages. Press to
select.
2
Press or to Messages. Press to
select.
99
English
3 sender of the message if the PTT button is
Press or to Inbox. Press to pressed.
select.
4
Press or to the required message. •
Press or to Read. Press to
Press to select. select.
You cannot reply to a Telemetry Status text The display shows the text message. The
message. display shows a subject line if the message is
The display shows Telemetry: <Status Text from an e-mail application.
Message>. •
Press or to Read Later. Press
5 to select.
Long press to return to the Home screen.
The radio returns to the screen you were on

Responding to Text Messages
prior to receiving the text message.
Follow the procedure to respond to text messages on
your radio. •
When you receive a text message: select.
• The display shows the Notification list with the 2 Do one of the following:
alias or ID of the sender.
•
• The display shows the Message icon. Press to return to inbox.
Note: •
The radio exits the Text Message alert screen Press a second time to reply, forward, or
and sets up a Private or Group Call to the delete the text message.
100
English
Responding to Text Messages with Quick Text

6
Follow the procedure to respond to text messages Press or to Reply. Press to
with Quick Text messages on your radio. select.

Press or to Quick Reply. Press
• Press the programmed Text Message button. to select.
Proceed to Step 3.
• 8
Press to access the menu. Press or to the required message.
Press to select.
2
Press or to Messages. Press to The display shows a transitional mini notice,
select. confirming the message is being sent.
3 9 Wait for acknowledgment.

Press or to Inbox. Press to If successful:
select.
• A tone sounds.
If unsuccessful:
Press to select.
The display shows a subject line if the message is • A tone sounds.
from an e-mail application. • The display shows a negative mini notice.
• The radio returns to the Resend option screen.
5
Press to access the sub-menu.
101
English
Resending Text Messages 2
Follow the procedure to resend text messages on Press or to the required alias or ID.
your radio.
Press to select.
When you are at the Resend option screen: The display shows a transitional mini notice,
confirming your message is being sent.
Press to resend the same message to the
same subscriber or group alias or ID.
If successful:
If successful:
• A tone sounds.
• A tone sounds.
• The display shows a positive mini notice.
If unsuccessful:
If unsuccessful:
• A tone sounds.
• A tone sounds.

• The radio returns to the Resend option screen. Note:
You can also manually select a target radio
Forwarding Text Messages address (see Forwarding Text Messages
Follow the procedure to forward text messages on by Using the Manual Dial on page 328).
your radio.
When you are at the Resend option screen:
1
Press or to Forward, and press
to send the same message to another subscriber
or group alias or ID.
102
English
Forwarding Text Messages by Using the Manual If unsuccessful:

Dial
• A tone sounds.
Follow the procedure to forward text messages by
using the manual dial on your radio. • The display shows a negative mini notice.
1 Editing Text Messages

Press or to Forward. Press to
select. Select Edit to edit the message.
Note:
2 If a subject line is present (for messages
Press to send the same message to another
subscriber or group alias or ID. received from an e-mail application), you
cannot edit it.
3
Press or to Manual Dial. Press 1
Press or to Edit. Press to
to select.
select.
The display shows Radio Number:.
4
Enter the subscriber ID, and press to 2 Use the keypad to edit your message.
proceed.
•
The display shows a transitional mini notice, Press to move one space to the left.
confirming your message is being sent. •
Press or to move one space to the
5 Wait for acknowledgment. right.
If successful: •
Press to delete any unwanted
• A tone sounds. characters.
103
English
• 2
Long press to change text entry method. Press or to Messages. Press to
select.
3
Press once message is composed.
3
Press or to Compose. Press to
select.
• A blinking cursor appears.
Press or to Send and press
to send the message. 4 Use the keypad to type your message.
•
Press or to Save and press
Press to move one space to the left.
to save the message to the Drafts folder.
•
Press to edit the message. Press or to move one space to the right.
•
Press to choose between deleting the Press to delete any unwanted characters.
message or saving it to the Drafts folder.
Long press to change text entry method.
Writing Text Messages
Follow the procedure to write text message on your 5
radio. Press once message is composed.
Do one of the following:
•
• Press the programmed Text Message button. Press to send the message.
Proceed to Step 3.
•
104
English
• The display shows transitional mini notice,

Press . Press or to choose confirming your message is being sent.
among editing, deleting, or saving the
If successful:
message. Press to select.
• A tone sounds.
Sending Text Messages • The display shows positive mini notice.
Follow the procedure to send text message on your
If unsuccessful:
radio.
• A low tone sounds.
It is assumed that you have a newly written text
message or a saved text message. • The display shows negative mini notice.
• The message is moved to the Sent Items
Select the message recipient. Do one of the folder.
following: • The message is marked with a Send Failed
• icon.
Note:
Press to select. For a newly written text message, the radio
• returns you to the Resend option screen.
Deleting Text Messages from the Inbox
to select.Key in the subscriber ID. The
Follow the procedure to delete text messages from
first line of the display shows Radio Number:.
the Inbox on your radio.
The second line of the display shows a blinking
cursor. Key in the subscriber alias or ID. Press 1 Do one of the following:
. • Press the programmed Text Message button.
Proceed to Step 3.
105
English
• 7
Press to access the menu. Press or to Yes. Press to select.
The display shows a positive mini notice. The
2
Press or to Messages. Press to screen returns to the Inbox.
select.
Deleting All Text Messages from the Inbox
3 Follow the procedure to delete all text messages from
Press or to Inbox. Press to the Inbox on your radio.
select.
If the Inbox is empty: 1 Do one of the following:
• The display shows List Empty. • Press the programmed Text Message button.
Proceed to Step 3.
• A tone sounds.
•
4

2
Press to select. Press or to Messages. Press to
select.
The display shows a subject line if the message is
from an e-mail application. 3
Press or to Inbox. Press to
5 select.
Press to access the sub-menu.
If the Inbox is empty:
6 • The display shows List Empty.
select. • A tone sounds.
106
English
The radio supports a maximum of five In-Progress

4
Press or to Delete All. Press messages at one time. During this period, the radio
to select. cannot send any new message and automatically
marks it with a Send Failed icon.
5
The display shows a positive mini notice. If you long press at any time, the radio returns
to the Home screen.
Sent Text Messages
Note:
Once a message is sent to another radio, it is saved
If the channel type, for example a conventional
in Sent Items folder. The most recent sent text
digital or Capacity Plus channel, is not a
message is always added to the top of the Sent Items
match, you can only edit, forward, or delete a
folder. You can resend, forward, edit, or delete a Sent
Sent message.
text message.
Viewing Sent Text Messages
The Sent Items folder is capable of storing a
Follow the procedure to view sent text messages on
maximum of 30 last sent messages. When the folder
your radio.
is full, the next sent text message automatically
replaces the oldest text message in the folder. 1 Do one of the following:
If you exit the message sending screen while the • Press the programmed Text Message button.
message is being sent, the radio updates the status Proceed to Step 3.
of the message in the Sent Items folder without •
providing any indication in the display or via sound. Press to access the menu.
If the radio changes mode or powers down before the 2
status of the message in Sent Items folder is updated, Press or to Messages. Press to
the radio cannot complete any In-Progress messages select.
and automatically marks it with a Send Failed icon.
107
English
3 •
Press or to Sent Items. Press to Resend. Press to select.
to select. •
to Forward. Press to select.
If the Sent Items folder is empty:
The display shows a transitional mini notice,
• The display shows List Empty. confirming your message is being sent.
• A low tone sounds, if the Keypad Tone is
turned on. 3 Wait for acknowledgment.
If successful:
4
Press or to the required message. • A tone sounds.
Press to select.
The icon at the top right corner of the screen If unsuccessful:
indicates the status of the message. See Sent
• A tone sounds.
Item Icons on page 262.

Sending Sent Text Messages • The radio proceeds to the Resend option
Follow the procedure to send a sent text messages screen. See Resending Text Messages on
on your radio. page 102 for more information.
When you are viewing a Sent message: Deleting Sent Text Messages from the Sent Items
Folder
1
Press . Follow the procedure to delete sent text messages
from the Sent Items folder on your radio.
2 You can either resend or forward the sent text
When you are viewing a Sent message:
message. Do one of the following:
108
English
• A tone sounds.

1
Press .
4
2 Press or to Delete All. Press
Press or to Delete. Press to to select.
select.
Deleting All Sent Text Messages from the Sent
Items Folder •
Press or to Yes. Press to
Follow the procedure to delete all sent text messages select.
from the Sent Items folder on your radio.
The display shows a positive mini notice.
1 Do one of the following: •
• Press the programmed Text Message button. select.
Proceed to Step 3.
• The radio returns to the previous screen.
Saved Text Messages
2 You can save a text message to send it at a later
Press or to Messages. Press to time.
select.
If a PTT button press or a mode change causes the
3 radio to exit the text message writing/editing screen
Press or to Sent Items. Press
while you are in the process of writing or editing a text
to select.
message, your current text message is automatically
If Sent Items is empty: saved to the Drafts folder.
• The display shows List Empty. The most recent saved text message is always added
to the top of the Drafts list. 109
English
The Drafts folder stores a maximum of ten (10) last Editing Saved Text Messages
saved messages. When the folder is full, the next Follow the procedure to edit saved text message on
saved text message automatically replaces the oldest your radio.
text message in the folder.
1
Viewing Saved Text Messages Press while viewing the message.
Follow the procedure to view saved text message on
your radio. 2
select.
A blinking cursor appears.
• Press the programmed Text Message button.
Proceed to Step 3. 3 Use the keypad to type your message.
•
Press to access the menu. Press to move one space to the left.
2
Press or to Messages. Press to Press or to move one space to the right.
select.
Press to delete any unwanted characters.
3
Press or to Drafts. Press to
select. Long press to change text entry method.
4 4
Press or to the required message. Press once message is composed.
Press to select.
•
Press or to Send. Press to
110 send the message.
English
•

Press . Press or to choose 5
between saving or deleting the message. Press delete the text message.
to select.
Quick Text Messages
Deleting Saved Text Messages from the Drafts Your radio supports a maximum of 50 Quick Text
Folder messages as programmed by your dealer.
Follow the procedure to delete saved text message While Quick Text messages are predefined, you can
from drafts on your radio. edit each message before sending it.
1 Do one of the following: Sending Quick Text Messages
Follow the procedure to send predefined Quick Text
• Press the programmed Text Message button. messages on your radio to a predefined alias.
Proceed to Step 3.
• 1 Do one of the following:
2 Proceed to Step 3.
select.
button. Proceed to Step 6.
3 The display shows a transitional mini notice,
Press or to Drafts. Press to
select. confirming your message is being sent.
•
4
Press to select.
111
English
2 • The radio proceeds to the Resend option
Press or to Messages. Press to screen. See Resending Text Messages on
select. page 102 for more information.
3 Text Entry Configuration

Press or to Quick Text. Press
to select. Your radio allows you to configure different text.
4 You can configure the following settings for entering

Press or to the required Quick Text text on your radio:
message. Press to select. • Word Predict
• Word Correct
5 Do the following to select the recipient and send • Sentence Cap
the message.
• My Words
Your radio supports the following text entry methods:

confirming that your message is being sent.
• Numbers
6 Wait for acknowledgment. • Symbols
If successful: • Predictive or Multi-Tap
• A positive indicator tone sounds. • Language (If programmed)
• The display shows a positive mini notice. Note:
If unsuccessful:
Press at any time to return to the
previous screen or long press to return
to the Home Screen. The radio exits the
112
English
current screen once the inactivity timer •

expires. Press or to Word Correct. Press
Enabling or Disabling Word Correct to select.

The in-built dictionary cannot recognize the supplies • Press to enable Word Correct. If enabled
alternative word choice when the word entered into appears besides Enabled.
the text editor.
• Press to disable Word Correct. If disabled,
1 disappears beside Enabled.
Enabling or Disabling Word Predict
2 Word Predict: Your radio can learn common word
select. sequences that you often enter. It then predicts the
next word you may want to use after you enter the
3 first word of a common word sequence into the text
Press or to Radio Settings. Press editor.
to select.
1
4
Press or to Text Entry. Press
2
to select. Press or to Utilities. Press to
select.
5
Press or to Word Correct. Press
3
to select.
to select.
113
English
4 2
Press or to Text Entry. Press Press or to Utilities. Press to
to select. select.
5 3
Press or to Word Predict. Press Press Press or to Radio Settings.
to select. Press to select.

• to select.
Press to enable the Word Predict. If
5
enabled appears besides Enabled. Press or to Sentence Cap. Press
• to select.
Press to disable Microphone Dynamic

Distortion Control. If disabled, disappears 6 Do one of the following:
beside Enabled.
•
Sentence Cap Press to enable Sentence Cap. If enabled
This feature is used to automatically enable appears besides Enabled.
capitalization of the first letter in the first word for •
every new sentence. Press to disable Sentence Cap. If
disabled, disappears beside Enabled.
1
114
English
Viewing Custom Words Editing Custom Words

You can add your own custom words into the in-built You can edit custom words saved in your radio
dictionary of your radio. Your radio maintains a list to
contain these words. 1
1
Press to access the menu. 2
2 select.
select. 3
3 to select.
Press Press or to Radio Settings.
Press to select. 4
4 to select.
to select. 5
Press or to My Words. Press to
5 select.
select. 6
Press or to List of Words. Press
6 to select.
Display shows the list of custom words.
to select.
The display shows the list of custom words.
115
English
7 Adding Custom Words
Press or to the required word. Press You can add custom words into the in-built radio
dictionary.
to select.
1
select. 2
9 Use the keypad to edit your custom word. select.
• 3
Press to move one space to the left. Press or to Radio Settings. Press
•
Press key to move one space to the right. to select.
•
Press the key to delete any unwanted 4
characters. Press or to Text Entry. Press

• to select.
5
10 Press or to My Words. Press to
Press once your custom word is completed. select.
The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming 6
your custom word is being saved. Press or to Add New Word. Press
• If the custom word is saved, a tone sounds and to select.
the display shows positive mini notice. Display shows the list of custom words.
• If the custom word is not saved, a low tone sounds
7 Use the keypad to edit your custom word.
116 and the display show negative mini notice.
English
•

Press to move one space to the left. 2
• select.
Press key to move one space to the right.
• 3
Press the key to delete any unwanted Press or to Radio Settings. Press
characters.
• to select.
4
8 Press or to Text Entry. Press
Press once your custom word is completed. to select.
The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming 5

your custom word is being saved. Press or to My Words. Press to
select.
• If the custom word is saved, a tone sounds and
the display show positive mini notice. 6
Press or to the required word. Press
• If the custom word is not saved, a low tone sounds
and the display show negative mini notice. to select.
Deleting a Custom Word
7
Follow the procedure to delete the custom words Press or to Delete. Press to
saved in your radio. select.
1 8 Choose one of the following.
•
At Delete Entry?, press to select Yes.
The display shows Entry Deleted.
117
English
• 6
Press or to No. Press to Press or to Delete All. Press
return to the previous screen. to select.
Deleting All Custom Words 7 Do one of the following:
Follow the procedure to delete all custom words from
the in-built dictionary of your radio. •
1 The display shows All Entries Deleted.
•
2
Press or to Utilities. Press to previous screen. Press to select.
select.
Privacy
3
Press or to Radio Settings. Press This feature helps to prevent eavesdropping by
unauthorized users on a channel by the use of a

to select.
software-based scrambling solution. The signaling
4 and user identification portions of a transmission are
Press or to Text Entry. Press not scrambled.
to select.
Your radio must have privacy enabled on the channel
5 to send a privacy-enabled transmission, although this
Press or to My Words. Press to is not a necessary requirement for receiving a
select. transmission. While on a privacy-enabled channel,
the radio is still able to receive clear or unscrambled
transmissions.
118
English
Your radio only supports Enhanced Privacy. To • Press the programmed Privacy button. Skip

unscramble a privacy-enabled call or data the steps below.
transmission, your radio must be programmed to •
have the same Key Value and Key ID for Enhanced Press to access the menu.
Privacy as the transmitting radio.
2
If your radio receives a scrambled call that is of a Press or to Utilities. Press to
different Key Value and Key ID, you will hear nothing select.
at all for Enhanced Privacy.
3
Note: Press or to Radio Settings. Press
This feature is not applicable in Citizens Band to select.
channels that are in the same frequency.
The green LED lights up when the radio is 4
Press or to Privacy. Press to
transmitting, and blinks rapidly when the radio is select.
receiving an ongoing privacy-enabled transmission.
Note:
Some radio models may not offer this Privacy •
feature, or may have a different configuration. Press or to On. Press to
Check with your dealer or system select. The display shows beside On.
administrator for more information. •
Turning Privacy On or Off select. The display shows beside Off.
Follow the procedure to turn privacy on or off on your
radio. Stun
Your radio can be disabled (stunned) or enabled
(revived) in the system from the console. For
119
English
example, you may want to disable a stolen radio to initiates an emergency condition as programmed by
prevent unauthorized users from using it, and enable the dealer or system administrator.
the radio when it is recovered.
See Emergency Operation on page 91 for more
When a radio is stunned, the radio cannot request nor information.
receive any user initiated services on the system that
Note:
performed the Stun procedure. However, the radio
can switch to another system. The radio continues to
send GPS location reports and can be remote
monitored when it was stunned. Password Lock Features
Note: This feature allows you to restrict access to the radio
Check with your dealer or system by asking for a password when the device is turned
administrator for more information. on
You can use a keypad microphone or Scroll Up/
Lone Worker Down buttons to enter the password.

This feature prompts an emergency to be raised if
Accessing Radios by Using Passwords
there is no user activity, such as any radio button
Follow the procedure to access your radio by using a
press or activation of the channel selector, for a
password.
predefined time.
Following no user activity for a programmed duration, 1 Enter the current four-digit password.
the radio pre-warns the user via an audio indicator The use of Emergency footswitch cancels out
once the inactivity timer expires. password input to access the radio.
If there is still no acknowledgment by the user before • Use a keypad microphone.
the predefined reminder timer expires, the radio
120
English
•

Press or to edit the numeric value 1 Power up the radio.
Your radio restarts the 15-minutes timer for locked
of each digit, and press to enter and state.
move to the next digit.
2 Wait for 15 minutes.
2
Press to enter the password. Your radio responds only to On/Off button in
If successful, the radio powers up. locked state.
If unsuccessful: 3 Repeat the steps in Accessing Radios by Using
• After the first and second attempt, the display Passwords on page 120 to access the radio.
shows Wrong Password. Repeat Step 1.
Turning Password Lock On or Off
• After the third attempt, the display shows
Follow the procedure to turn password lock on or off
Wrong Password and then, Radio Locked. A on your radio.
tone sounds. The yellow LED double blinks.
Your radio enters into locked state for 15 1
minutes. Press to access the menu.
Note: 2
In locked state, your radio responds to Press or to Utilities. Press to
inputs from On/Off/Volume Control Knob select.
and programmed Backlight button only.
3
Unlocking Radios in Locked State
Your radio is unable to receive any call, including to select.
emergency calls, in locked state. Follow the
procedure to unlock your radio in locked state.
121
English
4 •
Press or to Passwd Lock. Press Press or to Turn Off. Press
The display shows beside Turn Off.
5 Enter the current four-digit password.
• Use a keypad microphone. Changing Passwords
• Follow the procedure to change passwords on your
Press or to edit the numeric value radio.
of each digit, and press to enter and 1
move to the next digit. Press to access the menu.
A positive indicator tone sounds for every digit 2

pressed. Press or to Utilities. Press to
select.
6
Press to enter the password. 3
If the password is incorrect, the display shows
Wrong Password and automatically returns to the to select.
previous menu.
4
7 Do one of the following: Press or to Passwd Lock. Press
to select.
•
Press or to Turn On. Press 5 Enter the current four-digit password, and press
to select.
to proceed.
The display shows beside Turn On.
122
English
If the password is incorrect, the display shows The display shows the Notification icon when the

Wrong Password and automatically returns to the Notification list has one or more events.
previous menu.
For text messaging and missed call/call alert
6 notification events, the maximum number are 30 text
Press or to Change PWD. Press messages and 10 missed calls/call alerts. This
to select. maximum number depends on individual feature (job
tickets or text messages or missed calls/ call alerts)
7 list capability.
Enter a new four-digit password, and press
to proceed. Accessing Notification List
Follow the procedure to access the Notification list on
8 Re-enter the new four-digit password, and press your radio.
to proceed. 1
If successful, the display shows Password Press to access the menu.
Changed.
2
If unsuccessful, the display shows Passwords Do Press or to Notification. Press
Not Match.
to select.
menu. 3
Press or to the required event. Press
Notification List to select.
Your radio has a Notification list that collects all your
unread events on the channel, such as unread text 4
messages, telegrams, missed calls and call alerts.
123
English
Over-the-Air Programming • If successful, the display shows Sw Update
Your dealer can remotely update your radio via Over- Completed.
the-Air Programming (OTAP) without physical • If unsuccessful, the display shows Sw Update
connection. Additionally, some settings can also be Failed.
configured via OTAP. See Checking Software Update Information on page
When your radio undergoes OTAP, the green LED 146 for the updated software version.
blinks. Selecting Third-Party Peripherals Connection Modes
When your radio receives high volume data: Follow the procedure to select one of the following
• The display shows the High Volume Data icon. third-party peripherals connection modes:
• The channel becomes busy. • Motorola
• A negative tone sounds if you press the PTT • PC and Audio
button. • Data Accessory
When OTAP completes, depending on the • Telemetry

configuration: • Generic
• A tone sounds. The display shows Updating 1
Restarting. Your radio restarts by powering off Press to access the menu.
and on again.
2
• You can select Restart Now or Postpone. When Press or to Utilities.Press to
you select Postpone, your radio returns to the select.
previous screen. The display shows the OTAP
Delay Timer icon until the automatic restart 3
Press or to Radio Settings.Press
occurs.
to select.
124 When your radio powers up after automatic restart:
English
Front Panel Configuration

4
Press or to Cable Type. Press
You are able to customize certain feature parameters
to select.
in Front Panel Configuration (FPC) to enhance the
5 use of your radio.
Press or to the required connection Entering Front Panel Configuration Mode
mode. Press to select. Follow the procedure to enter front panel
The display shows the selected connection mode. programming mode on your radio.
The screen returns to the previous menu.
Long press at any time to return to the Home
Received Signal Strength Indicator screen.
This feature allows you to view the Received Signal 1
Strength Indicator (RSSI) values. Press to access the menu.
The display shows the RSSI icon at the top right 2
corner. See Display Icons on page 256 for more Press or to Utilities. Press to
information on the RSSI icon. select.
Viewing RSSI Values 3

Follow the procedure to view RSSI values on your Press or to Program Radio. Press
radio. to select.
When you are at the Home screen:
Editing FPC Mode Parameters
Long press to return to the Home screen. Use the following buttons as required while navigating
through the feature parameters.
125
English
• administrator. Check with your dealer or
, – Scroll through options, increase/ system administrator to determine how your
decrease values, or navigate vertically. radio has been programmed.
•
– Select the option or enter a sub-menu. You can turn on or turn off Wi-Fi® by performing one
• of the following actions.
– Short-press to return to previous menu or
to exit the selection screen. Long-press to return • Press the programmed Wi-Fi On or Off button.
to Home screen. Voice Announcement sounds Turning On Wi-Fi or
Wi-Fi Operation Turning Off Wi-Fi.
Wi-Fi® is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance®. • Access this feature via the menu.
Note: a)
This feature is applicable to XPR 5550e/XPR
b)
5580e only. Press or to WiFi and press
This feature allows you to setup and connect to a Wi- to select.

Fi® network. Wi-Fi supports updates for radio c)
Press or to WiFi Status and
firmware, codeplug, and resources such as language
packs and voice announcement. press to select.
Turning Wi-Fi On or Off Press to turn on Wi-Fi. The display shows
Note: beside Enabled.
5580e only. Press to turn off Wi-Fi. The disappears
from beside Enabled.
The programmed Wi-Fi On or Off button is
assigned by your dealer or system
126
English
Connecting to a Network Access Point

6
Enter the password and press .
Note: When the connection is successful, the radio
This feature is applicable to XPR 5550e/XPR displays a notice and the network access point is
5580e only. saved into the profile list.
When you turn on Wi-Fi®, the radio scans and
connects to a network access point. Refreshing the Network List
You can also connect to a network access point via Note:

the menu. This feature is applicable to XPR 5550e/XPR
5580e only.
1
Press to access the menu. • Perform the following actions to refresh the
network list.
2
Press or to WiFi and press to a)
select.
b)
Press or to WiFi and press
3 to select.
Press or to Networks and press
to select. c)
4 to select.
Press or to a network access point
When you enter the Networks menu, the radio
and press to select. automatically refreshes the network list.
5 • If you are already in the Networks menu, perform

Press or to Connect and press
the following action to refresh the network list.
to select.
127
English
a) 5 Enter the Service Set Identifier (SSID) and press
Press or to Refresh and press
to select. .
The radio refreshes and displays the latest 6
network list. Press or to Open and press to
select.
Adding a Network
7
Note: Enter the password and press .
5580e only. The radio displays to indicate that the
If a preferred network is not in the available network network is successfully saved.
list, perform the following actions to add a network.
Viewing Details of Network Access Points
1
Press to access the menu. Note:
2 5580e only.
Press or to WiFi and press to
select. Perform the following actions to view details of
network access points.
3
Press or to Networks and press 1
to select. Press to access the menu.
4 2
Press or to Add Network and press Press or to WiFi and press to
select.
to select.
128
English
Perform the following actions to remove network

3
Press or to Networks and press access points from the profile list.
to select.
1
2
and press to select. Press or to WiFi and press to
select.
5
Press or to View Details and press 3
For a connected network access point, the Service
Set Identifier (SSID), Security Mode, Media 4
Press or to the selected network
Access Control (MAC) address, and Internet
Protocol (IP) address are displayed. access point and press to select.
For a non-connected network access point, the 5

Service Set Identifier (SSID) and Security Mode Press or to Remove and press to
are displayed. select.
Removing Network Access Points 6

Press or to Yes and press to
Note: select.
5580e only. Enterprise network access points The radio displays to indicate that the
that are added via CPS can only be removed selected network access point is successfully
via CPS. removed.
129
English
Utilities 2
This chapter explains the operations of the utility
select.
functions available in your radio.
Power Levels 3
You can customize the power setting to high or low Press or to Radio Settings. Press
for each channel. to select.
High This enables communication with radios
4
located at a considerable distance from you. Press or to Power. Press to
select.
Low This enables communication with radios in
closer proximity. 5 Do one of the following:
Note: •
This feature is not applicable in Citizens Band Press or to High. Press to
channels that are in the same frequency. select.
Setting Power Levels The display shows beside High.

Follow the procedure to set the power levels on your •
Press or to Low. Press to
radio.
select.
1 Do one of the following: The display shows beside Low.
• Press the programmed Power Level button.
Skip the steps below. 6
•
130
English
Turning Radio Tones/Alerts On or Off

6
You can enable and disable all radio tones and alerts, Press to enable or disable all tones and
if needed, except for incoming Emergency alert tone. alerts.
Follow the procedure to turn tones and alerts on or off If enabled appears besides Enabled.
on your radio. If disabled, disappears beside Enabled.
Turning Keypad Tones On or Off
• Press the programmed Tones/Alerts button. Follow the procedure to turn keypad tones on or off
Skip the steps below. on your radio.
•
2
Press or to Utilities. Press to 2
select. Press or to Utilities. Press to
select.
3
Press or to Radio Settings. Press 3
to select.
to select.
4
Press or to Tones/Alerts. Press 4
to select.
to select.
5
Press or to All Tones. Press to
select.
131
English
5 4
Press or to Keypad Tones. Press Press or to Tones/Alerts. Press
6 5
Press to enable or disable keypad tones. Press or to Vol. Offset. Press
The display shows one of the following results: to select.
• If enabled appears besides Enabled. 6
• If disabled, disappears beside Enabled. Press or to the required volume offset
level.
Setting Tones/Alerts Volume Offset Levels A feedback tone sounds with each corresponding
This feature adjusts the volume of the tones or alerts, volume offset level.
allowing it to be higher or lower than the voice
volume. Follow the procedure to set the tones and 7 Do one of the following:
alerts volume offset levels on your radio. •

Press to select. The required volume
1 offset level is saved.
•
Press to exit. The changes are
2
Press or to Utilities. Press to discarded.
select.
Turning Talk Permit Tone On or Off
3 Follow the procedure to turn Talk Permit Tone on or
Press or to Radio Settings. Press off on your radio.
to select. 1
132
English
2 1
Press or to Utilities. Press to Press to access the menu.
select.
2
Press or to Radio Settings. Press select.
to select. 3
4
Press or to Tones/Alerts. Press to select.
to select. 4
5
Press or to Talk Permit. Press to select.
to select.
5
6 Press or to Power Up. Press to
Press to enable or disable the Talk Permit select.
Tone.
The display shows one of the following results: 6
Press to enable or disable the Power Up
• If enabled appears besides Enabled. Tone.
• If disabled, disappears beside Enabled. If enabled appears besides Enabled.
If disabled, disappears beside Enabled.
Turning Power Up Tone On or Off
Follow the procedure to turn Power Up Tone on or off Setting Text Message Alert Tones
on your radio. You can customize the text message alert tone to
Momentary or Repetitive for each entry in the
133
English
Contacts list. Follow the procedure to set the text The display shows beside Repetitive.
message alert tones on your radio.
Changing Display Modes
1 You can change the display mode of the radio
between Day or Night, as needed. This feature
2 affects the color palette of the display. Follow the
Press or to Contacts. Press to procedure to change the display mode of your radio.
select.
3
Press or to the required alias or ID. • Press the programmed Display Mode button.
Skip the following steps.
Press to select. •
4
Press or to Message Alert. Press 2
Press or to Utilities.Press to
to select. select.
•
Press or to Momentary. Press
to select.
to select.
4
The display shows beside Momentary. Press or to Display. Press to
• select.
Press or to Repetitive. Press The display shows Day Mode and Night Mode.
to select.
134
English
The display shows the progress bar.

5
Press or to the required setting. Press
5
to select. Press or to decrease or increase the
The display shows beside the selected setting.
display brightness. Press to select.
Adjusting Display Brightness The setting value is varied from 1 to 8.
Follow the procedure to adjust the display brightness
on your radio. Display brightness cannot be adjusted Turning Horns/Lights On or Off
when Auto Brightness is enabled. Your radio is able to notify you of an incoming call via
the horns and lights feature. When activated, an
1 Do one of the following: incoming call sounds the horn and turns on the lights
of your vehicle. This feature needs to be installed
• Press the programmed Brightness button. through your radio rear accessory connector by your
Proceed to Step 5. dealer. Follow the procedure to turn all horns and
• lights on or off on your radio.
2 1 Do one of the following:

• Press the programmed Horns/Lights button.
select.
Skip the steps below.
3 •
Press or to Radio Settings. Press Press to access the menu.
to select. 2
4 select.
Press or to Brightness. Press
to select.
135
English
3 3
Press or to Radio Settings. Press Press or to Radio Settings. Press
4 4
Press or to Horns/Lights. Press Press or to LED Indicator. Press
5 5
Press to enable or disable Horns/Lights. The Press to enable or disable the LED indicator.
display shows one of the following results: The display shows one of the following results:
• If enabled appears besides Enabled. • If enabled appears besides Enabled.
• If disabled, disappears beside Enabled. • If disabled, disappears beside Enabled.
Turning LED Indicators On or Off Turning Public Address System On or Off

Follow the procedure to turn the LED indicators on or Follow the procedure to enable or disable the internal
off on your radio. public address (PA) system of your radio.

• Press the programmed Public Address button.
2 Skip the following steps.
•
select. Press to access the menu.
136
English
•

select.
2
3 select.
to select. 3
4 to select.
Press or to Public Address. Press
to select. 4
Press or to External Public
5 Address. Press to select.
Press to enable or disable Public Address.
Press to enable or disable external public
• If disabled, disappears beside Enabled.
address.
Turning External Public Address System On or • If enabled appears besides Enabled.
Off • If disabled, disappears beside Enabled.
Follow the procedure to enable or disable the external
public address (PA) system of your radio. Turning Introduction Screen On or Off
You can enable and disable the Introduction Screen
by following the procedure.
• Press the programmed Ext Public Address
button. Skip the following steps. 1
137
English
2 2
Press or to Utilities. Press to Press or to Utilities. Press to
select. select.
3 3
4 4
or to Display. Press to select. Press or to Languages. Press to
select.
5
or to Intro Screen. Press to 5
select. Press or to the required language.
6 Press to select.
Press to enable or disable the Introduction The display shows beside the selected
Screen. language.
The display shows one of the following results:
Identifying Cable Type
• If enabled appears besides Enabled.
• If disabled, disappears beside Enabled. Do the following steps to select the type of cable your
radio uses.
Setting Languages
Follow the procedure to set the languages on your 1
radio.
2
select.
138
English
Text-to-Speech

3
Press or to Radio Settings. Press The Text-to-Speech feature can only be enabled by
your dealer or system administrator. If Text-to-Speech
to select.
is enabled, the Voice Announcement feature is
4 automatically disabled. If Voice Announcement is
Press or to Cable Type. Press enabled, then the Text-to-Speech feature is
to select. automatically disabled.
5 The current cable type is indicated by a . This feature enables the radio to audibly indicate the
following features:
Turning Voice Announcement On or Off • Current Channel
This feature enables the radio to audibly indicate the • Current Zone
current zone or channel the user has just assigned, or • Programmed button feature on or off
the programmable button the user has just pressed.
• Content of received text messages
This is typically useful when the user has difficulty
reading the content shown on the display. This audio • Content of received Job Tickets
indicator can be customized according to customer This audio indicator can be customized per customer
requirements. requirements. This feature is typically useful when the
user is in a difficult condition to read the content
Turning Option Board On or Off shown on the display.
Option board capabilities within each channel can be
assigned to programmable buttons. A channel can Setting Text-to-Speech
support up to 6 option board features. Follow the Follow the procedure to set the Text-to-Speech
procedure to turn option board on or off on your radio. feature.
Press the programmed Option Board button. 1

139
English
2 Setting Menu Timer
Press or to Utilities. Press to You can set the time your radio stays in the menu
select. before it automatically switches to the Home screen.
Follow the procedure to set the menu timer.
3
1
to select.
2
Press or to Voice Announcement.
select.
Press to select.
3
5
Press or to any of the following
to select.
features. Press to select.

4
The available features are as follows: Press or to Display. Press to
select.
• All
• Messages 5
• Job Tickets Press or to Menu Timer. Press
• to select.
Channel
• Zone 6
• Program Button Press or to the required setting. Press
appears beside the selected setting. to select.
140
English
Turning Digital Microphone AGC On or Off •

If enabled appears besides Enabled.
The Digital Microphone Automatic Gain Control • If disabled, disappears beside Enabled.
(AGC) controls the microphone gain of the radio
automatically while transmitting on a digital system. Turning Intelligent Audio On or Off
This feature suppresses loud audio or boosts soft Your radio automatically adjusts the audio volume to
audio to a preset value in order to provide a overcome current background noise in the
consistent level of audio. Follow the procedure to turn environment, inclusive of both stationary and non-
Digital Microphone AGC on or off on your radio. stationary noise sources. This is a receive-only
feature and does not affect transmission audio.
1 Follow the procedure to turn Intelligent Audio on or off
on your radio.
2 Note:
select. This feature is not applicable during a
Bluetooth session.
to select. • Press the programmed Intelligent Audio
button. Skip the steps below.
4 •
Press or to Mic AGC-D. Press to Press to access the menu.
select.
2
5
Press to enable or disable Digital select.
Microphone AGC.
141
English
3 3
Press or to Radio Settings. Press or to Radio Settings and press
4 4
Press or to Intelligent Audio. or to AF Suppressor and press
to select.
Press to select.
You can also use or to change the selected option.
5 Do one of the following.
•
Press or to On. Press to •
select. The display shows beside On. Press to enable Acoustic Feedback
Suppressor. The display shows beside
•
Press or to Off. Press to Enabled.
select. The display shows beside Off. •

Press to disable Acoustic Feedback
Turning the Acoustic Feedback Suppressor Suppressor. The disappears from beside
Feature On or Off Enabled.
This feature allows you to minimize acoustic feedback Turning Trill Enhancement On or Off
in received calls. You can enable this feature when you are speaking in
a language that contains many words with alveolar
1 trill (rolling “R”) pronunciations. Follow the procedure
to access the menu.
to turn Trill Enhancement on or off on your radio.
2
or to Utilities and press to 1 Do one of the following:
select.
142
English
• Press the programmed Trill Enhancement

Default This is the default setting.
button. Skip the steps below.
• Loud This setting enables Noise Suppressor
Press to access the menu. and increases speaker loudness for use
in noisy surroundings.
2
Press or to Utilities. Press to Work This setting enables AF Suppressor
select. Group and disables AGC for use when a
group of radios are near to each other.
3
Press or to Radio Settings. Press Setting Audio Ambience
to select. Follow the procedure to set the audio ambience on
your radio according to your environment.
4
Press or to Trill Enhance. Press 1
to select.
2
select.
•
Press or to On. Press to 3
select. The display shows beside On. Press or to Radio Settings. Press
• to select.
4
Press or to Audio Ambience. Press
Audio Ambience
You can customize the audio ambience for your radio to select.
according to your environment. 143
English
5 Treble Boost, These settings are intended for a
Press or to the required setting. Press Mid Boost, tinnier sound, a more nasal sound,
to select. and Bass and a deeper sound.
Boost
The settings are as follows.
• Choose Default for the default factory Setting Audio Profiles
settings. Follow the procedure to set audio profiles on your
radio.
• Choose Loud to increase speaker loudness
when using in noisy surroundings. 1
• Choose Work Group to reduce acoustic Press to access the menu.
feedback when using with a group of radios
2
that are near to each other. Press or to Utilities. Press to
The display shows beside the selected setting. select.
Audio Profiles 3
You can customize the audio profiles for your radio
according to your preference. to select.
Default This is the default setting. 4

Press or to Audio Profiles. Press
Level 1, Level These settings are intended to
2, and Level 3 compensate for noise-induced to select.
hearing loss that is typical for
5
adults in their 40’s, 50’s, and 60’s Press or to the required setting. Press
or over.
to select.
144
English

Press the programmed GPS button to toggle the
• Choose Default to disable the previously feature on or off.
selected audio profile and return to the default
General Radio Information
factory settings.
Your radio contains information on various general
• Choose Level 1, Level 2, or Level 3 for parameters.
audio profiles intended to compensate for
noise-induced hearing loss that is typical for The general information of your radio are as follows.
adults over 40 years of age. • Radio alias and ID.
• Choose Treble Boost, Mid Boost, or Bass • Firmware and Codeplug versions.
Boost for audio profiles that align with your
• Software update.
preference for tinnier, more nasal, or deeper
sounds. • GPS information.
• Site information.
• Default
• Level 1, Level 2, or Level 3 Note:
You return to the previous screen when you
• Treble Boost, Mid Boost, or Bass Boost
press , and to the Home screen when
you long press , at any time. The radio
Turning the Global Positioning System (GPS) On exits the current screen once the inactivity
or Off timer expires.
Global Positioning System (GPS) is a satellite
navigation system that determines the radio’s precise Checking Radio Alias and ID
location. Follow the procedure to turn GPS on or off Follow the procedure to check the radio alias and ID
on your radio. on your radio.

145
English
• Press the programmed Radio Alias and ID 2
button. Skip the steps below. Press or to Utilities. Press to
select.
A positive indicator tone sounds.
• 3
Press to access the menu. Press or to Radio Info. Press
to select.
You can press the programmed Radio Alias and
ID button to return to the previous screen. 4
Press or to Versions. Press to
2 select.
The display shows the current firmware and
select.
codeplug versions.
3
Press or to Radio Info. Press Checking Software Update Information
to select. This feature shows the date and time of the latest
software update carried out via OTAP or Wi-Fi. Follow

4 the procedure to check the software update
Press or to My ID. Press to
information on your radio.
select.
The first text line shows the radio alias. The 1
second text line shows the radio ID. Press to access the menu.
Checking Firmware and Codeplug Versions 2

Follow the procedure to check the firmware and
select.
codeplug versions on your radio.
1
146
English
• Version

3
Press or to Radio Info. Press
to select. 1
4
Press or to SW Update. Press to 2
select.
select.
The display shows the date and time of the latest
software update. 3
or to Radio Info. Press to
Software Update menu is only available after at least select.
one successful OTAP or Wi-Fi session. See Over-the-
Air Programming on page 362 for more information. 4
or to GPS Info.Press to select.
Checking GPS/GNSS Information
Displays the GPS/GNSS information on your radio, 5
such as values of: or to the required item.Press to
select.The display shows the requested GPS/
• Latitude
GNSS information.
• Longitude
Displaying Site Information
• Altitude Follow the procedure to display the current Linked
• Direction Capacity Plus site name your radio is on.
• Velocity 1
• Horizontal Dilution of Precision (HDOP)
• Satellites
147
English
2
select.
3
to select.
4
Press or to Site Info. Press to
select.
The display shows the current site name of Capacity

Plus-Multi-Site.
148
English
Connect Plus Operations
Connect Plus Operations
149
English
The microphone is activated when the PTT button
Additional Radio Controls in Connect is pressed.
Plus Mode • While a call is not in progress, the PTT button is
used to make a new call (see Making a Radio Call
on page 167).
Additional Radio Controls in Connect Plus Mode
Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button

If the Talk Permit Tone is enabled, wait until the short
The PTT button on the side of the radio ( ) serves alert tone ends before talking.
two basic purposes:
Programmable Buttons
Your dealer can program the programmable buttons
A as shortcuts to radio functions depending on the
duration of a button press:
Short press Pressing and releasing rapidly.

Long press Pressing and holding for the
programmed duration.
Note:
The programmed duration of a button press is
• While a call is in progress, the PTT button allows applicable for all assignable radio/utility
the radio to transmit to other radios in the call. functions or settings. See Emergency
Operation on page 195 for more information
Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the on the programmed duration of the
PTT button to listen. Emergency button.
150
English
Assignable Radio Functions

Channel
Bluetooth® Audio Toggles audio routing
Switch between internal radio Silence Home Mutes the Home Channel
speaker and external Channel Reminder Reminder.
Bluetooth-enabled accessory.
Horns/Lights Toggles horns and lights
Busy Queue Exits the busy mode when a feature on or off.
Cancellation non-Emergency call in the
Indoor Location Toggles Indoor Location on or
Busy Queue was initiated.
off.
Emergency calls, once
accepted into the Busy Intelligent Audio Toggles intelligent audio on or
Queue, cannot be cancelled. off.
Call Log Selects the call log list. Manual Dial Depending on the
programming, initiates a
Contacts Provides direct access to the
Private or Phone Call by
Contacts list.
keying in any subscriber ID or
Channel Plays zone and channel phone number.
Announcement announcement voice
One Touch Access Directly initiates a predefined
messages for the current
Private Call, a Call Alert or a
channel.
Quick Text message.
Emergency On/Off Depending on the
Privacy Toggles privacy on or off.
programming, initiates or
cancels an emergency. Radio Check Determines if a radio is active
in a system.
Ring Alert Type Provides direct access to the
Ring Alert Type Setting. 151
English
Radio Enable Allows a target radio to be Zone Allows selection from a list of
remotely enabled. zones.
Radio Disable Allows a target radio to be Assignable Settings or Utility Functions
remotely disabled.
AF Suppressor Toggles the Acoustic Feedback

Remote Monitor Turns on the microphone of a Suppressor feature on or off.
target radio without it giving
any indicators. All Tones/Alerts Toggles all tones and alerts on
or off.
Roam Request Requests to search for a
different site. Backlight Adjusts the brightness level.
Brightness
Scan Toggles scan on or off.
Channel Up/ Depending on the programming,
Site Lock On/Off When toggled on, the radio Down changes channel to previous or
searches the current site only. next channel.
searches other sites in Display Mode Toggles the day/night display
addition to the current site. mode on or off.
Text Message Selects the text message Global Toggles the satellite navigation
menu. Positioning system on or off.
System (GPS)
Voice Toggles voice announcement
Announcement on or off. Power Level Toggles transmit power level
On/Off between high and low.
Wi-Fi Toggles Wi-Fi on or off.
152
English
Unassigned Indicates that the button Bluetooth Connected
function has not yet been
assigned. The Bluetooth feature is enabled. The
icon stays lit when a remote Bluetooth
device is connected.
Identifying Status Indicators in Connect Plus
Mode High Volume Data
Display Icons Radio is receiving high volume data and
channel is busy.
The following are icons that appear on the display of
the radio. Indoor Location Available[4]
Received Signal Strength Indicator Indoor location status is on and availa-

(RSSI) ble.
The number of bars displayed repre- Indoor Location Unavailable[4]

sents the radio signal strength. Four
bars indicate the strongest signal. This Indoor location status is on but unavaila-
icon is only displayed while receiving. ble due to Bluetooth disabled or Bea-
cons Scan suspended by Bluetooth.
Bluetooth Not Connected
Notification List has items to review.
The Bluetooth feature is enabled but
there is no remote Bluetooth device con-
nected. Power Level
or
153
English
Radio is set at Low power or Radio is Scan
set at High power.
Scan feature is enabled.
Tones Disable
Emergency
Tones are turned off.

Radio is in Emergency mode.
Option Board
Secure
The Option Board is enabled.
The Privacy feature is enabled.
Option Board Non-Function
Unsecure
The Option Board is disabled.
The Privacy feature is disabled.
GPS/GNSS Available
Site Roaming
The GPS/GNSS feature is enabled. The
The site roaming feature is enabled.
icon stays lit when a position fix is avail-
able.
Battery
GPS/GNSS Not Available/Out of The number of bars (0 – 4) shown indi-
Range cates the charge remaining in the bat-
tery. Blinks when the battery is low.
The GPS/GNSS feature is enabled but
is not receiving data from the satellite.
Contact
Radio contact is available.
154
English
Call Log Wi-Fi Excellent[3]
Radio call log. Wi-Fi signal is excellent.
Message Wi-Fi Good[3]

Incoming message. Wi-Fi signal is good.
Ring Only Wi-Fi Average[3]

Ringing mode is enabled. Wi-Fi signal is average.
Silent Ring Wi-Fi Poor[3]

Silent ring mode is enabled. Wi-Fi signal is poor.
Vibrate Wi-Fi Unavailable[3]

Vibrate mode is enabled. Wi-Fi signal is unavailable.
Vibrate and Ring

.
Vibrate and Ring mode is enabled.

4 Only applicable for models with the latest software and hardware. 155
English
Call Icons
In the Contacts list, it indicates a Blue-
The following icons appear on the radio’s display tooth PC Call alias (name) or ID (num-
during a call. These icons also appear in the Contacts ber).
list to indicate ID type.
Dispatch Call
Private Call
The Dispatch Call contact type is used
Indicates a Private Call in progress. In to send a text message to a dispatch-
the Contacts list, it indicates a sub- er PC through a third-party Text Mes-
scriber alias (name) or ID (number). sage Server.
Group Call/Site All Call Advanced Menu Icons

Indicates a Group Call or Site All Call The following icons appear beside menu items that
in progress. In the Contacts list, it indi- offer a choice between two options or as an indication
cates a group alias (name) or ID that there is a sub-menu offering two options.
(number).
Checkbox (Empty)
Phone Call as Private Call
Indicates the option is not selected.
Indicates a Phone Call as Private Call
in progress. Checkbox (Checked)
Bluetooth PC Call Indicates the option is selected.
Indicates a Bluetooth PC Call in prog- Solid Black Box

ress.
156
English
Indicates the option selected for the menu Individual or Group Message Read
item with a sub-menu.
The text message has been read.
OR
Sent Item Icons
the radio’s display in the Sent Items folder.
Individual or Group Message Unread
Sent Successfully The text message has not been read.
OR
The text message is sent successfully.
OR
Send Failed
The text message has not been sent.
In-Progress OR
• The text message to a group alias or ID
OR
is pending transmission.
• The text message to a subscriber alias
or ID is pending transmission, followed Bluetooth Device Icons
by waiting for acknowledgement.
The following icons also appear next to items in the
list of Bluetooth-enabled devices available to indicate
the device type.
157
English
Bluetooth Data Device
Bluetooth-enabled data device, such
as a scanner.
A
Bluetooth Audio Device
Bluetooth-enabled audio device,
such as a headset.
Bluetooth PTT Device

Blinking red Radio is transmitting at low battery
Bluetooth-enabled PTT device, such condition, receiving an emergency
as a PTT-Only Device (POD). transmission or has failed the self-
test upon powering up, or has
LED Indicator moved out of range if radio is config-
ured with Auto-Range Transponder
The LED indicator ( ) shows the operational status of System.
your radio.
Rapidly Radio is receiving over-the-air file
blinking red transfer (Option Board firmware file,
Network Frequency file or Option
Board Codeplug file) or upgrading to
a new Option Board firmware file.
Blinking Radio is receiving a Call Alert, re-
green and ceived a text message or Scan is en-
yellow abled and is receiving activity.
158
English
Alert Tones

Solid yellow Radio is in Bluetooth Discoverable
Mode. Alert tones provide you with audible indications of the
Double Radio is actively searching for a new status, or response to data received on the radio.
blinking yel- site.
Continuous Tone A monotone sound.
low
Sounds continuously un-
Blinking yel- Radio is receiving a Call Alert or til termination.
low Scan is enabled and is idle (radio will
Periodic Tone Sounds periodically de-
remain muted to any activity).
pending on the duration
Solid green Radio is powering up or transmitting. set by the radio. Tone
starts, stops, and repeats
Blinking Radio is powering up, receiving a
itself.
green non-privacy- enabled call or data.
Repetitive Tone A single tone that re-
Double Radio is receiving a privacy-enabled
peats itself until it is ter-
blinking call.
minated by the user.
green
Momentary Tone Sounds only once for a
Indicator Tones short period of time de-
fined by the radio.
High pitched tone Low pitched tone
Switching Between Connect Plus and Non-

Positive Indicator Tone
Connect Plus Modes
Negative Indicator Tone To switch to a non-Connect Plus mode, you must
change to another zone, if programmed by your
159
English
dealer or system administrator. Check with your
dealer or system administrator to see if your radio has
been programmed with non-Connect Plus zones, and
what features are available while operating in non-
Connect Plus zones.
160
English
Making and Receiving Calls in Connect Plus Mode
Press the programmed Roam Request button.
Making and Receiving Calls in Connect You hear a tone, indicating the radio has switched
Plus Mode to a new site. The display shows Site ID <Site
Number>.
Selecting a Site Site Lock On/Off

A site provides coverage for a specific area. A When toggled on, the radio searches the current site
Connect Plus site has a site controller and a only. When toggled off, the radio searches other sites
maximum of 15 repeaters. In a multi-site network, the in addition to the current site.
Connect Plus radio will automatically search for a new
site when the signal level from the current site drops Press the programmed Site Lock button.
to an unacceptable level. If the Site Lock function is toggled on:
Roam Request • You hear a positive indicator tone, indicating
A Roam Request tells the radio to search for a the radio has locked to the current site.
different site, even if the signal from the current site is • The display shows Site Locked.
acceptable. If the Site Lock function is toggled off:
If there are no sites available, • You hear a negative indicator tone, indicating
• The radio display shows Searching and the radio is unlocked.
continues to search through the list of sites. • The display shows Site Unlocked.
• The radio will return to the previous site, if the
previous site is still available. Site Restriction
Note: Your Connect Plus radio system administrator has the

This is programmed by your dealer. ability to decide which network sites your radio is and
161
English
is not allowed to use. Your radio does not need to be Radio Controls Steps
reprogrammed to change the list of allowed and
disallowed sites. If your radio attempts to register at a Programmed Press the programmed Zone
disallowed site, you see a brief message stating: Zone Selection Selection button.
Site <number given> Not Allowed. The radio button

then searches for a different network site. Radio menu 1
to access the menu.
Selecting a Zone 2
or to Zone and
The radio can be programmed with a maximum of 16
Connect Plus Zones and each Connect Plus zone press to select.
contains a maximum of 16 assignable positions on
the Channel Selector Knob. The current zone is displayed and indicated by a
Each assignable knob position can be used to start .
one of the following voice call types:
2 Select the required zone.
• Group Call Radio Control Steps
• Multigroup Call
• Site All Call or or and scroll to the
• Private Call required zone.
1 Access the Zone feature by performing one of the
3
following actions: Press to select.
screen.
162
English
Using Multiple Networks Once the required zone is displayed (if you have
multiple zones in your radio), turn the programmed
If your radio has been programmed to use multiple Channel Selector Knob to select the call type.
Connect Plus networks, you can select a different
network by switching to the Connect Plus zone that is
Receiving and Responding to a Radio Call
assigned to the desired network. These network-to-
zone assignments are configured by your dealer Once the channel, subscriber ID or call type is
through radio programming. displayed, you can proceed to receive and respond to
calls.
Selecting a Call Type
The LED lights up solid green while the radio is
Use the Channel Selector Knob to select a call type. transmitting and blinks green when the radio is
This can be a Group Call, Multi-group Call, Site All receiving.
Call or Private Call, depending on how your radio is Note:
programmed. If you change the Channel Selector The LED lights up solid green while the radio
Knob to a different position (that has a call type is transmitting and double blinks green when
assigned to it), this causes the radio to re-register the radio is receiving a privacy-enabled call.
with the Connect Plus site. The radio registers with To unscramble a privacy-enabled call, your
the Registration Group ID that has been programmed radio must have the same Privacy Key, OR
for the new Channel Selector Knob position call type. the same Key Value and Key ID (programmed
If you select a position that has no call type assigned by your dealer), as the transmitting radio (the
to it, your radio sounds a continuous tone and the radio you are receiving the call from).
display shows Unprogrammed. Your radio does not Note:
operate when selected to an unprogrammed channel, See Privacy on page 212 for more
use the Channel Selector Knob to select a information.
programmed channel instead.
163
English
Receiving and Responding to a Group Call Receiving and Responding to a Private Call
To receive a call from a group of users, your radio A Private Call is a call from an individual radio to
must be configured as part of that group. another individual radio.
When you receive a Group Call (while on the Home When you receive a Private Call, the LED blinks
screen), the LED blinks green.The Group Call icon green. The first line of the display shows the
appears in the top right corner. The first text line subscriber alias or ID, and the RSSI icon. The second
shows the caller alias. The second text line displays line displays Private Call and the Private Call icon.
the group call alias. Your radio unmutes and the Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds
incoming call sounds through the radio's speaker. through the speaker of the radio.
1 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) 1 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm)
from your mouth. from your mouth.
2 Wait for one of the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if The LED lights up solid green.
enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone.
3 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled),
3 Release the PTT button to listen. and speak clearly into the microphone.
If there is no voice activity for a predetermined
period of time, the call ends. 4 Release the PTT button to listen.
Note: If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period

See Making a Group Call on page 167 for of time, the call ends.
details on making a Group Call. The display shows Call Ended.
164
English
See Making a Private Call on page 168 for details on Note:

making a Private Call. The radio stops receiving the Site All Call if
you switch to a different channel while
Receiving a Site All Call
receiving the call. During a Site All Call, you
A Site All Call is a call from an individual radio to will not be able to use any programmed button
every radio on the site. It is used to make important functions until the call ends.
announcements requiring the user’s full attention.
Receiving an Inbound Private Phone Call
When you receive an Site All Call, a tone sounds and
When you receive an Inbound Private Phone Call, the
the LED blinks green.
Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the top
The Group Call icon appears in the top right corner. right corner. The first text line shows Phone Call.
The first text line shows the caller alias. The second
text line displays Site All Call. Your radio 1 Press and hold the PTT button to answer and talk.
unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the Release the PTT button to listen.
radio speaker.
2
Once the Site All Call ends, the radio returns to the Long press to end the call.
previous screen before receiving the call. A Site All The first line of the display shows Ending. The
Call does not wait for a predetermined period of time second line of the display shows Phone Call....
before ending. The display returns to the Phone Call screen.
You cannot respond to an Site All Call. The display shows Phone Call Ended.
Note:
See Making a Site All Call on page 169 for
details on making a Site All Call.
165
English
Making a Buffered Over-Dial in an Inbound Phone Making a Live Over-Dial in an Inbound Phone
Private Call Private Call
During the call, the Phone Call as Private Call icon During the call, the Phone Call as Private Call icon
appears in the top right corner. The first text line of appears in the top right corner. The first text line of
the display shows Phone Call. the display shows Phone Call.
1 Use the keypad to enter the digits and press the 1 Press the PTT button and use the keypad to enter
the digits.
button. The Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the
top right corner. The first text line of the display
Press followed by within 2 seconds to
shows the Live Dial digits.
insert a pause. The P replaces * and # on the
display. 2
The Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the Long press to end the call.
top right corner. The first text line of the display The first line of the display shows Ending. The
shows the entered digits. second line of the display shows Phone Call....
The display returns to the Phone Call screen.
2
Long press to end the call. The display shows Phone Call Ended.
The first line of the display shows Ending. The
second line of the display shows Phone Call.... Receiving an Inbound Phone Talkgroup Call
The display returns to the Phone Call screen. When you receive an Inbound Phone Talkgroup Call,
the Group Call icon appears in the top right corner.
The display shows Phone Call Ended.
The first text line shows Call1.
166
English
Note:

Press the PTT button to talk and release it to
listen. Your radio must have the Privacy feature
enabled on the channel to send a privacy-
Inbound Phone Multi-Group Call enabled transmission. Only target radios with
the same Key Value and Key ID as your radio
When you receive an Inbound Phone Multi-Group
will be able to unscramble the transmission.
Call, the Group Call icon appears in the top right
corner. The first text line shows Multigroup Call. Note:
The radio unmutes and the incoming multi-group call See Privacy on page 212 for more
sounds through the radio's speaker. information.
Making a Call with the Channel Selector Knob
Making a Radio Call
After selecting your channel, you can select a Making a Group Call
subscriber alias or ID, or group alias or ID by using: To make a call to a group of users, your radio must
• The Channel Selector Knob. be configured as part of that group.
• A programmed One Touch Access button – The 1 Select the channel with the active group alias or
One Touch Access feature allows you to make a ID. See Selecting a Call Type on page 163.
Private Call to a predefined ID easily. This feature
can be assigned to a short or long programmable 2 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm)
button press. You can ONLY have one ID from your mouth.
assigned to a One Touch Access button. Your
radio can have multiple One Touch Access 3 Press the PTT button to make the call.
buttons programmed. The LED lights up solid green. The Group Call
• The Contacts list (see Contacts Settings on page icon appears in the top right corner. The first text
187). line shows the group call alias.
167
English
4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), • Select the channel with the active subscriber
and speak clearly into the microphone. alias or ID. See Selecting a Call Type on page
163.
5 Release the PTT button to listen. • Press the programmed One Touch Access
When the target radio responds, the LED blinks button.

green, the radio unmutes and the response
sounds through the radio’s speaker. You see the 2 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm)
Group Call icon, the group alias or ID, and from your mouth.
transmitting radio alias or ID on your display.
If there is no voice activity for a predetermined The LED lights up solid green. The Private Call
period of time, the call ends. Radio returns to the icon appears on the top right corner. The first text
screen you were on prior to initiating the call. line shows the target subscriber alias. The second
text line displays the call status.
Making a Private Call
While you can receive and/or respond to a Private 4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled),
Call initiated by an authorized individual radio, your and speak clearly into the microphone.
radio must be programmed for you to initiate a Private
Call.
You will hear a negative indicator tone, when you green.
make a Private Call via the One Touch Access
button, or the Channel Selector Knob, if this feature is
period of time, the call ends. You hear a short
not enabled.
tone. The display shows Call Ended.
Your radio may be programmed to perform a radio
168 presence check prior to setting up the Private Call. If
English
the target radio is not available, you hear a short tone Making a Multi-group Call

and see negative mini notice on the display.
This feature allows you to transmit to all users on
Making a Site All Call multiple groups. Your radio must be programmed to
This feature allows you to transmit to all users on the allow you to use this feature.
site that are currently not engaged in another call. Note:
Your radio must be programmed to allow you to use Users on the groups cannot respond to a
this feature. Multi-group Call.
Users on the channel/site cannot respond to an Site
1 Turn the Channel Selector Knob to select the
All Call.
Multi-group alias or ID.
1 Select the channel with the active Site All Call
group alias. See Selecting a Call Type on page 2 Press the PTT button to make the call.
163. The LED lights up solid green. The display shows
the Multi-group alias or ID.
from your mouth. Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled)
and speak clearly into the microphone.
The LED lights up solid green. The Group Call Making a Private Call with a One Touch Call Button
icon appears in the top right corner. The first text Note:
line shows Site All Call. Programmable buttons press must be initiated
from the Home screen.
4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled),
and speak clearly into the microphone. The One Touch Call feature allows you to easily
make a Private Call to a pre-defined Private Call alias
169
English
or ID. This feature can be assigned to a short or long Making a Call with the Programmable Manual Dial
programmable button press. Button
You can ONLY have one alias or ID assigned to a
Making a Private Call
One Touch Call button. Your radio can have multiple
One Touch Call buttons programmed. 1 Press the programmed Manual Dial button to
enter into the Manual Dial screen.
1 Press the programmed One Touch Call button to
The display shows Number:.
make a Private Call to the pre-defined Private Call
alias or ID. 2 Use the keypad to enter a subscriber alias or
Private ID.
from your mouth. 3 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm)
from your mouth.
The LED lights up solid green. 4 Press the PTT button to make the call.
The LED lights up solid green. The Private Call
The display shows the Private Call alias or ID. icon appears in the top right corner. The first text
line shows the subscriber alias. The second text
4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled)
line displays the call status.
green. 6 Release the PTT button to listen.
If there is no voice activity for a predetermined When the target radio responds, the LED blinks
period of time, the call ends. green.
170
English

period of time, the call ends. You hear a short If is pressed with no telephone number
tone. The display shows Call Ended. entered, the radio sounds a positive indicator tone
then a negative indicator tone. The display
Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the remains the same.
Programmable Manual Dial Button
3
Long press to end the call.
1 Press the programmed Manual Dial button to
enter into the Manual Dial screen. The first line of the display shows Ending. The
The display shows Number:. second line of the display shows Phone Call....
2 Use the keypad to enter a telephone number, and The display shows Phone Call Ended.
press to place a call to the entered number. Making an Outbound Private Phone Call via the Phone
Menu
Press to delete any unwanted characters. Press
1
to access the menu.
followed by within 2 seconds to insert
a pause. The P replaces * and # on the display. 2
or to Phone and press to select.
If successful, the first line of the display shows
Phone Call. The second line of the display shows 3
the dialed telephone number. Press to select Manual Dial.
The first line of the display shows Number, the
If an invalid telephone number is selected, the second line of the display shows a blinking cursor.
display shows a negative mini notice, Phone Call
Failed, Resource Not Available, or Invalid 4 Use the keypad to enter a telephone number, and
Permissions.
press to place a call to the entered number.
171
English
Making an Outbound Private Phone Call from Contacts
Press to delete any unwanted characters. Press
Note:
followed by within 2 seconds to insert If the Phone Manual Dial is disabled in
a pause. The P replaces * and # on the display. MOTOTRBO Connect Plus Option Board
If successful, the first line of the display shows CPS, the Phone Number item will not be
Phone Call. The second line of the display shows displayed in the Menu.
the dialed telephone number.
1
If an invalid telephone number is selected, the to access the menu.
display shows a negative mini notice, Phone Call
2
Failed, Resource Not Available, or Invalid or to Contacts and press to
Permissions. select.
If is pressed with no telephone number 3

or to Manual Dial and press to
entered, the radio sounds a positive indicator tone select.
remains the same. 4
or to Phone Number and press
5 to select.
Long press to end the call. The first line of the display shows Number, the
The first line of the display shows Ending. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor.
second line of the display shows Phone Call....
5 Use the keypad to enter a telephone number, and
press to place a call to the entered number.
172
English
If the PTT button is pressed, the display shows a Waiting for the Channel Grant in an Outbound Private

negative mini notice, Press OK to Send and Phone Call
returns to the previous screen.
When you make a Private Phone Call, the first line of
the display shows Phone Call. The second line of
Press to delete any unwanted characters. Press the display shows the dialed telephone number.
followed by within 2 seconds to insert When the call is connected, the Phone Call as Private
a pause. The P replaces * and # on the display. Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first line
If successful, the first line of the display shows of the display shows the telephone number.
Phone Call. The second line of the display shows If unsuccessful, the display shows a negative mini
the dialed telephone number. notice, Phone Call Failed, Resource Not
Available, or Invalid Permissions.
If is pressed with no telephone number
entered, the radio sounds a positive indicator tone
remains the same. The display returns to the previous screen.
6 Making a Buffered Over-Dial in a Connected Outbound

Long press to end the call. Private Phone Call
The first line of the display shows Ending. The During the call, the Phone Call as Private Call icon
second line of the display shows Phone Call.... appears in the top right corner. The first text line of
The display shows Phone Call Ended. the display shows the telephone number.
1 Use the keypad to enter the digits.
173
English
Making a Live Over-Dial in a Connected Outbound
Press to delete any unwanted characters. Press Private Phone Call
followed by within 2 seconds to insert During the call, the Phone Call as Private Call icon
a pause. The P replaces * and # on the display. appears in the top right corner. The first text line of
The first text line of the display shows Extra the display shows the telephone number.
Digits, the second text line of the display shows
the entered extra digits. 1 Press the PTT button and use the keypad to enter
the digits.
2 The Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the
Press the button. top right corner. The first text line of the display
If the PTT button is pressed, the display shows a shows the telephone number with the over-dial
negative mini notice, Press OK to Send and digits appended.
returns to the previous screen.
2
The Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the Long press to end the call.
top right corner. The first text line of the display
shows the telephone number with the over-dial The first line of the display shows Ending. The
digits appended. second line of the display shows Phone Call....
•
Press to return to the Phone Call screen.
•
174
English
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Auto Fallback
Mode Auto Fallback is a system feature that allows you to
continue to make and receive non-emergency calls
on the selected Group Contact in the event of certain
Home Channel Reminder types of Connect Plus system failures.
This feature provides a reminder when the radio is If one of these failures occurs, your radio attempts to
not set to the home channel for a period of time. roam to a different Connect Plus site. This search
If this feature is enabled via the CPS, the Home process may result in your radio finding an operable
Channel Reminder tone and announcement sound, Connect Plus site, or it may result in your radio finding
the first line of the display shows Non and the second a “Fallback Channel” (if your radio is enabled for Auto
Fallback). A Fallback Channel is a repeater that is
line shows Home Channel periodically when the radio
normally part of an operable Connect Plus site, but is
is not set to the home channel for a period of time.
currently unable to communicate with either its site
You can respond to the reminder by performing one controller or the Connect Plus network. In Fallback
of the following actions: mode, the repeater operates as a single digital
repeater. Auto Fallback Mode supports non-
• Return to the home channel.
emergency Group Calls only. No other call types are
• Mute the reminder temporarily via the
supported in Fallback Mode.
programmable button.
• Set a new home channel via the programmable Indications of Auto Fallback Mode
button. When your radio is using a Fallback channel, you
hear the intermittent “Fallback Tone” approximately
once every 15 seconds (except while transmitting).
The display periodically shows a brief message,
“Fallback Channel”. Your radio only permits PTT on
175
English
the selected Group Contact (Group Call, Multigroup Enhanced Traffic Channel Access (ETCA) is
Call, or Site All Call). It does not allow you to make not supported in Auto Fallback mode. If two or
other types of calls. more radio users press PTT at the same time
(or at almost the same time), it is possible that
Making/Receiving Calls in Fallback Mode
both radios transmit until PTT is released. In
Note: this event, it is possible that none of the
Calls are heard only by radios that are transmissions will be understood by receiving
monitoring the same Fallback channel and radios.

selected to the same Group. Calls are not
Making calls in Fallback mode is similar to normal
networked to other sites or other repeaters.
functioning. Simply select the group contact you wish
Emergency voice calls or Emergency Alerts to use (using the radio’s normal channel selection
are not available in Fallback mode. If you method), and then press the PTT to start your call. It
press the emergency button in Fallback mode, is possible that the channel may be in use already by
the radio provides an invalid key press tone. another group. If the channel is in use, you receive a
Display-equipped radios also show the busy tone and the display will say “Channel Busy”.
message, “Feature not available”. You may select Group, Multi-group or Site All Call
contacts using your radio’s normal channel selection
Private (radio to radio) and Phone calls are not
method. While the radio is operating on the Fallback
available in Fallback mode. If you attempt a
Channel, the Multigroup operates just like other
call to a private contact, you will receive a
Groups. It is only heard by radios that are currently
denial tone. At this point you should select a
selected to the same Multi-group.
desired group contact. Other non-supported
calls include Remote Monitor, Call Alert, Radio Returning to Normal Operation
Check, Radio Enable, Radio Disable, Text
If the site returns to normal trunking operation while
messaging, Location Updates, and packet
you are in range of your Fallback repeater, your radio
data calls.
automatically exits Auto Fallback mode. You hear a
176
English
registration “beep” when the radio successfully

Radio Steps
registers. If you are in the range of an operable site Control
(that is not in Fallback mode), you may press the
Roam Request button (if programmed for your radio) Program- 1 Press the programmed Radio
to force your radio to search for and register on an med Ra- Check button.
available site. If no other site is available, your radio dio Check 2
returns to Auto Fallback mode after searching is button or to the required
complete. If you drive out of coverage of your subscriber alias or ID and press
Fallback repeater, your radio enters Search mode
to select.
(display indicates “Searching”).
Menu 1
Radio Check to access the menu.
2
If enabled, this feature allows you to determine if or to Contacts and
another radio is active in a system without disturbing
the user of that radio. No audible or visual notification press to select.
is shown on the target radio. 3
or to the required
This feature is only applicable for subscriber aliases subscriber alias or ID and press
or IDs.
to select.
Sending a Radio Check 4
or to Radio Check
1 Access the Radio Check feature.
and press to select.
177
English
The display shows the Target Alias, indicating the Your radio must be programmed to allow you to use
request is in progress. The LED lights up solid this feature.
green.
Initiating Remote Monitor
2 Wait for acknowledgement. Note:
If the target radio is active in the system, a tone Remote Monitor automatically stops after a
sounds and the display briefly shows Target programmed duration or when there is any
Radio Available. attempt to initiate transmission, change

channels or power down the radio.
If the target radio is not active in the system, a
tone sounds and the display briefly shows Target 1 Access the Remote Monitor feature.
Radio Not Available. Radio Steps
Radio returns to the subscriber alias or ID screen Control
when initiated via Menu. Program- 1 Press the programmed Remote
Radio returns to the Home Screen if initiated via med Re- Monitor button.
the programmable button. mote 2
Monitor or to the required sub-
Button
Remote Monitor scriber alias or ID and press
to select.
Use the Remote Monitor feature to turn on the
microphone of a target radio (subscriber alias or IDs Menu 1
only). The green LED will blink once on the target to access the menu.
subscriber. You can use this feature to monitor, 2
remotely, any audible activity surrounding the target or to Contacts and
radio. press to select.
178
English
target alias. Once the timer expires, the radio

Radio Steps
Control sounds an alert tone and the LED turns off.
If unsuccessful, the radio sounds a negative
3
or to the required sub- indicator tone the display shows Rem. Monitor
Failed.
scriber alias or ID and press
to select.
4
Scan
or to Manual Dial
This feature allows your radio to monitor and join calls
and press to select. for groups defined in a pre-programmed scan list.
5 When scan is enabled, the scan icon appears on the
or to Remote Mon. status bar and the LED blinks yellow when idle.
and press to select. Starting and Stopping Scan
Note:
The first text line shows Rem. Monitor. The This procedure turns the Scan feature On or
second text line displays the Target Alias, Off for all Connect Plus zones with the same
indicating the request is in progress. The LED Network ID as your currently selected zone. It
lights up blinking green. is important to note that even when the Scan
feature is turned on via this procedure, scan
2 Wait for acknowledgement. may still be disabled for some (or all) groups
If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds and on your scan list. See Editing the Scan List on
the display momentarily shows Rem. Monitor page 181 for more information.
Successful. Your radio starts playing audio from
the monitored radio for a programmed duration
and display shows Rem. Monitor, followed by 179
English
You can start and stop scanning by pressing the 1 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm)
programmed Scan button OR follow the procedure from your mouth.
described next.
2 Press the PTT button during hang time.
1 The LED lights up solid green.
to access the menu.
2 3 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled),

or to Scan and press to select. and speak clearly into the microphone.
3 4 Release the PTT button to listen.

or to Turn On or Turn Off and press
If you do not respond within the hang time, the
to select. radio returns to scanning other groups.
• The display shows Scan On if scan is enabled.
• The Scan menu shows Turn Off if scan is User Configurable Scan
enabled.
If the Edit List menu is enabled, a user is able to Add
• The display shows Scan Off if scan is and Remove the scan members from the Add
disabled. Member menu. A Scan List member must be a
• The Scan menu shows Turn On if scan is regular Group Contact (i.e. not Multi-group or Site All
disabled. Call/Network Wide All Call) that is currently assigned
to a Channel Selector position in a Connect Plus
Responding to a Transmission During a Scan Zone with the same Network ID as the currently
During scanning, your radio stops on a group where selected Zone. The Talkgroup alias must not match
activity is detected. The radio continuously listens for any Talkgroup that has been included in the current
any member in the scan list when idle on the control Zone's Scan List.
channel.
180
English
Scan can be turned on or off from the menu or by The procedure for turning Scan on or off depends on

pressing a programmed Scan On/Off button. how your radio is programmed. If programmed with a
Scan On/Off button, use the button to toggle the
This feature functions only when the radio is not
feature on or off. If your radio has been programmed
currently involved in a call. If you are presently
so that Scan can be turned on or off via the menu,
listening to a call, your radio cannot scan for other
follow the procedure described next.
group calls, and is therefore unaware they are in
progress. Once your call is finished, your radio 1
returns to the control channel time slot and is able to to access the menu.
scan for groups that are in the scan list.
2
or to Scan and press to select.
Turning Scan On or Off
3
Note: or to Turn On or Turn Off and press
This procedure turns the Scan feature On or
Off for all zones with the same Network ID as to select.
your currently selected zone. It is important to • The display shows Scan On momentarily if
note that even when the Scan feature is scan is disabled.
turned on via this procedure, scan may still be • The display shows Scan Off momentarily if
disabled for some (or all) groups on your scan scan is enabled.
list. See the next section for more information.
If Scan is turned on, the Scan icon appears on your Editing the Scan List
display. When Scan is on and you are not
participating in a call, the LED blinks green and Note:
yellow. If the scan list entry happens to be the radio’s
currently selected group, the radio listens for
activity on this group regardless of whether the
181
English
list entry currently shows a check mark or not. The Talkgroup alias must not match any
Whenever a radio is not in a call, the radio Talkgroup that has been included in the
listens for activity on its Selected Group, current Zone's Scan List.
Multigroup, the Site All Call, and its Default
Emergency Revert Group (if configured for 1
to access the menu.
one). This operation cannot be disabled. If
Scan is enabled the radio will also listen for 2
or to View/Edit List and press
activity on enabled Zone Scan List members.

Your scan list determines which groups can be to select.
scanned. The list is created when your radio is
programmed. If your radio has been programmed to 3
or to the desired Group name.
allow you to edit the scan list, you can,
If a check mark precedes the Group name, then
• Enable/disable scan for individual groups on the scan is currently enabled for this Group.
list.
• Add and Remove the scan members from the Add If there is no check mark preceding the Group
Member menu. Refer to Add or Delete a Group via name, then scan is currently disabled for this
the Add Members Menu on page 183. Group.
Note: 4
A Scan List member must be a regular Group to select the desired Group.
Contact (i.e. not Multigroup or Site All Call/ The display shows Enable if scan is currently
Network Wide All Call) that is currently disabled for the Group.
assigned to a Channel Selector position in a
Connect Plus Zone with the same Network ID The display shows Disable if scan is currently
as the currently selected Zone. enabled for the Group.
182
English
selected zone, or to delete a group from the san list of

5 Select the displayed option (Enable or Disable)
the currently selected zone.
Depending on which option was selected, the 1
to access the menu.
radio momentarily displays Scan Enabled or Scan
Disabled as confirmation. 2
or to Scan option and press to
The radio displays the Zone scan list again. If scan select.
was enabled for the Group, the check mark displays
before the Group name. If scan was disabled for the 3
or to <Add Members> and press
Group, the check mark is removed before the Group
to select.
name.
The display shows “Add Members from Zone n” (n
= the Connect Plus zone number of the first
Add or Delete a Group via the Add Members
Connect Plus zone in your radio with the same
Menu Network ID as your currently selected zone).
The Connect Plus radio does not allow a duplicate
group number or a duplicate group alias to be placed
on a zone scan list (or to be shown as a “scan • If the group you want to add to the scan list is
candidate”). Thus, the list of “scan candidates” assigned to a channel selector position in that
described in steps 6 and 7 sometimes changes after zone, go to step 6.
adding or deleting a group from the zone scan list. • If the group you want to add to the scan list is
If your radio has been programmed to allow you to assigned to a channel selector position in a
edit the scan list, you can use the Add Members different Connect Plus zone, go to step 5.
menu to add a group to the scan list of the currently
183
English
5 If the plus sign (+) is not displayed immediately
or to scroll a list of Connect Plus before the alias, the group is not currently on the
zones that have the same Network ID as the scan list, but can be added.
currently selected zone.
8
6 After locating the Connect Plus zone where the Press when the desired group alias is
desired group is assigned to a channel selector displayed.
position, press to select. If this group is not currently on the scan list for the
currently selected zone, the Add (Group Alias)
Your radio displays the first entry in a list of groups message is displayed.
assigned to a channel position in that zone. The
groups on the list are called “scan candidates”, If this group is already on the scan list for the
because they can be added to the scan list of your currently selected zone, the Delete (Group Alias)
currently selected zone (or they are already on the message is displayed.
zone scan list).
9
If the zone does not have any groups that can be Press to accept the displayed message (Add
added to the scan list, the radio displays No or Delete).
Candidates. If deleting a group from the list, you will know the
operation is successful because the plus sign (+)
7 will no longer display immediately before the alias.
or to scroll through the list of
candidate groups. If adding a group to the list, you will know the
If a plus sign (+) is displayed immediately before operation is successful because the plus sign (+)
the group alias, this indicates the group is will display before the alias.
currently on the scan list for the selected zone. If you are attempting to add a group, and the list is
already full, the radio displays List Full. If this
184
English
should occur, it will be necessary to delete a group • No member of the scanned group is registered at

from the scan list prior to adding a new one. your site (Multisite systems only).
10 Scan Talkback
When finished, press as many times as
necessary to return to the desired menu. If your radio scans into a call from the selectable
group scan list, and if the PTT button is pressed
Understanding Scan Operation during the scanned call, the operation of the radio
depends on whether Scan Talkback was enabled or
Note: disabled during radio programming. For more
If the Radio joins a call for a Zone Scan List information on how your radio is programmed,
member from a different Zone and Call Hang contact your radio dealer (or your radio system
Timer expires before you are able to respond, administrator).
in order to respond, you must navigate to the
Zone and Channel of the Scan List Member Scan The radio leaves the scanned call and
and start a new call. Talkback attempts to transmit on the contact for
Disabled the currently selected channel
There are some circumstances in which you can miss
position. After the Call Hang Time on
calls for groups that are in your scan list. When you
the currently selected contact expires,
miss a call for one of the following reasons, this does
the radio returns to the home channel
not indicate a problem with your radio. This is a
and starts the Scan Hang Time Timer.
normal scan operation for Connect Plus.
The radio resumes group scan after its
• Scan feature is not turned on (check for the scan Scan Hang Time Timer expires.
icon on the display).
Scan If the PTT button is pressed during the
• Scan list member has been disabled via the menu Talkback Group Hang Time of the scanned call,
(see Editing the Scan List on page 181). Enabled
• You are participating in a call already.
185
English
the radio attempts to transmit to the and the highest priority. Check with your
scanned group. dealer or system administrator for more
information.
Note:
If you scan into a call for a group that is not 1
to access the menu.
assigned to a channel position in the currently
selected zone and you miss the Hang Time of 2
or to Scan and press to select.
the call, switch to the proper zone and then

select the channel position of the group to talk
back to that group. 3
or to View/Edit List and press
Editing Priority for a Talkgroup to select.
The Priority Monitor feature allows the radio to 4

automatically receive transmission from the talkgroup or to the required talkgroup and press
with higher priority when it is in another call. A tone to select.
sounds when the radio switches to the call with higher
priority. 5
or to Edit Priority and press
There are two levels of priority for the talkgroups: P1 to select.
and P2. P1 has higher priority than P2.
6
Note: or to the required priority level and
If Default Emergency Revert Group ID is
configured in MOTOTRBO Connect Plus press to select.
Option Board CPS, there are three levels of The display shows positive mini notice before
priority for talkgroups: P0, P1 and P2. P0 is returning to the previous screen. The priority icon
appears on the left of the talkgroup.
186 the permanent Emergency Revert Group ID
English
The Dispatch Call contact type is used to send a text

Contacts Settings message to a dispatcher PC through a third-party
Note: Text Message Server.
You can add, or edit subscriber IDs for Making a Private Call from Contacts
Connect Plus Contacts. Deleting subscriber
IDs can only be performed by your dealer. 1
to access the menu.
If the Privacy feature is enabled on a channel,
you can make a privacy-enabled voice call on 2
that channel. Only target radios with the same or to Contacts and press to
Privacy Key, or the same Key Value and Key select.
ID as your radio are able to unscramble the The entries are alphabetically sorted.
transmission.
Contacts provide “address-book” capabilities on your from your mouth.
radio. Each entry corresponds to an alias or ID that
you use to initiate a call. 4 Press the PTT button to make the call.
Each zone provides a Contact List with up to 100
contacts. The following contact types are available: 5 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled),
• Private Call and speak clearly into the microphone.
• Group Call
• Multigroup Call
• Site All Call Voice When the target radio responds, the LED blinks
• Site All Call Text green and the display shows the transmitting
user's ID.
• Dispatch Call
187
English
If there is no voice activity for a predetermined The LED lights up solid green. The display shows
period of time, the call ends. the destination alias.
You hear a short tone. The display shows Call 6 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled),
Ended. and speak clearly into the microphone.
Making a Call Alias Search 7 Release the PTT button to listen.
You can also use alias or alphanumeric search to

retrieve the required subscriber alias. green.
This feature is only applicable while in Contacts. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined
period of time, the call ends.
1
to access the menu.
The display shows Call Ended.
2
or to Contacts and press to Adding a New Contact
select.
1
The entries are alphabetically sorted. to access the menu.
3 Key in the first character of the required alias, and 2

or to Contacts and press to
then press or to locate the required select.
alias.
3
or to New Contact and press to
select.
from your mouth.

188
English
4 Use the keypad to enter the contact number and 3
Press or to Radio Settings and
press to confirm.
press to select.
5 Use the keypad to enter the contact name and
4
press to confirm. Press or to Tones/Alert and press
to select.
6
If adding a Radio Contact, or to the
5
required ringer type and press to select. Press or to Call Ringers and press
The radio sounds a positive indicator tone and the to select.
display shows Contact Saved.
6
Press or to Call Alert and press
Call Indicator Settings
to select.
Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Call Alert
The current tone is indicated by a .
You can select, or turn on or off ringing tones for a
received Call Alert. 7
Press or to the required tone and
1
Press to access the menu. press to select.
2 appears beside selected tone.

Press or to Utilities and press
to select.
189
English
Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Private 7
Calls Press to enable/disable the Private Call
ringing tones.
You can turn on or off the ringing tones for a received
Private Call. The display shows beside Enabled, if Private
Call ringing tones are enabled.
1
to access the menu. The is not displayed when Private Call ringing
tones are disabled.
2
or to Utilities and press to Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Text
select. Message
3 You can turn on or off the ringing tones for a received
or to Radio Settings and press
Text Message.
to select.
1
to access the menu.
4
or to Tones/Alerts and press
2
to select. or to Utilities and press to
select.
5
or to Call Ringers and press
3
to select. or to Radio Settings and press
6 to select.
or to Private Call and press
to select. 4
to select.
190
English
The radio sounds one vibration if it is a momentary

5
or to Call Ringers and press ring style. The radio vibrates repetitively if it is a
to select. repetitive ring style. When set to Ring and Vibrate,
the radio sounds a specific ring tone if there is any
6 incoming radio transaction (for example, Call Alert or
or to Text Message and press
to select. Message). It sounds like a good key tone or missed
call.
The current tone is indicated by a .
7 Escalating Alarm Tone Volume

or to the required tone and press
to select. You can program your radio to continually alert you
appears beside selected tone. when a radio call remains unanswered. This is done
by automatically increasing the alarm tone volume
Selecting a Ring Alert Type over time. This feature is known as Escalert.
Note:
The programmed Ring Alert Type button is Call Log Features
assigned by your dealer or system Your radio keeps track of all recent outgoing,
administrator. Check with your dealer or answered, and missed Private Calls. Use the call log
system administrator to determine how your feature to view and manage recent calls.
radio has been programmed.
You can perform the following tasks in each of your
You can program the radio calls to one call lists:
predetermined vibrate call. If All Tones status is
disabled, the radio displays the All Tone Mute icon. If • Delete
All Tones status is enabled, the related ring alert type • View Details
is displayed.
191
English
Viewing Recent Calls 3
or to the required list and press
The lists are Missed, Answered, and Outgoing. to select.
1 When you select a call list and it contains no
to access the menu. entries, the display shows List Empty, and
sounds a low tone if Keypad Tones are turned on .
2
or to Call Log and press to
select. 4
or to the required alias or ID and press
3 to select.
or to preferred list and press to
select. 5
The display shows the most recent entry at the top or to Delete and press to
of the list. select.

or to view the list.
•
Press the PTT button to start a Private Call with Press to select Yes to delete the entry.
the current selected alias or ID. The display shows Entry Deleted.
•
Deleting a Call from a Call List or to No, and press the button
to return to the previous screen.
1
to access the menu.
Viewing Details from a Call List
2
or to Call Log and press to 1
to access the menu.
select.
192
English
Responding to Call Alerts

2
or to Call Log and press to
Follow the procedure to respond to Call Alerts on
select.
your radio.
3 When you receive a Call Alert:
or to the required list and press
to select. • A repetitive tone sounds.
4
or to the required alias or ID and press • The display shows the notification list listing a Call
Alert with the alias or ID of the calling radio.
to select.
Depending on the configuration by your dealer or
5 system administrator, you can respond to a Call
or to View Details and press
to select. Alert by doing one of the following:
Display shows details. • Press the PTT button and respond with a
Private Call directly to the caller.
Call Alert Operation • Press the PTT button to continue normal
talkgroup communication.
Call Alert paging enables you to alert a specific radio
user to call you back when they are able to do so. The Call Alert is moved to the Missed Call
This feature is accessible through the menu via to the caller from the Missed Called log.
Contacts, manual dial or a programmed One Touch
Access button. See Notification List on page 123 and Call Log
Features on page 86 for more information.
193
English
Making a Call Alert from the Contact List The display shows Call Alert: <Subscriber
Alias or ID>Call Alert and the subscriber
1 alias or ID, indicating that the Call Alert has been
to access the menu.
sent.
2 The LED lights up solid green when your radio is
or to Contacts and press to
select. sending the Call Alert.
If the Call Alert acknowledgement is received, the

3 Use one of the steps described next to select the display shows Call Alert Successful.
required subscriber alias or ID:
If the Call Alert acknowledgement is not received,
• select the subscriber alias directly
the display shows Call Alert Failed.
•
or to the required subscriber Making a Call Alert with the One Touch Access Button
alias and press to select. Press the programmed One Touch Access
• use the Manual Dial menu button to make a Call Alert to the predefined alias.
• The display shows Call Alert and the
or to Manual Dial and press subscriber alias or ID, indicating that the Call Alert
has been sent.
to select.
• The Manual Dial text entry screen shall be The LED lights up solid green when your radio is
displayed. Enter the Subscriber ID and sending the Call Alert.
press . If the Call Alert acknowledgement is received, the

display shows Call Alert Successful.
4
or to Call Alert and press to
194 select.
English
If the Call Alert acknowledgement is not received, the current channel. Pressing the Emergency button

the display shows Call Alert Failed. initiates the programmed Emergency mode. The
programmed Emergency mode may also be initiated
by triggering the optional Man Down feature. The
Emergency Operation
Emergency feature may be disabled in your radio.
Note:
Your dealer can set the duration of a button press for
If your radio is programmed for Silent or Silent
the programmed Emergency button, except for long
with Voice emergency initiation, in most cases
press, which is similar with all other buttons:
it automatically exits silent operation after the
Emergency Call or Emergency Alert is Short press Between 0.05 seconds and 0.75
finished. The exception to this rule is when seconds.
Emergency Alert is the configured Emergency
Mode and Silent is the configured Emergency Long press Between 1.00 second and 3.75
Type. If your radio is programmed in this seconds.
manner, the silent operation continues until
The Emergency button is assigned with the
you cancel silent operation by pressing PTT or
Emergency On/Off feature. Check with your dealer for
the button configured for Emergency Off.
the assigned operation of the Emergency button.
Emergency voice calls and Emergency Alerts
• If the short press for the Emergency button is
are not supported when operating in Connect
assigned to turn on the Emergency mode, then the
Plus Auto Fallback mode. For more
long press for the Emergency button is assigned
information see the Auto Fallback on page
to exit the Emergency mode.
175.
• If the long press for the Emergency button is
An Emergency Alert is used to indicate a critical assigned to turn on the Emergency mode, then the
situation. You can initiate an Emergency at any time short press for the Emergency button is assigned
on any screen display, even when there is activity on to exit the Emergency mode.
195
English
When your radio is selected to a Connect Plus zone, that are programmed to receive
it supports three Emergency modes: them (no matter which network site
they are registered to).
Emergency You must press the PTT button to
Call talk on the assigned emergency time Only one of the Emergency Modes can be assigned
slot. to the Emergency button per zone. In addition, each
Emergency For the first transmission on the Emergency mode has the following types:
Call with assigned emergency time slot, the

Regular Radio initiates an Emergency and
Voice to microphone is automatically
shows audio and/or visual indicators.
Follow unmuted and you may talk without
pressing the PTT button. The Silent Radio initiates an Emergency without
microphone stays “hot” in this any audio or visual indicators. The radio
fashion for a time period suppresses all audio or visual
programmed into the radio. For indications of the Emergency until you
subsequent transmissions in the press the PTT button to start a voice
same Emergency call, you must transmission.
press the PTT button.
Silent The same as Silent operation, except
Emergency An Emergency Alert is not a voice with that the radio also unmutes for some
Alert call. It is an emergency notification Voice voice transmissions.
that is sent to radios that are
configured to receive these alerts. Receiving an Incoming Emergency
The radio sends an emergency alert Your radio may be programmed to sound an alert
via the control channel of the tone and also display information about the incoming
currently registered site. The Emergency. If so programmed, upon receiving the
Emergency Alert is received by incoming Emergency, the display shows the
196 radios in the Connect Plus network Emergency Details screen with the emergency icon,
English
the Alias or ID of the radio that requested the The Exit Alarm List screen displays.

Emergency, the Group Contact being used for the
Emergency, and one additional line of information. 2 Perform one of the following actions:
The additional information is the name of the zone •
that contains the Group Contact. Select Yes and press to save the
emergency details to the Alarm List, and to exit
At the present time, the radio displays only the most
the Emergency Details (or Alarm List) screen.
recently decoded Emergency. If a new Emergency is
•
received before the prior Emergency is cleared, the Select No and press to return to the
details for the new Emergency replace the details of Emergency Details (or Alarm List) screen.
the previous Emergency.
Deleting the Emergency Details
Depending on how your radio has been programmed,
the Emergency Details screen (or Alarm List screen) 1 While the Emergency Details screen is displayed,
will stay on your radio’s display even after the
Emergency ends. You can save the emergency press .
details to the Alarm List, or you can delete the The Delete screen displays.
emergency details as described in the following
sections. 2 Perform one of the following actions:
Saving the Emergency Details to the Alarm List •

Select Yes and press to delete the
Saving the emergency details to the Alarm List allows emergency details.
you to view the details again at a later time by •
Select No and press to return to the
selecting Alarm List from the Main Menu.
Emergency Details screen.
1 While the Emergency Details (or Alarm List)
screen is displayed, press .
197
English
Responding to an Emergency Call The LED lights up green.
Note: 5 Release the PTT button to listen.
If you do not respond to the Emergency Call When the emergency initiating radio responds, the
within the time allotted for the Emergency Call LED blinks green. You see the Group Call icon,
Hang Time, the Emergency call will end. If you the group ID, and transmitting radio ID on your
want to speak to the group after the display.
Emergency Call Hang Time expires, you must
first select the channel position assigned to Responding to an Emergency Alert

the group (if not already selected). Then,
press PTT to start a non-Emergency Call to Note:
the group. The Group contact used for the Emergency
Alert should not be used for voice
1 When receiving an Emergency Call, press any communication. This could prevent other
button to stop all Emergency Call received radios from sending and receiving Emergency
indications. Alerts on the same group.
An Emergency Alert from a radio indicates that the
user is in an urgent situation. You may respond to the
from your mouth.
alert by initiating a private call to the radio who
3 Press the PTT button to initiate a voice declared the emergency, initiating a group call to a
transmission on the Emergency group. designated talk group, sending the radio a Call Alert,
All radios that are monitoring this group hear your initiating a Remote Monitor of that radio, etc. The
transmission. proper response is determined by your organization
and the individual situation.
198
English
Ignore Emergency Revert Call emergency. The emergency indicators only

appear once you press the PTT button to
This feature enhancement is to provide an option for
initiate a voice transmission from your radio.
the radio to ignore an active Emergency Revert Call.
For both “Silent” and “Silent with Voice”
To enable Ignore Emergency Revert Call, the radio
operation, the radio automatically exits silent
must be configured at the Connect Plus Customer
operation after the Emergency Call is finished.
Programming Software (CPCPS).
When the feature is enabled, the radio does not 1 Press the programmed Emergency button.
display Emergency Call indications and does not
receive any audio on the default Emergency Revert 2 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm)
Group ID. from your mouth.
Check with your dealer or system administrator for 3 Press the PTT button to initiate a voice
more information. transmission on the Emergency group.
Initiating an Emergency Call When you release the PTT button, the Emergency
call continues for the time allotted for the
Note:
Emergency Call Hang Time.
If your radio is set to Silent, it does not display
any audio or visual indicators during If you press the PTT button during this time, the
Emergency mode until you press the PTT Emergency call continues.
button to initiate a voice transmission.
Initiating an Emergency Call with Voice to Follow
If your radio is set to Silent with Voice, it does
not initially display any audio or visual Your radio must be programmed for this type of
indicators that the radio is in Emergency operation.
mode. However, your radio unmutes for the When enabled for this operation, when you press the
transmissions of radios responding to your programmed Emergency button, and when your 199
English
radio receives the time slot assignment, the Emergency Alert. If programmed for “Silent”,
microphone is automatically activated without the silent operation continues indefinitely until
pressing the PTT button. This activated microphone you press PTT or the button configured for
state is also known as “hot mic”. The “hot mic” applies “Emergency Off”. If programmed for “Silent
to the first voice transmission from your radio during with Voice”, the radio automatically cancels
the Emergency call. For subsequent transmissions in silent operation when the site controller
the same Emergency call, you must press the PTT broadcasts the Emergency Alert.
button.
Press the orange Emergency button.
1 Press the programmed Emergency button. Upon transmitting the Emergency Alert to the site
controller, the radio’s display shows the
2 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) Emergency icon, the Group contact used for the
from your mouth. Emergency Alert, and TX Alarm.
3 The microphone remains active for the “hot mic” Once the Emergency Alert is successfully sent and is
time specified in your radio's codeplug being broadcast for other radios to hear, a positive
programming. indicator tone sounds and the radio’s display shows
During this time, the LED lights up green. Alarm Sent. If the Emergency Alert is unsuccessful,
a negative indicator tone sounds and the radio
4 Press and hold the PTT button to talk longer than displays Alarm Failed.
the programmed duration.
Exiting Emergency Mode
Initiating an Emergency Alert
Note:
Note:
If the Emergency call ends due to the
If your radio is programmed for “Silent” or
expiration of the Emergency Hang Time, but
“Silent with Voice”, it will not provide any audio
the emergency condition is not over, press the
or visual indications that it is sending an
200
English
Emergency button again to restart the

process.
Text Message Features
If you initiate an Emergency Alert by pressing the Your radio is able to receive data, for example a text
programmed Emergency button, your radio message, from another radio or a text message
automatically exits Emergency mode after receiving a application.
response from the Connect Plus system. The maximum length of characters when you send
If you initiate an Emergency call by pressing the and receive a text message is 280 characters which
programmed Emergency button, your radio will be includes the subject line. You see the subject line
assigned a channel automatically when one becomes when you receive messages from e-mail applications.
available. Once your radio has transmitted a Note:
message indicating the emergency, you cannot The maximum length of 280 characters is
cancel your Emergency call. However, if you pressed applicable only for models with the latest
the button by accident or the emergency no longer software and hardware. On older hardware,
exists, you may wish to say this over the assigned the text message will be truncated to the
channel. When you release the PTT button, the maximum length of 140 characters. Check
Emergency call is discontinued after the Emergency with your dealer or system administrator for
Call Hang Time expires. more information.
If your radio was configured for Emergency with Voice The radio exits the current screen once the inactivity
to Follow, use the “hot mic” period to explain your timer expires.
error, then press and release the PTT button to
discontinue the transmission. The Emergency call is Note:
discontinued after the Emergency Call Hang Time Long press at any time to return to the
expires. Home screen.
201
English
Sending a Quick Text Message If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds
and the display shows Message Send Failed.
Your radio supports a maximum of 10 Quick Text
messages as programmed by your dealer. If the text message fails to send, the radio returns
you to the Resend option screen (see Managing
While Quick Text messages are predefined, you can
Fail-to-Send Text Messages on page 205).
edit each message before sending it.
If you are sending the message, select the Sending a Quick Text Message with the One Touch
recipient by Access Button

or to the required alias and press button to send a predefined Quick Text message
to select. to a predefined alias.
The display shows Sending Message, confirming
•
or to Manual Dial, and press your message is being sent.
to select. The first line of the display If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the display
shows Number:. The second line of the display shows Message Sent.
shows a blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber
If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds
alias or ID and press . and the display shows Message Send Failed.
The display shows Sending Message, confirming If the text message fails to send, the radio returns you
your message is being sent. to the Resend option screen (see Managing Fail-to-
Send Text Messages on page 205).
If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds
and the display shows Message Sent. Accessing the Drafts Folder
The Drafts folder stores a maximum of ten (10) last
202 saved messages. When the folder is full, the next
English
saved text message automatically replaces the oldest

2
text message in the folder. or to Drafts and press to
select.
Note:
You can edit saved text message before 3
sending it. Only available with a keypad or to the required message and press
microphone (see Editing and Sending a Saved
to select.
Text Message on page 203. Long press
at any time to return to the Home screen. Editing and Sending a Saved Text Message
Viewing a Saved Text Message 1

Press again while viewing the message.
1 Access the Text Message feature.
2
Radio Con- Steps or to Edit and press to select.
trols A blinking cursor appears.
Programmed Press the programmed Text 3 Use the keypad to type your message.
Text Message Message button.
button Press to move one space to the left. Press or
Menu 1 the key to move one space to the right.
to access the menu.
2 Press the key to delete any unwanted
or to Messages
characters. Long press to change text entry
and press to select. method.
4
203
English
5 Select the message recipient by Radio Con- Steps
trols
•
or to the required alias and press
Programmed Press the programmed Text
to select. Text Message Message button.
• button
or to Manual Dial, and press
Menu 1
to select. The first line of the display to access the menu.

shows Number:. The second line of the display 2
shows a blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber or to Messages
alias or ID and press . and press to select.
The display shows Sending Message, confirming

2
your message is being sent. or to Drafts and press to
select.
and the display shows Message Sent. 3
or to the required message and press
and the display shows Message Send Failed. to select.
If the text message cannot be sent, it is moved to 4
the Sent Items folder and marked with a Send or to Delete and press to delete
Failed icon. the text message.
Deleting a Saved Text Message from Drafts
1 Access the Text Message feature.

204
English
Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages

2
Select the message recipient by or to
You can select one of the following options while at
the Resend option screen: the required alias or ID and press to select.
• Resend The display shows Sending Message, confirming
• Forward your message is being sent.
• Edit If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds
Resending a Text Message and the display shows Message Sent.
Press to resend the same message to the and the display shows Message Send Failed.
same subscriber/group alias or ID.
Managing Sent Text Messages
and the display shows the positive mini notice. Once a message is sent to another radio, it is saved
in Sent Items. The most recent sent text message is
If the message cannot be sent, the display shows always added to the top of the Sent Items list.
the negative mini notice.
The Sent Items folder is capable of storing a
Forwarding a Text Message maximum of thirty (30) last sent messages. When the
folder is full, the next sent text message automatically
Select Forward to send the message to another replaces the oldest text message in the folder.
subscriber/group alias or ID.
Note:
1
or to Forward and press to Long press at any time to return to the
select. Home screen.
205
English
Viewing a Sent Text Message The icon at the top right corner of the screen
indicates the status of the message (see Sent Item
1 Access the Text Message feature. Icons on page 157).
Radio Steps
Controls Sending a Sent Text Message
Program- Press the programmed Text Mes- You can select one of the following options while
med Text sage button. viewing a sent text message:
Message • Resend
button • Forward
Menu 1 • Edit
to access the menu. • Delete
2
or to Messages and 1
Press again while viewing the message.
press to select.
2
or to one of the following options and
2
or to Sent Items and press to press to select.
select.
Option Steps
3 Forward Select Forward to send the selected
text message to another subscriber/
to select. group alias or ID (see Forwarding a
Text Message on page 205).
206
English
Option Steps Option Steps
Delete Select Delete to delete the text Note:
message. If you exit the message
Resend sending screen while the
Select Resend to resend the select- message is being sent, the
ed text message to the same sub- radio updates the status of
scriber/group alias or ID. the message in the Sent
The display shows Sending Mes‐ Items folder without provid-
sage, confirming that the same mes- ing any indication in the dis-
sage is being sent to the same tar- play or via sound.
get radio. Note:
If the message is sent successfully, If the radio changes mode or
a tone sounds and the display powers down before the sta-
shows Message Sent. tus of the message in Sent
Items is updated, the radio
If the message cannot be sent, a cannot complete any In-
low tone sounds and the display Progress messages and au-
shows Message Send Failed. tomatically marks it with a
If the message fails to send, the ra- Send Failed icon.
dio returns you to the Resend option Note:
screen. Press to resend the The radio supports a maxi-
message to the same subscriber/ mum of five (5) In-Progress
group alias or ID. messages at one time. Dur-
ing this period, the radio
207
English
Option Steps Radio Con- Steps
trols
cannot send any new mes-
sage and automatically Programmed Press the programmed Text
marks it with a Send Failed Text Message Message button.
icon. button
Menu 1
If you exit the message sending screen while the to access the menu.
message is being sent, the radio updates the 2
or to Messages
status of the message in the Sent Items folder
without providing any indication in the display or and press to select.
via sound.
If the radio changes mode or powers down before 2
the status of the message in Sent Items is or to Sent Items and press to
updated, the radio cannot complete any In- select.
Progress messages and automatically marks it When you select Sent Items and it contains no
with a Send Failed icon. text messages, the display shows List Empty,
The radio supports a maximum of five (5) In- and sounds a low tone if Keypad Tones are turned
Progress messages at one time. During this on..
period, the radio cannot send any new message
3
and automatically marks it with a Send Failed icon. or to Delete All and press to
select.
Deleting All Sent Text Messages from Sent Items
4 Choose one of the following.
1 Access the Text Message feature by performing
208 one of the following actions:
English
• •

or to Yes and press to select. Press a second time to reply, forward, or
The display shows positive mini notice. delete the text message.
•
or to No and press to return Managing Received Text Messages
to the previous screen.
Use the Inbox to manage your text messages. The
Receiving a Text Message Inbox is capable of storing a maximum of 30
messages.
When your radio receives a message, the display
shows the Notification List with the alias or ID of the Text messages in the Inbox are sorted according to
sender and the Message icon. the most recently received.
You can select one of the following options when Your radio supports the following options for text
receiving a text message: messages:
• Read • Reply (via Quick Text)

• Read Later • Forward
• Delete • Delete
• Delete All
Reading a Text Message
Note:
1 If the channel type is not a match, you can
or to Read? and press to select.
only forward, delete, or delete all Received
Selected message in the Inbox opens. messages.
2 Do one of the following: Long press at any time to return to the

• Home screen.
Press to return to the Inbox.
209
English
Viewing a Text Message from the Inbox Radio Steps
Controls
1
to access the menu.
Program- Press the programmed Text Mes-
2 med Text sage button.
or to Messages and press to Message
select. button
3 Menu 1
or to Inbox and press to select. to access the menu.
2
4 or to Messages and
or toview the messages.
press to select.
• 2
Press to select the current message, and or to Inbox and press to select.
press again to reply, forward, or delete 3

that message.
• to select.
4
Replying to a Text Message from the Inbox Press once more to access the sub-menu.
1 Access the Text Message feature. 5 Use your keypad to write/edit your message.
6
210
English
The display shows Sending Message, confirming Radio Con- Steps
your message is being sent. trols
2
and the display shows Message Sent. or to Messages
If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds and press to select.
and the display shows Message Send Failed.
If the message cannot be sent, the radio returns 2
you to the Resend option screen (see Managing or to Inbox and press to select.
Fail-to-Send Text Messages on page 205).
3
Deleting a Text Message from the Inbox
to select.
1 Access the Text Message feature by performing
one of the following actions: 4
Press once more to access the sub-menu.
Radio Con- Steps
trols 5
or to Delete and press to
Programmed Press the programmed Text select.
Text Message Message button.
button 6
or to Yes and press to select.
Menu 1 The display shows Message Deleted, and the
to access the menu. screen returns to the Inbox.
211
English
Deleting All Text Messages from the Inbox 3
or to Delete All and press to
1 Access the Text Message feature by performing select.
one of the following actions:
Radio Con- Steps 4
or to Yes and press to select.
trols The display shows Inbox Cleared.
Programmed Press the programmed Text
Text Message Message button. Privacy

button
If enabled, this feature helps to prevent
Menu 1 eavesdropping by unauthorized users on a channel
to access the menu. by the use of a software-based scrambling solution.
2 The signaling and user identification portions of a
or to Messages
transmission are not scrambled.
Your radio must have privacy enabled on the current
channel selector position to send a privacy-enabled
2 transmission, although this is not a necessary
or to Inbox and press to select.
requirement for receiving a transmission. While on a
When you select Inbox and it contains no text privacy-enabled channel selector position, the radio is
messages, the display shows List Empty, and still able to receive clear (unscrambled)
sounds a low tone if Keypad Tones are turned on transmissions.
(see Turning Keypad Tones On or Off on page
Your radio supports Enhanced Privacy.
131).
To unscramble a privacy-enabled call transmission,
your radio must be programmed to have the same
212
English
Key Value and Key ID (for Enhanced Privacy) as the

1
transmitting radio. to access the menu.
If your radio receives a scrambled call that is of a 2
different Key Value and Key ID, you hear nothing at or to Utilities and press to
all (Enhanced Privacy). select.
If the radio has a privacy type assigned, the Home 3

screen shows the Secure or Unsecure icon, except or to Radio Settings or or
when the radio is sending or receiving an Emergency to Connect Plus and press to select.
call or alarm.
The LED lights up solid green while the radio is 4
or to Enhanced Privacy.
transmitting and blinks green rapidly when the radio is
receiving an ongoing privacy-enabled transmission.
If the display shows Turn On, press to
You can access this feature by performing one of the enable Privacy. The radio displays a message
following actions: confirming your selection.
• Press the programmed Privacy button to toggle
If the display shows Turn Off, press to
privacy on or off.
disable Privacy. The radio displays a message
• Using the Radio Menu as described by the steps
confirming your selection.
described next.
If the radio has a privacy type assigned, the
Note:
secure or unsecure icon appears on the status
Some radio models may not offer this Privacy
bar, except when the radio is sending or receiving
feature. Check with your dealer or system
an Emergency Alert.
213
English
Making a Privacy-Enabled (Scrambled) Call Radio Disable
Toggle privacy on using the programmed privacy 1 Access this feature by
button or by using the menu. Your radio must have
Radio Steps
the Privacy feature enabled for the currently selected
Controls
channel position to send a privacy-enabled
transmission. When privacy is enabled for the Radio Dis- 1 Press the programmed Radio
currently selected channel position, all voice able but- Disable button.
transmissions made by your radio will be scrambled. ton 2

This includes Group Call, Multigroup Call, talk-back or to the required
during scanned calls, Site All Call, Emergency Call,
and Private Call. Only receiving radios with the same alias or ID and press to se-
Key Value and Key ID as your radio will be able to lect.
unscramble the transmission.
Radio 1
menu to access the menu.
Security 2
or to Contacts and
You can enable or disable any radio in the system.
For example, you might want to disable a stolen press to select. The entries
radio, to prevent the thief from using it, and enable are alphabetically sorted.
that radio, when it is recovered. 3 Use one of the steps described
Note: next to select the required sub-
Performing Radio Disable and Enable is scriber alias or ID:
limited to radios with these functions enabled. • Select the required alias or ID
Check with your dealer or system directly.
214
English
Radio Steps Radio Steps
Controls Controls
• 4
or to the re- or to Radio Disa‐
quired alias or ID and
ble and press to select.
press to select.
• Use the Manual Dial menu The display shows Radio Disable: <Target
• Alias or ID> and the LED blinks green.
or to Manual
2 Wait for acknowledgement.
Dial and press to
select. If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds and
• the display shows Radio Disable Successful.
or to Radio
If not successful, a negative indicator tone sounds
Number and press to and the display shows Radio Disable Failed.
select.
• The first line of the display Radio Enable
shows Radio Number:.
1 Access this feature by
The second line of the dis-
play shows a blinking cur-
sor. Use the keypad to en-
ter the subscriber alias or
ID and press .
215
English
Radio Steps Radio Steps
Con- Con-
trols trols
Radio 1 Press the programmed Radio Ena- •
Enable ble button. or to the required
button 2 alias or ID and press to
or to the required alias
select.
or ID and press to select. • Use the Manual Dial menu
Radio •
1 or to Manual Di‐
menu to access the menu.
2 al and press to select.
or to Contacts and
•
or to Radio Num‐
press to select. The entries
are alphabetically sorted. ber and press to select.
3 Use one of the steps described next • The first line of the display
to select the required subscriber shows Radio Number:. The
alias or ID second line of the display
• Select the required alias or ID di- shows a blinking cursor. Use
rectly. the keypad to enter the sub-
scriber alias or ID and press
.
216
English
This feature allows you to use your radio with a

Radio Steps
Con- Bluetooth-enabled device (accessory) via a wireless
trols Bluetooth connection. Your radio supports both
Motorola and COTS (Commercially available Off-The-
4 Shelf) Bluetooth-enabled devices.
or to Radio Enable
Bluetooth operates within a range of 10 meters (32
and press to select. feet) line of sight. This is an unobstructed path
between your radio and your Bluetooth-enabled
The display shows Radio Enable: <Subscriber device.
Alias or ID> and the LED lights up solid green. It is not recommended that you leave your radio
behind and expect your Bluetooth-enabled device to
2 Wait for acknowledgement.
work with a high degree of reliability when they are
If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds and separated.
the display shows Radio Enable Successful.
At the fringe areas of reception, both voice and tone
If not successful, a negative indicator tone sounds quality will start to sound “garbled” or “broken”. To
and the display shows Radio Enable Failed. correct this problem, simply position your radio and
Bluetooth-enabled device closer to each other (within
the 10-meter/32 feet defined range) to re-establish
Bluetooth Operation
clear audio reception. Your radio’s Bluetooth function
Note: has a maximum power of 2.5 mW (4 dBm) at the 10-
If disabled via the CPS, all Bluetooth-related meter/32 feet range.
features are disabled and the Bluetooth device
Your radio can support up to 4 simultaneous
database is erased.
Bluetooth connections with Bluetooth-enabled
devices of unique types. For example, a headset, and
a PTT-Only Device (POD). Multiple connections with 217
English
Bluetooth-enabled devices of the same type are not •
supported. or to Off and press to select.
The display shows Off and a appears left of
Refer to your respective Bluetooth-enabled device’s the selected status.
user manual for more details on your Bluetooth-
enabled device’s full capabilities. Finding and Connecting to a Bluetooth Device
Turning Bluetooth On and Off Do not turn off your Bluetooth-enabled device or
1 press during the finding and connecting

to access the menu. operation as this cancels the operation.
2 1 Turn on your Bluetooth-enabled device and place
or to Bluetooth and press to
it in pairing mode. Refer to respective Bluetooth-
select.
enabled device’s user manual.
3
or to My Status and press to 2
On your radio, press to access the menu.
select.
The display shows On and Off. The current status 3
is indicated by a . or to Bluetooth and press to
select.
4
• or to Devices and press to
or to On and press to select.
select.
The display shows On and a appears left of
the selected status. 5 Do one of the following:
218
English
• Finding and Connecting from a Bluetooth Device

or to the required device and press (Discoverable Mode)
to select. Do not turn off your Bluetooth or your radio during the
• finding and connecting operation as this may cancel
or to Find Devices to locate
the operation.
available devices. or to the required
1 Turn Bluetooth On.
device and press to select. See Turning Bluetooth On and Off on page 218.
6 2
or to Connect and press to to access the menu.
select.
Display shows Connecting to <Device>. Your 3
Bluetooth-enabled device may require additional or to Bluetooth and press to
steps to complete the pairing. Refer to respective select.
Bluetooth-enabled device’s user manual.
4
or to Find Me and press to
If successful, the radio display shows select.
<Device>Connected. A tone sounds and appears Your radio can now be found by other Bluetooth-
besides the connected device. The Bluetooth enabled devices for a programmed duration. This
Connected icon appears on the status bar. is called Discoverable Mode.
If unsuccessful, the radio display shows Connecting
Failed. 5 Turn on your Bluetooth-enabled device and pair it
with your radio.
Refer to respective Bluetooth-enabled device’s
user manual.
219
English
Disconnecting from a Bluetooth Device Switching Audio Route between Internal Radio Speaker
and Bluetooth Device
1
On your radio, press to access the menu. You can toggle audio routing between internal radio
speaker and external Bluetooth-enabled accessory.
2
or to Bluetooth and press to
Press the programmed Bluetooth Audio Switch
select.
button.
3
or to Devices and press to • A tone sounds and display shows Route Audio
select. to Radio.
• A tone sounds and display shows Route Audio
4 to Bluetooth.
or to the required device and press
Viewing Device Details
to select.
1
5 to access the menu.
or to Disconnect and press to
select. 2
Display shows Disconnecting from <Device>. or to Bluetooth and press to
Your Bluetooth-enabled device may require select.
additional steps to disconnect. Refer to respective
Bluetooth-enabled device’s user manual. 3
or to Devices and press to
select.
The radio display shows <Device> Disconnected. A
positive indicator tone sounds and disappears
beside the connected device. The Bluetooth
Connected icon disappears on the status bar.
220
English
4 5
or to the required device and press or to Delete and press to
select.
to select. The display shows Device Deleted.
5 Bluetooth Mic Gain
or to View Details and press
to select. Allows control of the connected Bluetooth-enabled
device’s microphone gain value.
Deleting Device Name
You can remove a disconnected device from the list 1
to access the menu.
of Bluetooth-enabled devices.
2
1 or to Bluetooth and press to
to access the menu. select.
2 3
or to Bluetooth and press to or to BT Mic Gain and press to
select. select.
3 4
or to Devices and press to or to the BT Mic Gain type and the
select. current values.
4
or to the required device and press To edit values, press to select.
to select.
221
English
5 a)
or to increase or to decrease values Press or to Bluetooth and press
and press to select. to select.

a)
Press or to Indoor Location and
Indoor Location
press to select.
Note: b)
Indoor Location feature is applicable for Press to turn on Indoor Location.

models with the latest software and hardware. The display shows Indoor Location On. You
Check with your dealer or system hear a good key tone.
One of the following scenarios occurs.
Indoor Location can be used to keep track of radio
users location while indoors. When Indoor Location is
icon appears on the Home screen display.
activated, the radio is in a limited discoverable mode.
Dedicated beacons are used to locate the radio and • If unsuccessful, the display shows Turning
determine its position. On Failed. You hear a bad key tone.
c)
Turning Indoor Location On or Off Press to turn off Indoor Location.
The display shows Indoor Location Off.
You can turn on or turn off Indoor Location by You hear a good key tone.
performing one of the following actions.
• Access this feature via the menu.
a) icon disappears on the Home screen
display.
222
English
• •

If unsuccessful, the display shows Turning If unsuccessful, the display shows Turning
Off Failed. You hear a bad key tone. Off Failed. If unsuccessful, you hear a
negative tone.
a) Long press the programmed Indoor Location Accessing Indoor Location Beacons Information
button to turn on Indoor Location. Displays information on Indoor Location Beacons
The display shows Indoor Location On. You
hear a positive tone. 1
2
• If successful, the Indoor Location Available Press or to Bluetooth and press
to select.
On Failed. If unsuccessful, you hear a 3
negative tone. Press or to Indoor Location and
press to select.
The display shows Indoor Location Off. 4
You hear a positive tone. Press or to Beacons and press
to select.
• If successful, the Indoor Location Available The display shows the beacons information.
display.
223
English
Notification List Long press to return to the Home Screen.
Your radio has a Notification List that collects all your Wi-Fi Operation
“unread” events on the channel, such as unread text
messages, missed calls, and call alerts. Wi-Fi® is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance®.
The Notification icon appears on the status bar when Note:
the Notification List has one or more events. This feature is applicable to XPR 5550e/XPR
5580e only.
The list supports a maximum of forty (40) unread
events. When it is full, the next event automatically This feature allows you to setup and connect to a Wi-
replaces the oldest event. Fi® network. Wi-Fi supports updates for radio
firmware, codeplug, and resources such as language
Note:
packs and voice announcement.
After the events are read, they are removed
from the Notification List. Turning Wi-Fi On or Off
Accessing the Notification List Note:
1 5580e only.
to access the menu.
The programmed Wi-Fi On or Off button is
2 assigned by your dealer or system
or to Notification and press
to select. administrator. Check with your dealer or
system administrator to determine how your
3 radio has been programmed.
or to the required event and press
You can turn on or turn off Wi-Fi® by performing one
to select. of the following actions.
224
English
When you turn on Wi-Fi®, the radio scans and

• Press the programmed Wi-Fi On or Off button.
Voice Announcement sounds Turning On Wi-Fi or connects to a network access point.
Turning Off Wi-Fi. You can also connect to a network access point via
the menu.
a) 1
Press to access the menu. Press to access the menu.
b)
Press or to WiFi and press 2
to select. Press or to WiFi and press to
select.
c)
3
press to select. Press or to Networks and press
to select.
Press to turn on Wi-Fi. The display shows
beside Enabled. 4
Press to turn off Wi-Fi. The disappears and press to select.
from beside Enabled.
5
Connecting to a Network Access Point to select.
Note:
This feature is applicable to XPR 5550e/XPR 6
5580e only.
225
English
When the connection is successful, the radio a)
displays a notice and the network access point is Press or to Refresh and press
saved into the profile list. to select.
Refreshing the Network List The radio refreshes and displays the latest
network list.
Note:
This feature is applicable to XPR 5550e/XPR Adding a Network
5580e only.
Note:
• Perform the following actions to refresh the This feature is applicable to XPR 5550e/XPR
network list. 5580e only.
a) If a preferred network is not in the available network
Press to access the menu. list, perform the following actions to add a network.
b)
Press or to WiFi and press 1
c)
to select. select.
automatically refreshes the network list. 3
• If you are already in the Networks menu, perform to select.
the following action to refresh the network list.
4
Press or to Add Network and press
to select.
226
English
5 Enter the Service Set Identifier (SSID) and press 3
. to select.
6 4
Press or to Open and press to Press or to a network access point
select.
7
Enter the password and press . 5
Press or to View Details and press
The radio displays to indicate that the to select.

network is successfully saved. For a connected network access point, the Service
Set Identifier (SSID), Security Mode, Media
Viewing Details of Network Access Points
Access Control (MAC) address, and Internet
Note: Protocol (IP) address are displayed.
For a non-connected network access point, the
5580e only.
Service Set Identifier (SSID) and Security Mode
Perform the following actions to view details of are displayed.
network access points.
Removing Network Access Points
1
Press to access the menu. Note:
2 5580e only. Enterprise network access points
that are added via CPS can only be removed
select.
via CPS.
227
English
Perform the following actions to remove network
access points from the profile list.
Utilities
1 Turning the Radio Tones/Alerts On or Off

You can enable and disable all radio tones and alerts
2 (except for the incoming Emergency alert tone) if
Press or to WiFi and press to needed.
select.
Press the programmed All Tones/Alerts button to

3 toggle all tones on or off, or follow the procedure
described next to access this feature via the radio
to select.
menu.
4 1
Press or to the selected network to access the menu.
access point and press to select.
2
or to Utilities and press to
5 select.
Press or to Remove and press to
select.
3
6
Press or to Yes and press to to select.
select.
4
The radio displays to indicate that the to select.
selected network access point is successfully
removed.
228
English
5 4
or to All Tones and press to or to Tones/Alerts and press
select. to select.
6 5
Press to enable/disable all tones and alerts. or to Vol. Offset and press to
select.
The display shows beside Enabled.
The disappears from beside Enabled. 6
or to the required volume value.
Setting the Tone Alert Volume Offset Level The radio sounds a feedback tone with each
corresponding volume value.
You can adjust the Tone Alert Volume Offset level if
needed. This feature adjusts the volume of the tones/ 7 Do one of the following:
alerts, allowing it to be higher or lower than the voice
•
volume. Press to keep the required displayed
volume value.
1
to access the menu. •
Press to exit without changing the current
2 volume offset settings.
select. Turning the Talk Permit Tone On or Off
You can enable and disable the Talk Permit Tone if
3
or to Radio Settings and press needed.
to select. 1
to access the menu.
229
English
2 1
or to Utilities and press to to access the menu.
select.
2
3 or to Utilities and press to
or to Radio Settings and press select.
to select. 3
4
or to Tones/Alerts and press to select.
to select.
4
5 or to Tones/Alerts and press
or to Talk Permit and press to to select.
select.
5
6 or to Power Up and press to
Press to enable/disable the Talk Permit select.
Tone.
6
The display shows beside Enabled. Press to enable/disable the Power Up Alert
Tone.
The disappears from beside Enabled.
Turning the Power Up Alert Tone On or Off
You can enable and disable the Power Up Alert Tone
if needed.
230
English
Setting the Power Level

4
Press or to Power and press to
You can customize your radio’s power setting to high select.
or low for each Connect Plus zone.
High enables communication with tower sites in 5
Press or to the required setting and
Connect Plus mode located at a considerable
distance from you. Low enables communication with press to select.
tower sites in Connect Plus mode in closer proximity. appears beside selected setting. At any time,
Press the programmed Power Level button to toggle long press to return to the Home screen.
transmit power level between high and low.
Screen returns to the previous menu.
Follow the procedure described next to access this
feature via the radio menu. Changing the Display Mode
1 You can change radio’s display mode between Day

Press to access the menu. or Night, as needed. This affects the color palette of
the display.
2
Press or to Utilities and press 1
to access the menu.
to select.
2
Press or to Radio Settings and select.
press to select.
3
to select.
231
English
4 3
or to Display and press to or to Radio Settings and press
select.
The display shows Day Mode and Night Mode. to select.
5 4
or to the required setting and press or to Display and press to
select.
to enable. appears besides selected
setting. 5
or to Brightness and press to
Adjusting the Display Brightness select.
The display shows a progress bar.
You can adjust the display brightness of the radio as
needed. 6
Decrease display brightness by pressing or
Note:
Display brightness cannot be adjusted when increase the display brightness by pressing .
Auto Brightness is enabled. Select from setting of 1 to 8. Press to
confirm your entry.
1
to access the menu.
Turning the Introduction Screen On or Off
2 You can enable and disable the Introduction Screen if
select. needed.
1
to access the menu.
232
English
2 1
select.
2
or to Radio Settings and press select.
to select. 3
4
or to Display and press to to select.
select.
4
5 or to Languages and press to
or to Intro Screen and press select.
to select.
5
6 or to the required language and press
Press to enable/disable the Introduction
Screen. to enable. appears beside selected
language.
Turning the LED Indicator On or Off
You can enable and disable the LED Indicator if
Language needed.
You can set your radio display to be in your required 1
language. to access the menu.
233
English
2 3
or to Utilities and press to or to Radio Settings and press
select.
to select.
3
or to Radio Settings and press 4
or to Cable Type and press to
to select. select.
4 5 The current cable type is indicated by a .

or to LED Indicator and press
to select. Voice Announcement
5 This feature enables the radio to audibly indicate the
Press to enable/disable the LED Indicator. current Zone or Channel the user has just assigned,
The display shows beside Enabled. or programmable button press. This audio indicator
can be customized per customer requirements. This
The disappears from beside Enabled. is typically useful when the user is in a difficult
condition to read the content shown on the display.
Identifying Cable Type
You can select the type of cable your radio uses. 1
to access the menu.
1 2
to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to
select.
2
select.
234
English
3 3
or to Radio Settings and press or to Radio Settings and press
4 4
or to Voice Announcement and press or to Display and press to
select.
to select.
You can also use or to change the selected option. 5
or to Menu Timer and press to
5 Do one of the following: select.
• 6
Press to enable Voice Announcement. or to the required setting and press
to select.
•
Press to disable Voice Announcement.
The disappears from beside Enabled. Turning Horns/Lights On or Off
This feature needs to be installed through your radio’s
Menu Timer
rear accessory connector by your dealer.
Set the period of time your radio stays in the menu
Your radio is able to notify you of an incoming call via
before it automatically switches to the Home screen.
1 incoming call sounds your vehicle's horn and turns on
to access the menu. its lights.
2 Press the programmed Horns/Lights button to toggle

or to Utilities and press to horns and light feature on or off.
select.
235
English
1 2
to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to
select.
2
or to Utilities and press to 3
select. or to Radio Settings and press
3 to select.
4
to select. or to Dual Knob and press to
select.
4
or to Horn/Lights and press to 5 The display shows Volume Only and Volume &
select.
Ch. or to the required setting and
5
Press to enable/disable Horns/Lights. press to select.
The display shows beside Enabled. appears beside selected setting.
The disappears from beside Enabled. Screen returns to the previous menu.
Setting Dual Knob Operation Preference Digital Mic AGC (Mic AGC-D)
Your radio has a dual-purpose Volume/Channel This feature controls the your radio's microphone gain
Knob. Disabling the dual-purpose option sets the automatically while transmitting on a digital system. It
knob to work as a Volume Knob only. suppresses loud audio or boosts soft audio to a
preset value in order to provide a consistent level of
1
to access the menu. audio.
236
English
sources. This feature is a Receive-only feature and

1
to access the menu. does not affect Transmit audio.
2 1
select. Radio Steps
Con-
3
or to Radio Settings and press trol
to select. Menu 1
to access the menu.
4 2
or to Mic AGC-D and press to or to Radio Settings
select.
or to Radio Settings
•
Press to enable Mic AGC-D. The display and press to select.
shows beside Enabled. 4
• or to Intelligent Au‐
Press to disable Mic AGC-D. The
disappears from beside Enabled. dio and press to select.
Note:
Intelligent Audio You can also use or to
Your radio can automatically adjust its audio volume change the selected option.
to overcome background noise in the environment, 5 Do one of the following:
inclusive of all stationary and non-stationary noise
237
English
Radio Steps •
Press to enable Intelligent Audio. The
Con- display shows beside Enabled.
trol
•
Press to disable Intelligent Audio. The
• disappears from beside Enabled.
Press to enable Intelligent
Audio. The display shows be-
See Authorized Accessories List on page 394 for
side Enabled.
recommended Bluetooth-enabled audio accessories

• with in-built Automatic Volume Control for similar
Press to disable Intelligent
Audio. The disappears from be- performance.
side Enabled. Turning the Acoustic Feedback Suppressor Feature On
or Off
2 This feature allows you to minimize acoustic feedback
select. in received calls.
3 1
or to Radio Settings and press to access the menu.
to select. 2
4 select.
or to Intelligent Audio and press
3
to select. or to Radio Settings and press
5 Do one of the following: to select.
238
English
Note:

4
or to AF Suppressor and press Selected radio models may offer GPS,
to select. GLONASS, and BDS. GNSS constellation is
You can also use or to change the selected option. configured via CPS. Check with your dealer or
5 Do one of the following. radio has been programmed.
• 1
Press to enable Acoustic Feedback Press to access the menu.
Suppressor. The display shows beside
Enabled. 2
• Press or to Utilities. Press to
Press to disable Acoustic Feedback select.
Suppressor. The disappears from beside
Enabled. 3
Turning GPS/GNSS On or Off to select.
Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS) is a
4
satellite navigation system that determines the radio’s Press or to GPS. Press to select.
precise location. GNSS includes Global Positioning
System (GPS), Global Navigation Satellite System 5
(GLONASS), and BeiDou Navigation Satellite System Press to enable/disable GPS/GNSS.
(BDS). If enabled appears besides Enabled.
Press the programmed GPS/GNSS button to toggle If disabled, disappears beside Enabled.
the feature on or off.
See Checking the GPS/GNSS Information on page
249 for details on retrieving GPS/GNSS information.
239
English
Accessing General Radio Information 1
to access the menu.
Your radio contains information on the following:
• Battery 2
• Degree of Tilt (Accelerometer) select.
• Radio Model Number Index
• Option Board Over-the-Air (OTA) Codeplug CRC 3
or to Radio Info and press to
• Site Number select.

• Site Info
• Radio Alias and ID 4
or to Model Index and press to
• Firmware and Codeplug Versions select.
• GPS Information The display shows the Model Number Index.
Press at any time to return to the previous Checking the CRC of the Option Board OTA
Codeplug File
screen or long press to return to the Home
screen. The radio exits the current screen once the Follow the instructions below if your radio system
inactivity timer expires. administrator asks you to view the Option Board OTA
Codeplug File CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check). This
Checking the Radio Model Number Index menu option only appears if the Option Board
This index number identifies your radio’s model- received its last codeplug update OTA.
specific hardware. Your radio system administrator
1
may ask for this number when preparing a new to access the menu.
Option Board codeplug for your radio.
240
English
2 2
or to Utilities and press to or to Utilities and press to
select. select.
3 3
or to Radio Info and press to or to Radio Info and press to
select. select.
4 4
or to OB OTA CPcrc and press or to Site Number and press to
to select. select.
The display shows some letters and numbers. The display shows the Network ID and the Site
Communicate this information to your radio Number.
system administrator exactly as shown.
Checking the Site Info
Displaying the Site ID (Site Number)
Note:
Note: If you are not currently registered at a site, the
If you are not currently registered at a site, the display shows Not Registered.
display shows Not Registered.
The Site Info feature provides information that can be
The radio briefly shows the Site ID as it registers with useful to a service technician. It consists of the
a Connect Plus site. Following registration, the radio following information:
does not generally indicate the Site number. To
• Repeater number of current Control Channel
display the registered Site number, do the following:
repeater.
1 • RSSI: Last signal strength value measured from
to access the menu. Control Channel repeater.
241
English
• Neighbor List sent by Control Channel repeater 1
(five numbers separated by commas). to access the menu.
If you are requested to use this feature, please report 2
the displayed information exactly as it appears on the or to Utilities and press to
screen. select.
1 3
to access the menu. or to Radio Info and press to
select.
2
select. or to My ID and press to select.
The display shows the radio ID.
3
or to Radio Info and press to Checking the Firmware Version and Codeplug
select. Version
4 Displays the firmware version on your radio.
or to Site Info and press to
select. 1
The display shows the Site Info. to access the menu.
Checking the Radio ID 2

This feature displays the ID of your radio. select.
Follow the procedure described next to access this 3

feature via the radio screen. or to Radio Info and press to
select.
242
English
can display the version of a "pending file". A "pending

4
or to Versions and press to file" is a Frequency File or Option Board firmware file
select. that the Connect Plus radio knows about via system
The display a list with the following information: messaging, but the radio has not yet collected all of
• (Radio) Firmware Version the file’s packets. If a display Connect Plus radio has
a pending file, the menu provides options to:
• (Radio) Codeplug Version
• Option Board Firmware Version • See the version number of the pending file.
• Option Board Frequency Version • See what percentage of packets has been
• Option Board Hardware Version collected so far.
• Option Board Codeplug Version • Request the Connect Plus radio to resume
collecting file packets.
Checking for Updates
If the radio is enabled for Connect Plus over-the-air
Connect Plus provides the ability to update certain file transfer, there may be times when the radio
files (Option Board Codeplug, Network Frequency automatically joins a file transfer without first notifying
File and Option Board Firmware File) over-the-air. the radio user. While the radio is collecting file
packets, the LED rapidly blinks red and the radio
Note:
displays the High Volume Data icon on the Home
Check with the dealer or network administrator
Screen status bar.
to determine whether this feature has been
enabled for your radio. Note:
The Connect Plus radio cannot collect file
Any display Connect Plus radio has the ability to
packets and receive calls at the same time. If
show its current Option Board OTA Codeplug CRC,
you wish to cancel the file transfer, press and
Frequency File version or Option Board firmware file
release the PTT button. This causes the radio
version via a menu option. In addition, display radios
to request a call on the selected Contact
that have been enabled for over-the-air file transfer
Name, and it will also cancel the file transfer 243
English
for that radio until the process resumes at a been configured by the dealer or system
later time. administrator. The radio will either upgrade
immediately after collecting all file packets, or it will
There are several things that can make the file
wait until the next time that the user turns the radio
transfer process start again. The first example applies
on.
to all over-the-air file types. The other examples apply
only to the Network Frequency File and Option Board Note:
Firmware File: Check with your dealer or system
administrator to determine how your radio has

• The radio system administrator re-initiates the
been programmed.
over-the-air file transfer.
• The Option Board's pre-defined timer expires, The process of upgrading to a new Option Board
which causes the Option Board to automatically firmware file takes several seconds, and it requires
resume the process of collecting packets. the Connect Plus Option Board to reset the radio.
• The timer has not yet expired, but the radio user Once the upgrade starts, the radio use will not be
requests the file transfer to resume via the menu able to make or receive calls until the process is
option. completed.
After the Connect Plus radio finishes downloading all Firmware File
file packets, it must upgrade to the newly acquired Firmware Up to Date
file. For the Network Frequency File, this is an Note:
automatic process and does not require a radio reset. If the Option Board firmware file is not Up to
For the Option Board Codeplug File, this is an Date (and if the radio has partially collected a
automatic process that will cause a brief interruption more recent Option Board firmware file
to service as the Option Board loads the new version) the radio displays a list with additional
codeplug information and re-acquires a network site. options; Version, %Received, and Download.
How quickly the radio upgrades to a new Option
244 Board firmware file depends on how the radio has
English
1 3
to access the menu. or to Radio Info and press to
select.
2
select. or to Updates and press to
select.
3
or to Radio Info and press to 5
select. or to Firmware and press to
select.
4
or to Updates and press to 6
select. or to Version and press to
select.
5
or to Firmware and press to If there is a pending Option Board firmware file,
select. the display shows the pending firmware version
The display shows Firmware is Up to Date. number.
Pending Firmware – Version If there is a pending Option Board firmware file,

the display shows Firmware is Up to Date.
1
to access the menu. Pending Firmware – % Received
2 1
select.
245
English
2 Pending Firmware – Download
select. If the Connect Plus radio has previously left an OTA
Option Board Firmware File Transfer with a partial
3 file, the unit automatically rejoins the file transfer (if
or to Radio Info and press to still ongoing) when an internal timer expires. If you
select. want the unit to rejoin an ongoing Option Board
Firmware File transfer prior to expiration of this
4 internal timer, use the Download option as described

or to Updates and press to
select. below.
5 1
or to Firmware and press to to access the menu.
select.
2
6 select.
or to %Received and press to
select.
3
The screen displays the percentage of firmware or to Radio Info and press to
file packets collected so far. select.
Note:
4
When at 100%, the radio needs to be or to Updates and press to
power cycled Off and then On to initiate the select.
firmware upgrade.
5
or to Firmware and press to
select.
246
English
6 1
or to Download and press to to access the menu.
select.
The display shows the following: 2
Download Available Start Download select.
No Download Availa- Download not availa‐ 3

ble ble or to Radio Info and press to
select.
or to Frequency and press to
•
Select Yes and press to start the select.
download. The display shows Freq. File is Up to Date.
•
Select No and press to return to the Frequency File Pending – Version
previous menu.
1
to access the menu.
Frequency File
Frequency File Up to Date 2
Note:
select.
If the Frequency File is not Up to Date (and if
the radio has partially collected a more recent 3
frequency file version) the radio displays a list or to Radio Info and press to
with additional options; Version, %Received, select.
and Download.
247
English
4 4
or to Updates and press to or to Updates and press to
select. select.
5 5
or to Frequency and press to or to %Received and press to
select. select.
The screen displays the percentage of frequency
6 file packets collected so far.

or to Version and press to
select. Frequency File Pending – Download
If there is a pending Frequency File, the display
shows the pending Frequency File version If the Connect Plus radio has previously left an OTA
number. Network Frequency File Transfer with a partial file,
the unit automatically rejoins the file transfer (if still
Frequency File Pending – % Received ongoing) when an internal timer expires. If you want
the unit to rejoin an ongoing Network Frequency File
1 transfer prior to expiration of this internal timer, use
to access the menu.
the Download option as described below.
2
select. to access the menu.
3 2
or to Radio Info and press to or to Utilities and press to
select. select.
248
English
Checking the GPS/GNSS Information

3
select. Displays the GPS/GNSS information on your radio,
such as values of:
4 • Latitude
or to Updates and press to
select. • Longitude
• Altitude
5 • Direction
or to Frequency and press to
select. • Velocity
• Horizontal Dilution of Precision (HDOP)
6 • Satellites
or to Download and press to
select. • Version
Download Currently Download not avail‐ 1

to access the menu.
Unavailable able
Download Currently Start Download 2
Available select.

• Select Yes and press to start the download. select.
• Select No and press to return to the previous
menu. 4
or to GPS Info and press to
select.
249
English
5
or to the required item and press
to select.
The display shows the requested GPS/GNSS
information.
See Turning GPS/GNSS On or Off on page 239 for

details on GPS/GNSS.
250
English
Other Systems
Other Systems
251
English
You hear a continuous Talk Prohibit Tone if your
Other Systems call is interrupted, for example when the radio
receives an Emergency call. You should release the
Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button PTT button.
The PTT button serves two basic purposes.
Programmable Buttons
• While a call is in progress, the PTT button allows
the radio to transmit to other radios in the call. The Depending on the duration of a button press, your
microphone is activated when the PTT button is dealer can program the programmable buttons as
pressed. shortcuts to radio functions.
• While a call is not in progress, the PTT button is Short press Pressing and releasing rapidly.
used to make a new call.
Long press Pressing and holding for the
Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the programmed duration.
PTT button to listen.
Note:
If the Talk Permit Tone or the PTT Sidetone is See Emergency Operation on page 317 for
enabled, wait until the short alert tone ends before more information on the programmed duration
talking. of the Emergency button.
Other Systems
If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled Assignable Radio Functions

on your radio (programmed by your dealer), you will
hear a short alert tone the moment the target radio The following radio functions can be assigned to the
(the radio that is receiving your call) releases the PTT programmable buttons.
button, indicating the channel is free for you to
respond.
252
English
Other Systems
Audio Ambience Allows the user to select an Emergency Depending on the
environment the radio is programming, initiates or
operating in. cancels an emergency.
Audio Profiles Allows the user to select the Ext Public Address Toggles audio routing
preferred audio profile. (PA) between the connected PA
loudspeaker amplifier and the
Bluetooth® Audio Toggles audio routing
internal PA system of the
Switch between internal radio
radio.
speaker and external
Bluetooth-enabled accessory. Indoor Location Toggles Indoor Location on or
off.
Call Alert Provides direct access to the
contacts list for you to select a Intelligent Audio Toggles intelligent audio on or
contact to whom a Call Alert off.
can be sent.
Manual Dial Initiates a Private Call by
Call Forwarding Toggles Call Forwarding on or keying in any subscriber ID.
off.
Manual Site Starts the manual site search.
Call Log Selects the call log list. Roam[5]
Channel Plays zone and channel Mic AGC Toggles the internal
Announcement announcement voice microphone automatic gain
messages for the current control (AGC) on or off.
channel.
Monitor Monitors a selected channel
Contacts Provides direct access to the for activity.
Contacts list.
253
English
Notifications Provides direct access to the Public Address Toggles the internal PA
Notifications list. (PA) system of the radio on or off.
Nuisance Channel Temporarily removes an Radio Alias and ID Provides radio alias and ID.
Delete[5] unwanted channel, except for
Radio Check Determines if a radio is active
the Selected Channel, from
in a system.
the scan list. The Selected
Channel refers to the selected Radio Disable Allows a target radio to be
zone or channel combination remotely disabled.
of the user from which scan is
Radio Enable Allows a target radio to be
initiated.
remotely enabled.
One Touch Access Directly initiates a predefined
Remote Monitor Turns on the microphone of a
Private, Phone or Group Call,
target radio without it giving
a Call Alert or a Quick Text
any indicators.
message.
Repeater/ Toggles between using a
Option Board Toggles option board
Talkaround[5] repeater and communicating
Feature feature(s) on or off for option
directly with another radio.
board-enabled channels.
Other Systems

Permanent Monitors a selected channel
Channel
Monitor[5] for all radio traffic until
function is disabled. Silence Home Mutes the Home Channel
Channel Reminder Reminder.
Phone Provides direct access to the
Phone Contacts list. Scan [6] Toggles scan on or off.
Privacy Toggles privacy on or off.
254
English
Other Systems
Site Info Displays the current site Voice Toggles voice announcement
name and ID of Capacity Announcement on or off.
Plus-Multi-Site.
Voice Operating Toggles VOX on or off.
Plays site announcement Transmission
voice messages for the (VOX)
current site when Voice
Announcement is enabled. Wi-Fi Toggles Wi-Fi on or off.
Site Lock[5] When toggled on, the radio Zone Selection Allows selection from a list of
searches the current site only. zones.
searches other sites in
addition to the current site.
Telemetry Control Controls the Output Pin on a
local or remote radio.
Assignable Settings or Utility Functions
Text Message Selects the text message
menu. The following radio settings or utility functions can be
assigned to the programmable buttons.
Transmit Interrupt Stops an ongoing interruptible
Remote Dekey call to free the channel. Tones/Alerts Toggles all tones and alerts on or
off.
Trill Enhancement Toggles trill enhancement on
or off. Backlight Toggles display backlight on or off.
5 Not applicable in Capacity Plus.

6 Not applicable in Capacity Plus--Single Site 255
English
Channel Up/ Depending on the programming, 3 Do one of the following:
Down changes channel to previous or
•
next channel. Press to return to the previous screen.
Display Mode Toggles the day/night display •
mode on or off.
Your radio automatically exits the menu after a
Power Level Toggles transmit power level period of inactivity and returns to the Home
between high and low. screen.
Squelch Toggles squelch level between The Menu Navigation Buttons are also available
tight and normal. on a keypad microphone. See Keypad Microphone
Buttons on page 18.
Accessing Programmed Functions
Follow the procedure to access programmed
Status Indicators
functions in your radio.
This chapter explains the icons, LED indicators, and
1 Do one of the following: audio tones used in the radio.
• Short or long press the programmed button. Icons
Other Systems
Proceed to Step 3.
The Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) of your radio shows
•
Press to access the menu. the radio status, text entries, and menu entries. The
following are the icons that appear on the radio
2 display.
Press or to the menu function, and
Display Icons
press to select a function or enter a sub- The following icons appear on the status bar at the
menu. top of the radio display. The icons are arranged left
256
English
most in order of appearance or usage, and are
Other Systems
Flexible receive list is
channel-specific. enabled.
The number of bars (0 Flexible Receive List
– 4) shown indicates
the charge remaining in GPS feature is enabled.
Battery The icon stays lit when
the battery. Blinks when
the battery is low. a position fix is
GPS Available
available.
The Bluetooth feature is
enabled but there is no GPS feature is enabled
remote Bluetooth but is not receiving data
Bluetooth Not device connected. from the satellite.
GPS Not Available
Connected
Radio is receiving high
Radio call log.
volume data and
channel is busy.
High Volume Data
Call Log
Indoor location status is
Radio contact is
on and available.
available.
Contact Indoor Location
Available[10]
Radio is in Emergency
mode. Indoor location status is
on but unavailable due
Emergency to Bluetooth disabled or
Beacons Scan
257
English
Indoor Location suspended by Option Board Non-
Unavailable[10] Bluetooth. Function
Notification List has Indicates time left
items to review. before automatic restart
Over-the-Air of radio.
Job Ticket Notification
Programming Delay
Incoming message. Timer
Radio is set at Low
Message or power or Radio is set at
Selected channel is Power Level High power.
being monitored.
The number of bars
Monitor displayed represents
Received Signal the radio signal
Notification List has one
Strength Indicator (RSSI) strength. Four bars
or more missed events. indicate the strongest
Notification signal. This icon is only
Other Systems
displayed while
The Option Board is receiving.
enabled. (Option board
enabled models only) Ringing mode is
Option Board enabled.
The Option Board is Ring Only
disabled.
258
English
Other Systems
Scan feature is Silent ring mode is
enabled. enabled.
Scan[7] Silent Ring

Radio detects activity The site roaming
on channel/group feature is enabled.
designated as Priority
Scan- Priority 1[7] 1. Site Roaming[8]
Radio detects activity In the absence of a

on channel/group repeater, radio is
designated as Priority currently configured for
Talkaround[7] direct radio to radio
Scan- Priority 2[7] 2.
communication.
The Privacy feature is
enabled. Tones Disable Tones are turned off.
Secure
The Privacy feature is
Radio is signed in to disabled.
the remote server.
Unsecure
Sign In
Vibrate mode is
Radio is signed out of enabled.
the remote server.
Vibrate
Sign Out
Vibrate and Ring mode
is enabled.
259
English
Vibrate and Ring Wi-Fi signal is
unavailable.
Vote scan feature is
enabled. Wi-Fi Unavailable[9]
Vote Scan
Wi-Fi signal is
excellent.
Wi-Fi Excellent[9] Call Icons
Wi-Fi signal is The following icons appear on the display during a
excellent. call. These icons also appear in the Contacts list to
indicate alias or ID type.
Wi-Fi Good[9]
Wi-Fi signal is average Indicates a Bluetooth PC Call in
progress.
Wi-Fi Average[9] Bluetooth PC
Bluetooth PC Call alias (name) or
Call
Wi-Fi signal is poor. ID (number).
Other Systems
The Dispatch Call contact type is

Wi-Fi Poor[9] used to send a text message to a
7 Not applicable in Capacity Plus

8 Not applicable in Capacity Plus--Single-Site
260 10 Only applicable for models with the latest software and hardware.
English
Advance Menu Icons
Other Systems
Dispatch Call dispatcher PC through a third-
party Text Message Server. The following icons appear beside menu items that
offer a choice between two options or as an indication
Indicates a Group Call or All Call that there is a sub-menu offering two options.
in progress.
In the Contacts list, it indicates a Indicates the option is
Group Call/All selected.
Call Checkbox (Checked)
(number).
Indicates a Phone Call as Group Indicates the option is not
Call or All Call in progress. selected.
Checkbox (Empty)
Phone Call as Indicates the option selected
Group/All Call for the menu item with a
(number).
Solid Black Box sub-menu.
Indicates a Phone Call as Private
Call in progress. Mini Notice Icons
In the Contacts list, it indicates a The following icons appear momentarily on the
Phone Call as display after an action to perform a task is taken.
phone alias (name) or ID
Private Call
(number).
Failed action taken.
Indicates a Private Call in
progress.
Failed Transmission
Private Call In the Contacts list, it indicates a (Negative)
subscriber alias (name) or ID
(number). Successful action taken.
261
English
Successful The text message has not
Transmission (Positive) or been read.
Transmitting. This is Individual or Group
seen before indication for Message Unread
Transmission in Successful Transmission The text message cannot
Progress (Transitional) or Failed Transmission. be sent.
or
Sent Item Icons Send Failed
the display in the Sent Items folder. The text message has been
successfully sent.
or
The text message to a
subscriber alias or ID is Sent Successfully
or
pending transmission, Bluetooth Device Icons
In Progress followed by waiting for The following icons appear next to items in the list of
acknowledgement. Bluetooth-enabled devices available to indicate the
The text message to a device type.
group alias or ID is pending
Other Systems
transmission. Bluetooth-enabled audio

device, such as a headset.
The text message has been
read. Bluetooth Audio
or Device
Individual or Group
Bluetooth-enabled data
Message Read
device, such as a scanner.
262
English
Other Systems
Bluetooth Data
Device
Bluetooth-enabled PTT
device, such as a PTT-Only
Bluetooth PTT
Device (POD). A A
Device
Job Tickets Icons
Indicates all jobs listed.

Blinking Radio has failed the self-test upon
Red powering up.
All Jobs Radio is receiving or sending an
emergency transmission.
Indicates new jobs.
Radio is transmitting in low battery
state.
New Jobs Radio has moved out of range if Auto-
Range Transponder System is
LED Indicators
configured.
LED indicators show the operational status of your
radio. Solid Radio is powering up.
Green Radio is transmitting.
Blinking Radio is receiving a non-privacy-
Green enabled call or data.
263
English
Radio is retrieving Over-the-Air Double Radio has Auto Roaming enabled.
Programming transmissions over the Blinking Radio is actively searching for a new
air. Yellow site.
Radio is detecting activity over the air. Radio has yet to respond to a Group
Note: Call Alert.
Radio is locked.
This activity may or may not
affect the programmed channel Radio is not connected to the repeater
of the radio due to the nature of while in Capacity Plus.
the digital protocol. All Capacity Plus channels are busy.
There is no LED indication Tones
when the radio is detecting The following are the tones that sound through on the
activity over the air in Capacity radio speaker.
Plus.
High Pitched Tone
Double Radio is receiving a privacy-enabled
Blinking call or data. Low Pitched Tone
Green
Other Systems
Indicator Tones
Solid Radio is monitoring a conventional Indicator tones provide you with audible indications of
Yellow channel. the status after an action to perform a task is taken.
Blinking Radio is scanning for activity.
Positive Indicator Tone
Yellow Radio is receiving a Call Alert.
All Capacity Plus-Multi-Site channels Negative Indicator Tone
are busy.
264
English
Audio Tones reflect this change by appearing “grayed out”. The
Other Systems
Audio tones provide you with audible indications of disabled features are hidden in the menu.
the status, or response to data received on the radio.
Your radio also has features available in both analog
A monotone sound. Sounds and digital modes. The minor differences in the way
continuously until termination. each feature works do not affect the performance of
Continuous Tone your radio.
Sounds periodically depending Note:
on the duration set by the radio. Your radio also switches between digital and
Periodic Tone
Tone starts, stops, and repeats analog modes during a dual mode scan. See
itself. Scan on page 301 for more information.
A single tone that repeats itself
until it is terminated by the user. Icon Information
Repetitive Tone
Throughout this publication, the icons described are
Sounds only once for a duration used tow indicate features supported in either the
set by the radio. conventional analog or conventional digital mode, or
Momentary Tone
made available with a keypad-enabled microphone.
Conventional Analog and Digital Modes Indicates a conventional Analog Mode-
Each channel in your radio can be configured as a Only feature.
conventional analog or conventional digital channel.
Use the Channel Rocker to switch between an Indicates a conventional Digital Mode-
analog or a digital channel. Only feature.
Certain features are unavailable when switching from
digital to analog mode. The icons for digital features
265
English
Indicates a Keypad-Enabled Microphone- In a manual site search, the radio searches for the
Only feature. next site in the roam list that is currently in range but
which may not have the strongest signal and locks on
to the repeater.
For features that are available in both conventional
Note:
analog and digital modes, both icons are not shown.
Each channel can only have either Scan or
Roam enabled, not both at the same time.
IP Site Connect
Channels with this feature enabled can be added to a
This feature allows your radio to extend conventional
particular roam list. The radio searches the channels
communication beyond the reach of a single site by
in the roam list during the automatic roam operation
connecting to different available sites by using an
to locate the best site. A roam list supports a
Internet Protocol (IP) network. This is a conventional
maximum of 16 channels, including the selected
multi-site mode.
channel.
When the radio moves out of range from one site and
Note:
into the range of another, the radio connects to the
You cannot manually add or delete an entry in
repeater of the new site to send or receive calls or
the roam list. Check with your dealer or
data transmissions. This is done either automatically
system administrator for more information.
or manually depending on your settings.
Other Systems
In an automatic site search, the radio scans through Capacity Plus--Single Site
all available sites when the signal from the current
site is weak or when the radio is unable to detect any Capacity Plus-Single Site is a single-site trunking
signal from the current site. The radio then locks on to configuration of the MOTOTRBO radio system, which
the repeater with the strongest Received Signal uses a pool of channels to support hundreds of users
Strength Indicator (RSSI) value. and up to 254 Groups. This feature allows your radio
266
English
to efficiently utilize the available number of programmed channels supported by each of the
Other Systems
programmed channels while in Repeater Mode. available sites.
You hear a negative indicator tone if you try to access When the radio moves out of range from one site and
a feature not applicable to Capacity Plus-Single Site into the range of another, it connects to the new site's
via a programmable button press. repeater to send or receive calls/data transmissions.
Depending on your settings, this is done
Your radio also has features that are available in
automatically or manually.
conventional digital mode, IP Site Connect, and
Capacity Plus. However, the minor differences in the If the radio is set to do this automatically, it scans
way each feature works does not affect the through all available sites when the signal from the
performance of your radio. current site is weak or when the radio is unable to
detect any signal from the current site. It then locks
Check with your dealer or system administrator for
on to the repeater with the strongest Received Signal
more information on this configuration.
Strength Indicator (RSSI) value.
Capacity Plus--Multi-Site In a manual site search, the radio searches for the
next site in the roam list that is currently in range (but
Capacity Plus-Multi-Site is a multi-channel trunking which may not have the strongest signal) and locks
configuration of the MOTOTRBO radio system, on to it.
combining the best of both Capacity Plus and IP Site
Connect configurations. Any channel with Capacity Plus--Multi-Site enabled
can be added to a particular roam list. The radio
Capacity Plus--Multi-Site allows your radio to extend searches these channels during the automatic roam
trunking communication beyond the reach of a single operation to locate the best site.
site, by connecting to different available sites which
are connected via an Internet Protocol (IP) network. It
also provides an increase in capacity by efficiently
utilizing the combined available number of
267
English
Note: Selecting Zones
You cannot manually add or delete an entry to Follow the procedure to select the required zone on
the roam list. Check with your dealer or your radio.
system administrator for more information.
Similar to Capacity Plus--Single Site, icons of features 1 Do one of the following:
not applicable to Capacity Plus--Multi-Site are not • Press the programmed Zone Selection button.
available in the menu. You hear a negative indicator Proceed to Step 3.
tone if you try to access a feature not applicable to •
Capacity Plus--Multi-Site via a programmable button Press to access the menu.
press.
2
Press or to Zone. Press to
Zone and Channel Selections select.
This chapter explains the operations to select a zone The display shows and the current zone.
or channel on your radio.
3
A zone is a group of channels. Your radio supports up Press or to the required zone. Press
to 99 channels and 2 zones, with a maximum of 99 to select.
channels per zone. The display shows <Zone> Selected
Other Systems
Transmissions are sent and received on a channel. momentarily and returns to the selected zone
Each channel may have been programmed differently screen.
to support different groups of users or supplied with
different features.
268
English
Selecting Zones by Using the Alias Search
Other Systems
Follow the procedure to select the required zone on momentarily and returns to the selected zone
your radio by using the alias search. screen.
1 Selecting Channels
Follow the procedure to select the required channel
2 on your radio after you have selected a zone.
Press or to Zone. Press to
select. Do one of the following:
The display shows and the current zone. • Press the Scroll Up/Down button.
• Use the Volume/Channel Knob.
The display shows a blinking cursor. • Press the programmed Channel Up or
Channel Down button.
alias. Calls
The alias search is case-insensitive. If there are
This chapter explains the operations to receive,
two or more entries with the same name, the
respond to, make, and stop calls.
display shows the entry listed first in the list.
The first text line shows the characters you You can select a subscriber alias or ID, or group alias
entered. The following text lines show the or ID after you have selected a channel by using one
shortlisted search results. of these features:
5 Alias Search This method is used for Group,

Press to select. Private and All Calls only with a
keypad microphone
269
English
Contacts List This method provides direct Programmed This method is used for Group,
access to the Contacts list. One Touch Private, and Phone Calls only.
Access Button
Manual Dial (via This method is used for Private Note:
Contacts) and Phone Calls only with a You can only have one
keypad microphone. ID assigned to a One
Touch Access button
Programmed This method is used for Group,
with a short or long
Number Keys Private, and All Calls only with a
programmable button
keypad microphone.
press. Your radio can
Note: have multiple One
You can only have one Touch Access buttons
alias or ID assigned to a programmed.
number key, but you can
have more than one Programmable This method is used for Phone
number key associated Button Calls only.
to an alias or ID. All the Volume/Channel This method manually selects a
number keys on a Selector Knob subscriber alias or ID, or group
keypad microphone can alias or ID.
Other Systems
be assigned. See
Assigning Entries to The LED lights up solid green while the radio is
Programmable Number transmitting and blinks green when the radio is
Keys on page 306 for receiving.
more information.
270
English
Note:
Other Systems
The LED lights up solid green while the radio The green LED lights up. The first text line shows
is transmitting and double blinks green when the Group Call icon and alias.
the radio is receiving a privacy-enabled call.
To unscramble a privacy-enabled call, your
radio must have the same Privacy Key, OR
responds. The display shows the Group Call icon,
the same Key Value and Key ID (programmed
by your dealer), as the transmitting radio (the
ID.
radio you are receiving the call from).
See Privacy on page 347 for more 4 If the Channel Free Indication feature is
information. enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment
the transmitting radio releases the PTT button,
Group Calls
Your radio must be configured as part of a group to Press the PTT button to respond to the call.
receive a call from or make a call to the group of The call ends when there is no voice activity for a
users. predetermined period. The radio returns to the
Making Group Calls screen you were on prior to initiating the call.
Follow the procedure to make Group Calls on your
radio. Making Group Calls by Using the Contacts List
Follow the procedure to make Group Calls on your
1 Do one of the following: radio by using the Contacts list.
• Select a channel with the active group alias or
1
ID. Press to access the menu.
button.
271
English
2 Making Group Calls by Using the Programmable
Press or to Contacts. Press to Number Key
select. Follow the procedure to make Group Calls on your
3
1 Long press the programmed number key to the
Press to select. predefined alias or ID when you are on the Home
screen.
4 Press the PTT button to make the call. If a number key is assigned to an entry in a
The green LED lights up. particular mode, this feature is not supported when
you long press the number key in another mode.
The green LED blinks when any user in the group A negative indicator tone sounds if the number key
responds. The display shows the Group Call icon, is not associated to an entry.
ID. 2 Hold the microphone 1 inch to 2 inches (2.5 cm to
6 If the Channel Free Indication feature is
enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment
Other Systems

indicating the channel is free for you to respond. 4 Release the PTT button to listen.
Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The green LED blinks when any user in the group
The call ends when there is no voice activity for a responds.
272 the transmitting radio releases the PTT button,
English
indicating the channel is free for you to respond. PTT button, indicating the channel is free for
Other Systems
Press the PTT button to respond to the call. you to respond. Press the PTT button to
The call ends when there is no voice activity for a respond to the call.
predetermined period. The radio returns to the • If the Transmit Interrupt Remote Dekey
screen you were on before initiating the call. feature is enabled, press the PTT button to
stop an ongoing interruptible call and free the
See Assigning Entries to Programmable Number channel for you to respond.
Keys on page 306 for more information.
Responding to Group Calls
Follow the procedure to respond to Group Calls on 2 Do one of the following:
your radio.
When you receive a Group Call: clearly into the microphone if enabled.
• The green LED blinks. •
right corner. 3 Release the PTT button to listen.
• The first text line shows the caller alias. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a
• The second text line displays the group call alias. predetermined period.
Private Calls
A Private Call is a call from an individual radio to
1 Do one of the following: another individual radio.
• If the Channel Free Indication feature is There are two ways to set up a Private Call. The first
enabled, you hear a short alert tone the type sets up the call after performing a radio
moment the transmitting radio releases the presence check, while the second type sets up the
273
English
call immediately. Only one of these types can be • Select a channel with the active subscriber
programmed to your radio by your dealer. alias or ID.
Making Private Calls
button.
Your radio must be programmed for you to initiate a
Private Call. You hear a negative indicator tone when 2 Press the PTT button to make the call.
you initiate the call when this feature is not enabled.
There are two types of Private Calls. The first type, Private Call icon, the subscriber alias, and call
where a radio presence check is performed before status.
setting up the call, while the other sets up the call
immediately. 3 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak
Only one of these call types can be programmed to clearly into the microphone if enabled.
your radio by your dealer.
A negative indicator tone sounds when you make a The green LED blinks when the target radio
Private Call via the Menu, One Touch Access responds.
button, the programmed number keys, or the Volume/
Channel Selector Knob, when this feature is not 5 If the Channel Free Indication feature is
Other Systems
enabled.
Use the Text Message or Call Alert features to
contact an individual radio. For more information, see
Text Messaging Features on page 324 or Call Alert
Operation on page 315. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a
1 Do one of the following: shows Call Ended.
274
English
Other Systems
Making Private Calls by Using the Contacts List 7 If the Channel Free Indication feature is
Follow the procedure to make Private Calls on your enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment
radio by using the Contacts list. the transmitting radio releases the PTT button,
1
Press to access the menu. Press the PTT button to respond to the call.
2 predetermined period. A tone sounds. The display
select. shows Call Ended.
3 Making Private Calls by Using the Manual Dial

Press or to the required alias or ID. Follow the procedure to make Private Calls on your
radio by using the manual dial.
Press to select.
1
4 Press the PTT button to make the call. Press to access the menu.
destination alias. 2
5 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak select.
3
6 Release the PTT button to listen. to select.
The green LED blinks when the target radio
responds. The display shows the transmitting user 4
alias or ID. Press or to Radio Number. Press
to select.
275
English
5 Do one of the following: The call ends when there is no voice activity for a
• shows Call Ended.
Enter the subscriber ID, and press to
proceed.
Making Private Calls by Using the Programmable
• Edit the previously dialed subscriber ID, and
Number Key
press to proceed. Follow the procedure to make Private Calls on your
The green LED lights up. The display shows the 1 Long press the programmed number key to the
destination alias. predefined alias or ID when you are on the Home
screen.
7 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak If a number key is assigned to an entry in a
clearly into the microphone if enabled. particular mode, this feature is not supported when
The green LED lights up when the target radio A negative indicator tone sounds if the number key
responds. The display shows the transmitting user is not associated to an entry.
alias or ID.
Other Systems

If the Channel Free Indication feature is
Private Call icon at the top right corner. The first
text line shows the caller alias. The second text
line shows the call status.
Press the PTT button to respond to the call. 3 Release the PTT button to listen.
276
English
The green LED blinks when the target radio •
Other Systems
responds. The display shows the destination alias. enabled, you hear a short alert tone the
moment the transmitting radio releases the
4 If the Channel Free Indication feature is PTT button, indicating the channel is free for
enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment you to respond. Press the PTT button to
the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, respond to the call.
indicating the channel is free for you to respond. • If the Transmit Interrupt Remote Dekey
Press the PTT button to respond to the call. feature is enabled, press the PTT button to
The call ends when there is no voice activity for a stop an ongoing interruptible call and free the
predetermined period. A tone sounds. The radio channel for you to respond.
returns to the screen you were on before initiating
the call. The green LED lights up.
See Assigning Entries to Programmable Number 2 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak
Keys on page 306 for more information. clearly into the microphone if enabled.
Responding to Private Calls 3 Release the PTT button to listen.
Follow the procedure to respond to Private Calls on
your radio.
When you receive a Private Call:
All Calls
An All Call is a call from an individual radio to every
radio on the channel. An All Call is used to make
important announcements, requiring full attention
277
English
from the user. The users on the channel cannot Note:
respond to an All Call. The radio stops receiving the All Call if you
Receiving All Calls switch to a different channel while receiving
the call. You are not able to continue with any
When you receive an All Call: menu navigation or editing until the call ends
• A tone sounds. during an All Call.
• The green LED blinks. Making All Calls
• The display shows the Group Call icon at the top Your radio must be programmed for you to make an
right corner. All Call. Follow the procedure to make All Calls on
• The first text line shows the caller alias ID. your radio.
• The second text line displays All Call.
1 Select a channel with the active All Call group
alias or ID.
The radio returns to the screen before receiving the 2 Press the PTT button to make the call.
All Call when the call ends. The green LED lights up. The display shows the
Group Call icon and All Call.
An All Call does not wait for a predetermined period
before ending. 3 Do one of the following:
Other Systems
If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, • Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak
you hear a short alert tone when the transmitting clearly into the microphone if enabled.
radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel • Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak
is free for you to use. You cannot respond to an All clearly into the microphone if enabled.
Call.
Users on the channel cannot respond to an All
Call.
278
English
Making All Calls by Using the Programmable The call ends when there is no voice activity for a
Other Systems
Number Key predetermined period. The radio returns to the
Follow the procedure to make All Calls on your radio screen you were on prior to initiating the call.
by using the programmable number key.
For a Private Call, you hear a short tone when the
1 Long press the programmed number key assigned call ends.
to the predefined alias or ID when you are on the
See Assigning Entries to Programmable Number
Home screen.
Keys on page 306 for more information.
particular mode, this feature is not supported when Selective Calls
you long press the number key in another mode. A Selective Call is a call from an individual radio to
A negative indicator tone sounds if the number key another individual radio. It is a Private Call on an
is not associated to an entry. analog system.
Making Selective Calls
2 Press the PTT button to make the call. Your radio must be programmed for you to initiate a
The green LED lights up. Selective Call. Follow the procedure to make
Selective Calls on your radio.
The green LED lights up when the target radio 1 Select a channel with the active subscriber alias or
responds. You cannot respond to an All Call at the ID.
moment.
4 If the Channel Free Indication feature is The green LED lights up. The display shows the
enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment Private Call icon, the subscriber alias, and call
the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, status.
Press the PTT button to respond to the call. 3 Do one of the following: 279
English
• Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak • The first text line shows the Private Call icon and
clearly into the microphone if enabled. the caller alias or Selective Call or Alert
• Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak with Call.
clearly into the microphone if enabled. • Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds
The green LED lights up when the target radio 1 Press the PTT button to respond to the call.
responds. The green LED lights up.
5 If the Channel Free Indication feature is 2 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak
enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment clearly into the microphone if enabled.
Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a
predetermined period. A tone sounds.The display
shows Call Ended.
6 The display shows Call Ended. Phone Calls

Other Systems
Making Phone Calls

Responding to Selective Calls Follow the procedure to make Phone Calls on your
Follow the procedure to respond to Selective Calls on radio.
your radio.
When you receive a Selective Call:
button to the predefined alias or ID.
• The green LED blinks. If the entry for the One Touch Access button is
empty, a negative indicator tone sounds. If the
280
English
access code is not preconfigured in the Contact • If the deaccess code was not preconfigured,
Other Systems
List, the display shows Access Code:. enter the deaccess code when the display
2 shows De-Access Code:, and press to

Enter the access code, and press to proceed.
proceed.
than 10 characters. • Press the programmed One Touch Access
button.
4 Release the PTT button to listen. is empty, a negative indicator tone sounds.
5 Enter extra digits with the keypad if requested by Ending Phone Call.
the call, and press to proceed. If the call ends successfully:
If the call ends while you are entering the extra
• A tone sounds.
digits requested by the call, your radio returns to
the screen you were on before initiating the call. • The display shows Call Ended.
The DTMF Tone sounds. Your radio returns to the If the call fails to end, the radio returns to the
previous screen. Phone Call screen. Repeat the last two steps or
wait for the telephone user to end the call.
6
281
English
Making Phone Calls by Using the Contacts List 4
Follow the procedure to make Phone Calls on your Press or to Call Phone. Press
radio by using the Contacts list. to select.
The display shows Access Code: if the access
1 code was not preconfigured.
5
2 Enter the access code, and press to
Press or to Contacts. Press to proceed.
select.
The display shows the entries in alphabetical The access or deaccess code cannot be more
order. than 10 characters.
The first text line shows Calling. The second text
3 line shows the subscriber alias or ID, and the
Phone Call icon.
Press to select. If the call is successful:
When you press the PTT button while on the
Phone Contacts screen: • The DTMF Tone sounds.
• You hear the dialing tone of the telephone
• The first line of the display shows Phone user.
Other Systems
Number:. • The first text line shows the subscriber alias or

• The second line of the display shows a blinking ID, and the RSSI icon.
cursor. • The second text line shows Phone Call, and
If the selected entry is empty: the Phone Call icon.
• A negative indicator tone sounds. If the call is unsuccessful:
• The display shows Phone Call Invalid #. • A tone sounds.
282
English
• The radio returns to the previous screen. The
Other Systems
The display shows Phone Call Failed and
then, Access Code:. DTMF Tone sounds and the display shows
• Your radio returns to the screen you were on Ending Phone Call.
prior to initiating the call if the access code has If the call ends successfully:
been preconfigured in the Contacts list.
• A tone sounds.
6 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. • The display shows Call Ended.
The RSSI icon disappears.
7 Release the PTT button to listen. Phone Call screen. Repeat Step 9 and Step 10, or
wait for the telephone user to end the call. When
8 Enter extra digits with the keypad if requested by you press the PTT button while in the Phone
Contacts screen, as tone sounds and the display
the call, and press to proceed. shows Press OK to Place Phone Call.
If the call ends while you are entering the extra
digits requested by the call, your radio returns to When the telephone user ends the call, a tone
the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. sounds and the display shows Phone Call
Ended.
The DTMF Tone sounds. Your radio returns to the
previous screen. If the call ends while you are entering the extra
digits requested by the Phone Call, your radio
9 returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating
the call.
10 If the deaccess code was not preconfigured, enter
Note:
the deaccess code when the display shows De-
Access Code:, and press to proceed. During the channel access, press to
dismiss the call attempt and a tone sounds.
283
English
During the call, when you press One Touch 4
Access button with the deaccess code Press or to Phone Number. Press
preconfigured or enter the deaccess code as
to select.
the input for extra digits, your radio attempts to
The display shows Number: and a blinking cursor.
end the call.
During channel access and access/ deaccess 5
Enter the telephone number, and press to
code or extra digits transmission, you radio
proceed.
responds to On/Off button, Volume Knob,
The display shows Access Code: and a blinking
and Channel Rocker only. A tone sounds for
cursor if the access code was not preconfigured.
every invalid input.
Making Phone Calls by Using the Manual Dial 6
Follow the procedure to make Phone Calls on your proceed.
1 than 10 characters.
2 Phone Call icon at the top right corner. The first
Other Systems
select. text line shows the subscriber alias. The second

text line shows the call status.
3 If the call is successful:
to select. • The DTMF Tone sounds.
• You hear the dialing tone of the telephone
user.
284 • The first text line shows the subscriber alias.
English
• The display continues to show the Phone Call The DTMF Tone sounds and the display shows
Other Systems
icon at the top right corner. Ending Phone Call.
If the call is unsuccessful: If the call ends successfully:
• A tone sounds. • A tone sounds.
• The display shows Phone Call Failed and • The display shows Call Ended.
then, Access Code:.
• Your radio returns to the screen you were on Phone Call screen. Repeat Step 11 and Step 12,
before initiating the call if the access code has or wait for the telephone user to end the call.
been preconfigured in the Contacts list.
Note:
8
Press to end the call. When you press PTT button while in the
Phone Contacts screen, a tone sounds and
9 Do one of the following: the display shows Press OK to Place
• If the deaccess code was not preconfigured, Phone Call.
enter the deaccess code when the display When the telephone user ends the call, a
tone sounds and the display shows Call
shows De-Access Code:, and press to
Ended.
proceed.
If the call ends while you are entering the
extra digits requested by the Phone Call,
• Press the programmed One Touch Access your radio returns to the screen you were
button. on before initiating the call.
is empty, a negative indicator tone sounds. During the channel access, press to
dismiss the call attempt and a tone sounds. 285
English
During the call, when you press One 3
Touch Access button with the deaccess Press or to the required subscriber
code preconfigured or enter the deaccess alias or ID. The first line of the display shows
code as the input for extra digits, your radio Phone Number:. The second line of the display
attempts to end the call. shows a blinking cursor. Use the keypad to enter a
telephone number.
During channel access and access/
deaccess code or extra digits transmission, 4
you radio responds to On/Off button, Press to select. If the entry selected is
Volume Knob, and Channel Rocker only. empty, a negative indicator tone sounds and the
A tone sounds for every invalid input. display shows Phone Call Invalid #.
Making Group, Private, Phone or All Calls by 5

Using the Alias Search
Follow the procedure to make any calls by using the to select. If the access code was not
alias search. preconfigured in the Contacts list, the first line of
the display shows Access Code:. The second line
1 of the display shows a blinking cursor. Enter the
Other Systems

Press or to Contacts. Press to You hear the dialing tone of the telephone user.
select. The first line of the display shows the subscriber
The display shows the entries in alphabetical alias or ID, and the RSSI icon. The second line of
order. the display shows Phone Call and the Phone
Call icon. If unsuccessful, a tone sounds and the
display shows Phone Call Failed. Your radio
286
English
Other Systems
of the display shows De-Access Code:. The
access code was preconfigured in the Contacts second line of the display shows a blinking cursor.
list, the radio returns to the screen you were on
prior to initiating the call. Enter the deaccess code and press to
proceed. The radio returns to the previous screen.
6 Press the PTT button to talk and release it to The DTMF tone sounds and the display shows
Access button is empty, a negative indicator During the channel access, press to
tone sounds. dismiss the call attempt and a tone sounds
8 button or to exit alias search. Press

Press to end the call. If deaccess code was
button or to exit alias search. During the
not preconfigured in the Contacts list, the first line 287
English
call, when you press One Touch Access You can turn off the DTMF tone by disabling all
button with the deaccess code preconfigured radio tones and alerts. See Turning Radio Tones/
or enter the deaccess code as the input for Alerts On or Off on page 131.
extra digits, your radio attempts to end the
call. During channel access and access/ Responding to Phone Calls as Group Calls
deaccess code or extra digits transmission, Follow the procedure to respond to Phone Calls as
you radio responds to On/Off button, Volume Group Calls on your radio.
Knob, and Channel Rocker only. A tone
When you receive a Phone Call as a Group Call:
sounds for every invalid input.
Dual Tone Multi Frequency
right corner.
The Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF) feature
• The display shows the group alias and Phone
allows the radio to operate in a radio system with an
interface to the telephone systems. Call.
You can turn off the DTMF tone by disabling all radio If Phone Call capability is not enabled on your radio,
tones and alerts. See Turning Radio Tones/Alerts On the first line of the display shows Unavailable and
or Off on page 131 for more information. your radio mutes the call. Your radio returns to the
previous screen when the call ends.
Initiating DTMF Calls
Other Systems
Follow the procedure to initiate DTMF Calls on your 1 Press the PTT button to respond to the call.
radio.
1 Press and hold the PTT button to initiate a Dual
Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF) call. 3
2 The display shows Ending Phone Call.
Enter the desired number, or .
288
English
• A tone sounds.
Other Systems
3
• The display shows Call Ended. Press to end the call.
The display shows Ending Phone Call.
Phone Call screen. Repeat this step or wait for the If the call ends successfully:
telephone user to end the call. • A tone sounds.
• The display shows All Call and Call Ended.
Responding to Phone Calls as All Calls
When you receive a Phone Call as an All Call, you If the call fails to end, the radio returns to the
can respond to or end the call, only if an All Call type Phone Call screen. Repeat Step 3 or wait for the
is assigned to the channel. Follow the procedure to telephone user to end the call.
respond to Phone Calls as All Calls on your radio.
Responding to Phone Calls as Private Calls
When you receive a Phone Call as an All Call: Follow the procedure to respond to Phone Calls as
• The display shows the Phone Call icon at the top Private Calls on your radio.
right corner. When you receive a Phone Call as a Private Call:
• The display shows All Call and Phone Call.
If Phone Call capability is not enabled on your radio, right corner.
the first line of the display shows Unavailable and • The display shows the caller alias or Phone Call.
your radio mutes the call.
If Phone Call capability is not enabled on your radio,
Your radio returns to the previous screen when the the first line of the display shows Unavailable and
call ends. your radio mutes the call. Your radio returns to the
1 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. previous screen when the call ends.

289
English
2 Release the PTT button to listen. 2 Wait for acknowledgment.
If successful:
3
Press to end the call. • A positive indicator tone sounds.
The display shows Ending Phone Call. • The display shows Remote Dekey Success.
If the call ends successfully: If unsuccessful:
• A tone sounds. • A negative indicator tone sounds.
• The display shows Call Ended. • The display shows Remote Dekey Failed.
Note:
Phone Call screen. Repeat this step or wait for the
telephone user to end the call.
Stopping Radio Calls Talkaround
This feature allows you to stop an ongoing Group or This feature allows you to continue communication
Private Call to free the channel for transmission. For when your repeater is not operating, or when your
example, when a radio experiences a “stuck radio is out of range from the repeater but within
microphone” condition where the PTT button is talking range of other radios.
Other Systems
inadvertently pressed by the user. Your radio must be

The talkaround setting is retained even after powering
programmed to allow you to use this feature. Follow
down.
the procedure to stop calls on your radio.
Note:
1 Press the programmed Transmit Interrupt This feature is not applicable in Capacity
Remote Dekey button. Plus--Single-Site, Capacity Plus--Multi-Site,
The display shows Remote Dekey. and Citizens Band channels that are in the
290 same frequency.
English
Toggling Between Repeater and Talkaround
Other Systems
Modes
Advanced Features
Follow the procedure to toggle between Repeater and This chapter explains the operations of the features
Talkaround modes on your radio. available in your radio.
1 Do one of the following: Note:
Your dealer or system administrator may have
• Press the programmed Repeater/Talkaround customized your radio for your specific needs.
button. Skip the following steps. Check with your dealer or system
• administrator for more information.
Home Channel Reminder
2
Press or to Utilities. Press to This feature provides a reminder when the radio is
select. not set to the home channel for a period of time.
3 If this feature is enabled via the CPS, when your radio

Press or to Radio Settings. Press is not set to the home channel for a period of time,
the following occurs periodically:
to select.
• The Home Channel Reminder tone and
4 announcement sound.
Press or to Talkaround. Press
to select. • The first line of the display shows Non.
If enabled appears besides Enabled. If • The second line shows Home Channel.
disabled, disappears beside Enabled.
screen.
291
English
Muting the Home Channel Reminder 3
When the Home Channel Reminder occurs, you can Press or to Radio Settings. Press
temporarily mute the reminder.
to select.
Press the Silence Home Channel Reminder
4
programmable button. Press or to Home Channel. Press
The first line of the display shows HCR and the
second line shows Silenced. to select.
Setting New Home Channels 5

Press or to the desired new home
When the Home Channel Reminder occurs, you can
set a new home channel. channel alias. Press to select.
The display shows beside the selected home
1 Do one of the following: channel alias.
• Press the Reset Home Channel
programmable button to set the current Radio Check
channel as the new Home Channel. Skip the This feature allows you to determine if another radio
following steps. is active in a system without disturbing the radio user.
No audible or visual notification is shown on the
Other Systems
The first line of the display shows the channel

target radio. This feature is only applicable for
alias and the second line shows New Home Ch.
•
2
select.
292
English
subscriber aliases or IDs. Your radio must be • A negative indicator tone sounds.
Other Systems
programmed to allow you to use this feature. • The display shows a negative mini notice.
Sending Radio Checks The radio returns to the subscriber alias or ID screen.
Follow the procedure to send radio checks on your
radio. Sending Radio Checks by Using the Manual Dial
1 Press the programmed Radio Check button. Follow the procedure to send radio checks on your
2
1
Press to select.
The display shows a transitional mini notice, 2
indicating the request is in progress. The green Press or to Contacts. Press to
LED lights up. select.
Wait for acknowledgment. 3

to select.
If you press when the radio is waiting for
acknowledgment, a tone sounds, the radio terminates 4
all retries, and exits Radio Check mode. Press or to Radio Number. Press
If successful: to select.
• A positive indicator tone sounds. 5 Do one of the following:
• Enter the subscriber alias or ID, and press
If unsuccessful:
to proceed.
293
English
• Remote Monitor
proceed. This feature is used to turn on the microphone of a
target radio with a subscriber alias or ID. You can use
6 this feature to remotely monitor any audible activity
Press or to Radio Check. Press surrounding the target radio.
to select.
The display shows a transitional mini notice, Both your radio and the target radio must be
indicating the request is in progress. The green programmed to allow you to use this feature.
LED lights up. If initiated, the green LED blinks once on the target
radio. This feature automatically stops after a
programmed duration or when there is any user
If you press when the radio is waiting for operation on the target radio.
acknowledgement, a tone sounds, the radio Initiating Remote Monitors
terminates all retries, and exits Radio Check Follow the procedure to initiate Remote Monitor on
mode. your radio.
If successful:
1 Press the programmed Remote Monitor button.
Other Systems
• The display shows a positive mini notice. 2

If unsuccessful:
Press to select.
• A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a transitional mini notice,
• The display shows a negative mini notice. indicating the request is in progress. The green
LED lights up.
The radio returns to the subscriber alias or ID
screen. 3 Wait for acknowledgment.
294
English
If successful:
Other Systems
3
• The display shows a positive mini notice. Press to select.
4
playing for a programmed duration, and the Press or to Remote Mon.. Press
display shows Rem. Monitor. Once the timer to select.
expires, an alert tone sounds, and the LED The display shows a transitional mini notice,
turns off. indicating the request is in progress. The green
If unsuccessful: LED lights up.
• A negative indicator tone sounds. 5 Wait for acknowledgment.

• The display shows a negative mini notice. If successful:
Initiating Remote Monitors by Using the Contacts
List • The display shows a positive mini notice.
Follow the procedure to initiate Remote Monitor on • The audio from the monitored radio starts
your radio by using the Contacts list. playing for a programmed duration, and the
turns off.
2 If unsuccessful:
select. • A negative indicator tone sounds.
295
English
Initiating Remote Monitors by Using the Manual 6
Dial Press or to Remote Mon.. Press
Follow the procedure to initiate Remote Monitor on to select.
your radio by using the manual dial. The display shows a transitional mini notice,
1 LED lights up.
2
Press or to Contacts. Press to If successful:
select. • A positive indicator tone sounds.
Press or to Manual Dial. Press • The audio from the monitored radio starts
to select. playing for a programmed duration, and the
turns off.
to select.
If unsuccessful:
Other Systems
5 Do one of the following: • A negative indicator tone sounds.

• Enter the subscriber alias or ID, and press • The display shows a negative mini notice.
to proceed.
•
proceed.
296
English
Your radio can support up to 250 scan lists, with a
Other Systems
Stopping Remote Monitors
Follow the procedure to stop Remote Monitor on your maximum of 16 members in a list. Each scan list
radio. supports a mixture of both analog and digital entries.
1 Press the programmed Transmit Interrupt You can add, delete, or prioritize channels by editing
Remote Dekey button. a scan list.
The display shows a transitional mini notice, You can attach a new scan list to your radio via Front
indicating the request is in progress. The green Panel Programming. See Front Panel Configuration
LED lights up. on page 125 for more information.
2 Wait for acknowledgment. The Priority icon appears on the left of the member
If successful: alias, if set, to indicate whether the member is on a
Priority 1 or Priority 2 channel list. You cannot have
• A positive indicator tone sounds. multiple Priority 1 or Priority 2 channels in a scan list.
• The display shows a positive mini notice. There is no Priority icon if priority is set to None.
If unsuccessful: Note:
• A negative indicator tone sounds. This feature is not applicable in Capacity Plus.
• The display shows a negative mini notice. Viewing Entries in the Scan List
Follow the procedure to view the entries in the Scan
Scan Lists list on your radio.
Scan lists are created and assigned to individual
channels or groups. Your radio scans for voice 1
activity by cycling through the channel or group
sequence specified in the scan list for the current 2
channel or group. Press or to Scan. Press to
select.
297
English
3 The alias search is case-insensitive. If there are
Press or to Scan List. Press to two or more entries with the same name, the
select. display shows the entry listed first in the list.
The first text line shows the characters you
4
Press or to view each member on the entered. The following text lines show the
list. shortlisted search results.
Viewing Entries in the Scan List by Using the Adding New Entries to the Scan List
Alias Search Follow the procedure to add new entries to the Scan
Follow the procedure to view entries in the Scan list list on your radio.
on your radio by using the alias search.
1
1
2
Press or to Scan. Press to
2
Press or to Scan. Press to select.
select.
3
Press or to Scan List. Press to
3
Other Systems
Press or to Scan List. Press to select.

select.
4
Press or to Add Member. Press
to select.

alias.
298
English
Other Systems
5 1
Press or to the required alias or ID. Press to access the menu.
Press to select. 2
6 select.
Press or to the required priority level.
Press to select. 3
The display shows a positive mini notice and then, select.
Add Another?.
4
7 Do one of the following: Press or to Add Member. Press
to select.
•
Press or to Yes to add another
entry. Press to select. Repeat Step 5 and The display shows a blinking cursor.
Step 6.
• 6 Enter the rest of the characters of the required
Press or to No to save the current alias.
list. Press to select. The alias search is case-insensitive. If there are
two or more entries with the same name, the
Adding New Entries to the Scan List by Using the display shows the entry listed first in the list.
Alias Search The first text line shows the characters you
Follow the procedure to add new entries to the Scan entered. The following text lines show the
list on your radio by using the alias search. shortlisted search results.
299
English
7 2
Press to select. Press or to Scan. Press to
select.
8
Press or to the required priority level. 3
The display shows a positive mini notice and then,
Add Another?. 4
Press to select.
•
Press or to Yes to add another 5
entry. Press to select. Repeat Step 5 to select.
Step 8. The display shows Delete Entry?.
•
Press or to No to save the current
list. Press to select. •
Press or to Yes to delete the entry.
Other Systems
Deleting Entries from the Scan List

Follow the procedure to delete entries on your radio Press to select.
from the Scan list. The display shows a positive mini notice.
1 •
Press to access the menu. Press or to No to return to the
previous screen. Press to select.
300
English
Other Systems
7 Repeat Step 4 to Step 6 to delete other entries. 6
Press or to the required priority level.
8 Press to select.
Long press to return to the Home screen
after deleting all required aliases or IDs. The display shows a positive mini notice before
returning to the previous screen. The Priority icon
Setting Priority for Entries in the Scan List appears on the left of the member alias.
Follow the procedure to set priorities for entries in the
Scan list on your radio. Scan
Your radio cycles through the programmed scan list
1
Press to access the menu. for the current channel looking for voice activity when
you start a scan.
2
Press or to Scan. Press to Note:
select. This feature is not applicable in Capacity Plus.
3 The LED blinks yellow and the scan icon appears on

Press or to Scan List. Press to the status bar.
select.
During a dual-mode scan, if you are on a digital
4 channel, and your radio locks onto an analog
Press or to the required alias or ID. channel, it automatically switches from digital mode to
analog mode for the duration of the call which is also
Press to select.
true for the reverse.
5 There are two ways of initiating scan:
Press or to Edit Priority. Press
to select. Main Channel Your radio scans all the channels
Scan (Manual) or groups in your scan list. On
301
English
entering scan, your radio may, 4
depending on the settings, Press or to the required scan state
automatically start on the last and press to select.
scanned active channel or group,
or on the channel where scan was If scan is enabled:
initiated.
• The display shows Scan On and Scan icon.
Auto Scan Your radio automatically starts • The yellow LED blinks.
(Automatic) scanning when you select a
channel or group that has Auto If scan is disabled:
Scan enabled. • The display shows Scan Off.
Turning Scan On or Off • The Scan icon disappears.
Follow the procedure to turn scan on or off on your • The LED turns off.
radio. Responding to Transmissions During Scanning
During scanning, your radio stops on a channel or
1
Press to access the menu. group where activity is detected. The radio stays on
that channel for a programmed duration known as
2 hang time. Follow the procedure to respond to
Other Systems

transmissions during scanning on your radio.
select.
3
Press or to Scan State. Press enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment
to select. the transmitting radio releases the PTT button,
Press the PTT button during hang time.
302
English
Other Systems
2 Release the PTT button to listen. Do one of the following:
The radio returns to scanning other channels or • Turn the radio off and then power it on again.
groups if you do not respond within the hang time. • Stop and restart a scan via the programmed
Scan button or menu.
Deleting Nuisance Channels
If a channel continually generates unwanted calls or • Change the channel using the Channel Up/
noise, termed as Nuisance Channel, you can Down button.
temporarily remove the unwanted channel from the
scan list. This capability does not apply to the channel Vote Scan
designated as the Selected Channel. Follow the Vote Scan provides you with wide area coverage in
procedure to delete nuisance channels on your radio. areas where there are multiple base stations
transmitting identical information on different analog
1 When your radio locks on to an unwanted or channels.
nuisance channel, press the programmed
Nuisance Channel Delete button until you hear a Your radio scans analog channels of multiple base
tone. stations and performs a voting process to select the
strongest received signal. Once that is established,
A nuisance channel can only be deleted by using
your radio unmutes to transmissions from that base
the programmed Nuisance Channel Delete
station.
button. This feature is not accessible through the
menu. During a vote scan, the yellow LED blinks and the
display shows the Vote Scan icon.
2 Release the Nuisance Channel Delete button.
The nuisance channel is deleted. Follow the same procedures as Responding to
Transmissions During Scanning on page 302 to
Restoring Nuisance Channels respond to a transmission during a vote scan.
Follow the procedure to restore nuisance channels on
your radio. 303
English
Contacts Settings • Call Type
Contacts provides address book capabilities on your • Call Alias
radio. Each entry corresponds to an alias or ID that • Call ID
you use to initiate a call. The entries are Note:
alphabetically sorted.
If the Privacy feature is enabled on a channel,
Each entry, depending on context, associates with you can make privacy-enabled Group Calls,
the different call types: Group Call, Private Call, All Private Calls, and All Calls on that channel.
Call, PC Call, or Dispatch Call. Only target radios with the same Privacy Key,
PC Call and Dispatch Call are data-related. They are or the same Key Value and Key ID as your
only available with the applications. Refer to the data radio will be able to decrypt the transmission.
applications documentation for further details. Making Group Calls by Using the Contacts List
Additionally, Contacts menu allows you to assign Follow the procedure to make Group Calls on your
each entry to a programmable number key or more radio by using the Contacts list.
on a keypad microphone. If an entry is assigned to a
1
number key, your radio can perform a quick dial on Press to access the menu.
the entry.
2
Other Systems
Note: Press or to Contacts. Press to

You see a checkmark before each number key select.
that is assigned to an entry. If the checkmark
is before Empty, you have not assign a 3
number key to the entry.
Each entry within Contacts displays the following Press to select.
information:
304
English
Other Systems
3
The green LED blinks when any user in the group Press to select.
responds. The display shows the Group Call icon,
ID.
destination alias.
6 If the Channel Free Indication feature is 5 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak
enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment clearly into the microphone if enabled.
indicating the channel is free for you to respond. 6 Release the PTT button to listen.
Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The green LED blinks when the target radio
The call ends when there is no voice activity for a responds. The display shows the transmitting user
predetermined period. alias or ID.
Making Private Calls by Using the Contacts List 7 If the Channel Free Indication feature is
Follow the procedure to make Private Calls on your enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment
radio by using the Contacts list. the transmitting radio releases the PTT button,
2 predetermined period. A tone sounds. The display
Press or to Contacts. Press to shows Call Ended.
select.
305
English
Assigning Entries to Programmable Number Keys Already Assigned and then, the first text line
shows Overwrite?. Do one of the following:
Follow the procedure to assign entries to
programmable number keys on your radio. Press or to Yes. Press to
select.
1
Press to access the menu. The radio sounds a positive indicator tone and
the display shows Contact Saved and a
2 positive mini notice.
select.
3 previous step.
Each entry can be associated to different number
Press to select. keys. You see a before each number key that is
assigned to an entry. If the is before Empty, that
4
Press or to Program Key. Press number key is not assigned.
to select. If a number key is assigned to an entry in a
particular mode, this feature is not supported when
Other Systems

• If the desired number key has not been
assigned to an entry, press or to menu.
the desired number key. Press to select.

• If the desired number key has been assigned
to an entry, the display shows The Key is
306
English
Removing Associations Between Entries and
Other Systems
6
Programmable Number Keys Press or to Yes. Press to select.
Follow the procedure to remove the associations Note:
between entries and programmable number keys on When an entry is deleted, the association
your radio. between the entry and its programmed
number key(s) is removed.
A positive indicator tone sounds. The display
• Long press the programmed number key to the
shows Contact Saved.
required alias or ID. Proceed to Step 4.
• The screen automatically returns to the previous
Press to access the menu. menu.
2 Adding New Contacts
select. Follow the procedure to add new contacts on your
radio.
3
Press or to the required alias or ID. 1
Press to select.
2
4 Press or to Contacts. Press to
Press or to Program Key. Press select.
to select.
3
5 Press or to New Contact. Press
Press or to Empty. Press to to select.
select.
The first text line shows Clear from all keys.
307
English
4 3
Press or to select contact type Radio Press or to the required alias or ID.
Contact or Phone Contact. Press to select. Press to select.
5 Enter the contact number with the keypad, and 4

Press or to Set as Default. Press
press to proceed.
to select.
6 Enter the contact name with the keypad, and A positive indicator tone sounds. The display
shows a positive mini notice. The display shows
press to proceed. beside the selected default alias or ID.
7 Call Indicator Settings
Press or to the required ringer type.
Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Call
Press to select. Alerts
A positive indicator tone sounds. The display Follow the procedure to activate or deactivate call
shows a positive mini notice. ringers for Call Alerts on your radio.
Setting Default Contact 1
Other Systems
Follow the procedure to set the default contact on Press to access the menu.
your radio.
2
1
Press to access the menu. select.
2
select.
308
English
Other Systems
3 1
Press or to Radio Settings. Press Press to access the menu.
to select. 2
4 select.
to select. 3
5
Press or to Call Ringers. Press to select.
to select. 4
6
Press or to Call Alert. Press to select.
to select.
5
7 Press or to Call Ringers. Press
to select.
to select. The display shows beside the
selected tone. 6
Press or to Private Call. Press
Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Private to select.
Calls
Follow the procedure to activate or deactivate call 7
ringers for Private Calls on your radio.
to select.
309
English
If enabled appears besides Enabled. If 6
disabled, disappears beside Enabled. Press or to Selective Call. Press
Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for to select.

The display shows and the current tone.
Selective Calls
Follow the procedure to activate or deactivate call 7
ringers for Selective Calls on your radio. Press or to the required tone. Press
1 to select. The display shows beside the

Press to access the menu. selected tone.
2 Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Text
select. Messages
3 ringers for text messages on your radio.
1
4 2
Other Systems
Press or to Tones/Alerts. Press Press or to Utilities. Press to

select.
to select.
3
to select.
to select.
310
English
Other Systems
4 2
Press or to Tones/Alerts. Press Press or to Utilities. Press to
select.
to select.
3
to select.
to select.
4
6 Press or to Tones/Alert. Press
Press or to Text Message. Press to select.
to select.
The display shows and the current tone. 5
7 to select.
to select. The display shows beside the 6
Press or to Telemetry. Press to
selected tone. select.
The current tone is indicated by a
Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for
Telemetry Status with Text Assigning Ring Styles
Follow the procedure to activate or deactivate call The radio can be programmed to sound one of ten
ringers for telemetry status with text on your radio. predefined ringing tones when receiving a Call Alert
or a Text Message from a particular contact. The
1
Press to access the menu. radio sounds out each ring style as you navigate
311
English
through the list. Follow the procedure to assign ring Escalating Alarm Tone Volume
styles on your radio. The radio can be programmed to continually alert,
when a radio call remains unanswered. This is done
1 by automatically increasing the alarm tone volume
over time. This feature is known as Escalert.
2 Call Log Features
select. Your radio keeps track of all recent outgoing,
The entries are alphabetically sorted. answered, and missed Private Calls. The call log
feature is used to view and manage recent calls.
3
Press or to the required alias or ID. Missed Call Alerts may be included in the call logs,
depending on the system configuration on your radio.
Press to select.
You can perform the following tasks in each of your
4 call lists:
• Store Alias or ID to Contacts
select.
• Delete Call
5 • Delete All Calls
Press or to Edit Ringtone. Press
Other Systems
• View Details
to select. Viewing Recent Calls
Follow the procedure to view recent calls on your
6
Press or to the required tone. Press radio.
to select. 1
A appears beside the selected tone.
312
English
Other Systems
2 3
Press or to Call Log. Press to Press or to the required list. Press
select.
to select.
3 If the list is empty:
Press or to the preferred list. Press
• A tone sounds.
to select. • The display shows List Empty.
The options are Missed, Answered, and Outgoing
lists. 4
The display shows the most recent entry.
Press to select.
4
Press or to view the list. 5
Press or to Delete Entry?. Press
You can start a Private Call with the alias or ID the
display is currently showing by pressing the PTT to select.
button.
Deleting Calls from the Call List
•
Follow the procedure to delete calls on your radio Press to select Yes to delete the entry.
from the Call list.
The display shows Entry Deleted.
1 •
Press to access the menu. Press or to No. Press to
select.
2
Press or to Call Log. Press to The radio returns to the previous screen.
select.
313
English
Viewing Details from the Call List 1
Follow the procedure to view details on your radio Press to access the menu.
from the Call list.
2
1
2 3
Press or to Call Log. Press to Press or to the required list. Press
select.
to select.
3
Press or to the required list. Press 4
to select.
Press to select.
4
Press or to the required alias or ID. 5
Press or to Store. Press to
5
Other Systems
Press or to View Details. Press 6 Enter the rest of the characters of the required
to select. alias. Press to select.
The display shows the details.
You can store an ID without an alias.
Storing Aliases or IDs from the Call List The display shows a positive mini notice.
Follow the procedure to store aliases or IDs on your
radio from the Call list.
314
English
Call Alert Operation
Other Systems
1
Call Alert paging enables you to alert a specific radio
user to call you back when they are able to do so. 2
This feature is applicable for subscriber aliases or IDs select.
only and is accessible through the menu via
Contacts, manual dial, or a programmed One Touch 3
Access button. Press or to the required alias or ID.
Press to select.
Making Call Alerts
Follow the procedure to make Call Alerts on your 4
radio. Press or to Call Alert. Press
to select.
1 Press the programmed One Touch Access The display shows Call Alert and the
button. subscriber alias or ID. The green LED lights up.
The display shows Call Alert and the
subscriber alias or ID. The green LED lights up. 5 Wait for acknowledgment.
If the Call Alert acknowledgment is received, the
2 Wait for acknowledgment. display shows a positive mini notice.
display shows a positive mini notice. If the Call Alert acknowledgment is not received,
If the Call Alert acknowledgment is not received,
Making Call Alerts by Using the Contacts List

Follow the procedure to make Call Alerts on your
radio by using the Contacts list. 315
English
Making Call Alerts by Using the Manual Dial If the Call Alert acknowledgment is not received,
Follow the procedure to make Call Alerts on your the display shows a negative mini notice.
Responding to Call Alerts
1 Follow the procedure to respond to Call Alerts on
your radio.
2 When you receive a Call Alert:
select. • A repetitive tone sounds.
3
Press or to Manual Dial. Press • The display shows the notification list listing a Call
to select. Alert with the alias or ID of the calling radio.
Depending on the configuration by your dealer or
4 system administrator, you can respond to a Call
Enter the subscriber ID and press to Alert by doing one of the following:
proceed.
• Press the PTT button and respond with a
5 Private Call directly to the caller.
Other Systems
Press or to Call Alert. Press • Press the PTT button to continue normal
to select. talkgroup communication.
The display shows Call Alert and the
subscriber alias or ID. The green LED lights up. The Call Alert is moved to the Missed Call
6 Wait for acknowledgment. to the caller from the Missed Called log.
display shows a positive mini notice. See Notification List on page 123 and Call Log
316 Features on page 86 for more information.
English
Emergency Operation then short press the Emergency button is
Other Systems
assigned to exit the Emergency mode.
An Emergency Alarm is used to indicate a critical
situation. You are able to initiate an Emergency at Your radio supports three Emergency Alarms:
any time even when there is activity on the current
• Emergency Alarm
channel.
• Emergency Alarm with Call
Your dealer can set the duration of a button press for • Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow
the programmed Emergency button, except for long
press, which is similar with all other buttons: In addition, each alarm has the following types:
Short Press Duration between 0.05 seconds and Regular Radio transmits an alarm signal and
0.75 seconds. shows audio and/or visual indicators.
Long Press Duration between 1.00 second and Silent Radio transmits an alarm signal without
3.75 seconds. any audio or visual indicators. Radio
receives calls without any sound
The Emergency button is assigned with the through the speaker, until the
Emergency On/Off feature. Check with your dealer for programmed hot mic transmission
the assigned operation of the Emergency button. period is over and/or you press the PTT
Note: button.
If short press the Emergency button is Silent Radio transmits an alarm signal without
assigned to turn on the Emergency mode, with any audio or visual indicators, but allow
then long press the Emergency button is Voice incoming calls to sound through the
assigned to exit the Emergency mode. speaker.
If long press the Emergency button is

assigned to turn on the Emergency mode,
317
English
Receiving Emergency Alarms 4
Follow the procedure to receive Emergency Alarms Press to access the menu.
on your radio.
5 Select Alarm List to revisit the Alarm list.
When you receive an Emergency Alarm:
6 The tone sounds and the LED blinks red until you
• A tone sounds.
exit the Emergency mode. However, the tone can
be silenced. Do one of the following:
• The display shows the Emergency icon, and the
Emergency caller alias or if there is more than one • Press the PTT button to call the group of radios
alarm, all emergency caller aliases are displayed which received the Emergency Alarm.
in an Alarm List. • Press any programmable button.
1 Do one of the following: • Exit Emergency mode. See Exiting Emergency
Mode After Receiving the Emergency Alarm on
•
If only one alarm, press to view more page 319.
details.
• Responding to Emergency Alarms
If more than one alarm, press or to Follow the procedure to respond to Emergency
Alarms on your radio.
Other Systems
the required alias, and press to view

more details. 1 Make sure the display shows the Alarm List. Press
2 or to the required alias or ID.

Press to view the action options.
3
Press and select Yes to exit the Alarm list. enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment
318
English
indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Exiting Emergency Mode After Receiving the
Other Systems
Press the PTT button to transmit non-emergency Emergency Alarm
voice to the same group the Emergency Alarm Follow the procedure to exit Emergency mode after
targeted. receiving Emergency alarm.
The green LED lights up. Your radio remains in
the Emergency mode. Delete the alarm items.
3 Do one of the following: Sending Emergency Alarms

This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm,
• Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak a non-voice signal, which triggers an alert indication
clearly into the microphone if enabled. on a group of radios. Follow the procedure to send
• Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak Emergency Alarms on your radio.
Your radio does not display any audio or visual
4 Release the PTT button to listen. indicators during Emergency mode when it is set to
When the emergency initiating radio responds: Silent.
• The green LED blinks. 1 Press the programmed Emergency On button.

• The display shows the Group Call icon and ID, You see one of these results:
transmitting radio ID, and the Alarm list. • The display shows Tx Alarms and the
destination alias.
Emergency voice can only be transmitted by the
emergency initiating radio. All other radios, including • The display shows Tx Telegram and the
the emergency receiving radio, transmit non- destination alias.
emergency voice. The green LED lights up. The Emergency icon
appears.
319
English
Note: group of radios can communicate over a programmed
If programmed, the Emergency Search Emergency channel.
tone sounds. This tone is muted when the
Follow the procedure to send Emergency Alarms with
radio transmits or receives voice, and stops
call on your radio.
when the radio exits Emergency mode.
The Emergency Search tone can be 1 Press the programmed Emergency On button or
programmed via the CPS. the Emergency footswitch. The display shows
Sending Alarm, which alternates with your radio
2 Wait for acknowledgment. ID.
If successful: You see one of these results:
• The Emergency tone sounds.
• The display shows Tx Telegram and the
• The green LED blinks. destination alias.
• The display shows Alarm Sent.
If unsuccessful after all retries have been appears.
exhausted:
Note:
• A tone sounds. If programmed, the Emergency Search
• The display shows Alarm Failed. tone sounds. This tone is muted when the
Other Systems
radio transmits or receives voice, and stops

The radio exits the Emergency Alarm mode and
when the radio exits Emergency mode.
returns to the Home screen.
The Emergency Search tone can be
Sending Emergency Alarms with Call programmed by your dealer or system
This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm administrator.
with Call to a group of radios. Upon
acknowledgement by a radio within the group, the
If successful:
320
English
• The Emergency tone sounds.
Other Systems
7 Press the Emergency Off button to exit the
• The green LED blinks. Emergency mode.
• The display shows Alarm Sent. The radio returns to the Home screen.
• Your radio enters the Emergency call mode
when the display shows Emergency and the Sending Emergency Alarms with Voice to Follow
destination group alias.
This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm
3 Press the PTT button to make the call. with Voice to Follow to a group of radios. Your radio
The green LED lights up. The display shows the microphone is automatically activated, allowing you to
Group Call icon. communicate with the group of radios without
pressing the PTT button. This activated microphone
4 Do one of the following: state is also known as hot mic.
• Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak Note:
clearly into the microphone if enabled. Your radio cannot detect a non-IMPRES
• Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak microphone that is attached to the rear
clearly into the microphone if enabled. accessory connector.
When no microphone is detected at the
specified programmed connector, your radio
The display shows the caller and group aliases.
checks the alternative connector. Here, your
6 radio gives priority to the detected
microphone.
the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, If your radio has Emergency Cycle Mode enabled,
indicating the channel is free for you to respond. repetitions of hot mic and receiving period are made
Press the PTT button to respond to the call. for a programmed duration. During Emergency Cycle
Mode, received calls sound through the speaker.
321
English
If you press the PTT button during the programmed • The display shows Tx Telegram and the
receiving period, you hear a prohibit tone, indicating destination alias.
that you should release the PTT button. The radio
ignores the PTT button press and remains in The green LED lights up. The Emergency icon
Emergency mode. appears.
If you press the PTT button during hot mic, and 2 Once the display shows Alarm Sent, speak
continue to press it after the hot mic duration expires, clearly into the microphone.
the radio continues to transmit until you release the
The radio automatically stops transmitting when:
PTT button.
• The cycling duration between hot mic and
If the Emergency Alarm request fails, the radio does
receiving calls expires, if Emergency Cycle
not retry to send the request, and enters the hot mic
Mode is enabled.
state directly.
• The hot mic duration expires, if Emergency
Note: Cycle Mode is disabled.
Some accessories may not support hot mic.
Check with your dealer or system 3 Press the Emergency Off button to exit the
administrator for more information. Emergency mode.
The radio returns to the Home screen.
Follow the procedure to send Emergency Alarms with
Other Systems
voice to follow on your radio. Reinitiating Emergency Mode

This feature is only applicable to the radio sending
1 Press the programmed Emergency On button or
the Emergency Alarm. Follow the procedure to
the Emergency footswitch.
reinitiate Emergency mode on your radio.
You see one of these results:
• The display shows Tx Alarm and the Do one of the following:
destination alias.
322
English
• Change the channel while the radio is in Follow the procedure to exit Emergency mode on
Other Systems
Emergency mode. your radio.
The radio exits the Emergency mode, and Do one of the following:
reinitiates Emergency, if Emergency Alarm is
enabled on the new channel. • Press the programmed Emergency Off button.
• Press the programmed Emergency On button • Change the channel to a new channel that has
during an Emergency initiation or transmission no emergency system configured.
state. The display shows No Emergency.
The radio exits this state, and reinitiates
Emergency. Deleting an Alarm Item from the Alarm List
Follow the procedure to delete the alarm items from
Exiting Emergency Mode After Sending the the Alarm List, to exit Emergency mode.
Emergency Alarm
1
This feature is only applicable to the radio sending Press to access the menu.
the Emergency Alarm.
2
Your radio exits Emergency mode when: Press or to Alarm List. Press
• An acknowledgment is received (for Emergency to select.
Alarm only).
3
• All retries to send the alarm have been exhausted. Press or to the required alarm item.
• Your radio is turned off. Press to select.
Note:
Your radio does not reinitiate the 4
Emergency mode automatically when it is select.
powered up again.
323
English
Text Messaging Features Note:
If the channel type is not a match, you can
Your radio is able to receive data, for example a text
only edit, forward, or delete Sent text
message, from another radio or an e-mail application.
messages; forward, delete, or delete all
The maximum length of characters when you send Received text messages; and edit or forward
and receive a text message is 280 characters which Fail-to-Send text messages.
includes the subject line. You see the subject line
Text Messages
when you receive messages from e-mail applications.
The text messages are stored in an Inbox, and sorted
Note: according to the most recently received.
The maximum length of 280 characters is Viewing Text Messages
applicable only for models with the latest Follow the procedure to view text messages on your
software and hardware. On older hardware, radio.
the text message will be truncated to the
maximum length of 140 characters. Check 1
with your dealer or system administrator for
more information. 2
The Inbox is capable of storing a maximum of 30 select.
messages.
Other Systems
The radio exits the current screen once the inactivity 3

timer expires. Text messages in the typing screen are select.
automatically saved to the Drafts folder.
If the Inbox is empty:
If you long press at any time, you return to the • The display shows List Empty.
Home screen.
324
English
• A tone sounds, if the Keypad Tone is turned You cannot reply to a Telemetry Status text
Other Systems
on. message.
The display shows Telemetry: <Status Text
4
Press or to the required message. Message>.
Press to select. 5
The display shows a subject line if the message is Long press to return to the Home screen.
from an e-mail application.
Responding to Text Messages
Viewing Telemetry Status Text Messages Follow the procedure to respond to text messages on
Follow the procedure to view a telemetry status text your radio.
message from the inbox. When you receive a text message:
1 • The display shows the Notification list with the
alias or ID of the sender.
2 • The display shows the Message icon.
select. Note:
The radio exits the Text Message alert screen
3 and sets up a Private or Group Call to the
Press or to Inbox. Press to sender of the message if the PTT button is
select. pressed.

•
Press to select. Press or to Read. Press to
select.
325
English
The display shows the text message. The •
display shows a subject line if the message is Press to access the menu.
2
• Press or to Messages. Press to
Press or to Read Later. Press select.
to select.
3
The radio returns to the screen you were on Press or to Inbox. Press to
prior to receiving the text message. select.
• 4
Press or to Delete. Press to Press or to the required message.
select.
Press to select.
2 Do one of the following: The display shows a subject line if the message is
• from an e-mail application.
Press to return to inbox.
5
• Press to access the sub-menu.
Press a second time to reply, forward, or
delete the text message. 6
Other Systems
Press or to Reply. Press to

Responding to Text Messages with Quick Text select.
Follow the procedure to respond to text messages
with Quick Text messages on your radio. 7
Press or to Quick Reply. Press
to select.
326 Proceed to Step 3.
English
• A tone sounds.
Other Systems
8
Press or to the required message. • The display shows a positive mini notice.
Press to select. If unsuccessful:
confirming the message is being sent. • A tone sounds.
9 Wait for acknowledgment. • The radio returns to the Resend option screen.
If successful:
Forwarding Text Messages
• A tone sounds.
Follow the procedure to forward text messages on
• The display shows a positive mini notice. your radio.
If unsuccessful:
When you are at the Resend option screen:
• A tone sounds.
1
• The display shows a negative mini notice. Press or to Forward, and press
• The radio returns to the Resend option screen. to send the same message to another subscriber
or group alias or ID.
Resending Text Messages
Follow the procedure to resend text messages on 2
your radio. Press or to the required alias or ID.
When you are at the Resend option screen: Press to select.

confirming your message is being sent.
Press to resend the same message to the
same subscriber or group alias or ID. 3 Wait for acknowledgment.
If successful: If successful:
327
English
• A tone sounds. The display shows Radio Number:.
4
If unsuccessful: Enter the subscriber ID, and press to
proceed.
• A tone sounds. The display shows a transitional mini notice,
• The display shows a negative mini notice. confirming your message is being sent.
Note:
You can also manually select a target radio
If successful:
address (see Forwarding Text Messages
by Using the Manual Dial on page 328). • A tone sounds.
Forwarding Text Messages by Using the Manual
Dial If unsuccessful:
Follow the procedure to forward text messages by • A tone sounds.
using the manual dial on your radio. • The display shows a negative mini notice.
1
Press or to Forward. Press to Editing Text Messages
select.
Other Systems
Select Edit to edit the message.

2 Note:
Press to send the same message to another If a subject line is present (for messages
subscriber or group alias or ID. received from an e-mail application), you
cannot edit it.
3
to select.
328
English
•
Other Systems
1 Press to choose between deleting the
select. message or saving it to the Drafts folder.
Writing Text Messages
2 Use the keypad to edit your message. Follow the procedure to write text message on your
radio.
•
Press to move one space to the left. 1 Do one of the following:
•
Press or to move one space to the • Press the programmed Text Message button.
right. Proceed to Step 3.
• •
Press to delete any unwanted Press to access the menu.
characters.
• 2
Long press to change text entry method. Press or to Messages. Press to
select.
3
Press once message is composed. 3
Press or to Compose. Press to
4 Do one of the following: select.
A blinking cursor appears.
•
Press or to Send and press
to send the message. 4 Use the keypad to type your message.
•
Press or to Save and press Press to move one space to the left.
to save the message to the Drafts folder.
• Press or to move one space to the right.
Press to edit the message. 329
English
•
Press to delete any unwanted characters. Press or to Manual Dial. Press
to select.Key in the subscriber ID. The
first line of the display shows Radio Number:.
5 The second line of the display shows a blinking
Press once message is composed. cursor. Key in the subscriber alias or ID. Press
.
•
Press to send the message. The display shows transitional mini notice,
• confirming your message is being sent.
Press . Press or to choose
If successful:
among editing, deleting, or saving the
• A tone sounds.
message. Press to select.
• The display shows positive mini notice.
Sending Text Messages If unsuccessful:
Follow the procedure to send text message on your
radio. • A low tone sounds.
• The display shows negative mini notice.
Other Systems
It is assumed that you have a newly written text

• The message is moved to the Sent Items
message or a saved text message.
folder.
Select the message recipient. Do one of the • The message is marked with a Send Failed
following: icon.
• Note:
Press or to the required alias or ID. For a newly written text message, the radio
returns you to the Resend option screen.
330 Press to select.
English
Deleting Text Messages from the Inbox
Other Systems
5
Follow the procedure to delete text messages from Press to access the sub-menu.
6
select.
Proceed to Step 3. 7
• The display shows a positive mini notice. The
screen returns to the Inbox.
2
Press or to Messages. Press to Deleting All Text Messages from the Inbox
select. Follow the procedure to delete all text messages from
3
select.
If the Inbox is empty: • Press the programmed Text Message button.
Proceed to Step 3.
•
• A tone sounds. Press to access the menu.
4 2
Press or to the required message. Press or to Messages. Press to
select.
Press to select.
The display shows a subject line if the message is 3
select.
331
English
If the Inbox is empty: If the radio changes mode or powers down before the
status of the message in Sent Items folder is updated,
the radio cannot complete any In-Progress messages
• A tone sounds. and automatically marks it with a Send Failed icon.
4 The radio supports a maximum of five In-Progress
Press or to Delete All. Press messages at one time. During this period, the radio
to select. cannot send any new message and automatically
marks it with a Send Failed icon.
5
The display shows a positive mini notice. If you long press at any time, the radio returns
to the Home screen.
Sent Text Messages
Once a message is sent to another radio, it is saved Note:
in Sent Items folder. The most recent sent text If the channel type, for example a conventional
message is always added to the top of the Sent Items digital or Capacity Plus channel, is not a
folder. You can resend, forward, edit, or delete a Sent match, you can only edit, forward, or delete a
text message. Sent message.
The Sent Items folder is capable of storing a Viewing Sent Text Messages
Other Systems
maximum of 30 last sent messages. When the folder Follow the procedure to view sent text messages on
is full, the next sent text message automatically your radio.
replaces the oldest text message in the folder.
If you exit the message sending screen while the
message is being sent, the radio updates the status
Proceed to Step 3.
of the message in the Sent Items folder without
providing any indication in the display or via sound.
332
English
•
Other Systems
Press .
2 2 You can either resend or forward the sent text
select. message. Do one of the following:
•
3 to Resend. Press to select.
Press or to Sent Items. Press
•
to select. to Forward. Press to select.
If the Sent Items folder is empty: The display shows a transitional mini notice,
• The display shows List Empty. confirming your message is being sent.
• A low tone sounds, if the Keypad Tone is
turned on.
If successful:
4 • A tone sounds.
Press to select.
If unsuccessful:
The icon at the top right corner of the screen
indicates the status of the message. See Sent • A tone sounds.
Item Icons on page 262. • The display shows a negative mini notice.
• The radio proceeds to the Resend option
Sending Sent Text Messages screen. See Resending Text Messages on
Follow the procedure to send a sent text messages page 102 for more information.
on your radio.
When you are viewing a Sent message:
333
English
Deleting Sent Text Messages from the Sent Items 3
Folder Press or to Sent Items. Press
Follow the procedure to delete sent text messages to select.
from the Sent Items folder on your radio. If Sent Items is empty:
When you are viewing a Sent message: • The display shows List Empty.
• A tone sounds.
1
Press .
4
2 to select.
select.
Deleting All Sent Text Messages from the Sent •
Items Folder Press or to Yes. Press to
Follow the procedure to delete all sent text messages select.
from the Sent Items folder on your radio. The display shows a positive mini notice.
1 Do one of the following: •
Other Systems
• Press the programmed Text Message button. select.

Proceed to Step 3. The radio returns to the previous screen.
•
2
select.
334
English
Saved Text Messages
Other Systems
2
You can save a text message to send it at a later Press or to Messages. Press to
time. select.
If a PTT button press or a mode change causes the 3
radio to exit the text message writing/editing screen Press or to Drafts. Press to
while you are in the process of writing or editing a text select.
message, your current text message is automatically
saved to the Drafts folder. 4
The most recent saved text message is always added Press to select.
to the top of the Drafts list.
The Drafts folder stores a maximum of ten (10) last Editing Saved Text Messages
saved messages. When the folder is full, the next Follow the procedure to edit saved text message on
saved text message automatically replaces the oldest your radio.
text message in the folder.
1
Press while viewing the message.
Viewing Saved Text Messages
Follow the procedure to view saved text message on 2
your radio. Press or to Edit. Press to
select.
1 Do one of the following: A blinking cursor appears.
Proceed to Step 3. 3 Use the keypad to type your message.
•
Press to access the menu. Press to move one space to the left.
335
English
•
Press or to move one space to the right. Press to access the menu.
Press to delete any unwanted characters. 2

select.
3
4 Press or to Drafts. Press to
Press once message is composed. select.
4
• Press or to the required message.
Press or to Send. Press to
send the message. Press to select.
•
Press . Press or to choose 5
between saving or deleting the message. Press Press or to Delete. Press to
delete the text message.
to select.
Quick Text Messages
Deleting Saved Text Messages from the Drafts Your radio supports a maximum of 50 Quick Text
Other Systems
Folder messages as programmed by your dealer.

Follow the procedure to delete saved text message
from drafts on your radio. While Quick Text messages are predefined, you can
edit each message before sending it.
Proceed to Step 3.
336
English
Other Systems
Sending Quick Text Messages 5 Do the following to select the recipient and send
Follow the procedure to send predefined Quick Text the message.
messages on your radio to a predefined alias.
1 Do one of the following: confirming that your message is being sent.
• Press the programmed Text Message button. 6 Wait for acknowledgment.
Proceed to 3. If successful:
button. Proceed to Step 6. • A positive indicator tone sounds.
confirming your message is being sent. If unsuccessful:
• • A negative indicator tone sounds.
2 • The radio proceeds to the Resend option
Press or to Messages. Press to screen. See Resending Text Messages on
select. page 102 for more information.
3 Text Entry Configuration
Press or to Quick Text. Press
to select. Your radio allows you to configure different text.
4 You can configure the following settings for entering

Press or to the required Quick Text text on your radio:
message. Press to select. • Word Predict
• Word Correct
• Sentence Cap 337
English
• My Words 3
Your radio supports the following text entry methods:
to select.
• Numbers
• Symbols 4
• Predictive or Multi-Tap Press or to Text Entry. Press
to select.
• Language (If programmed)
Note: 5
Press or to Word Correct. Press
Press at any time to return to the
to select.
previous screen or long press to return
to the Home Screen. The radio exits the 6 Do one of the following:
current screen once the inactivity timer •
expires. Press or to Word Correct. Press
Enabling or Disabling Word Correct to select.
The in-built dictionary cannot recognize the supplies
• Press to enable Word Correct. If enabled
alternative word choice when the word entered into
Other Systems
appears besides Enabled.

the text editor.
• Press to disable Word Correct. If disabled,
1 disappears beside Enabled.
2 Enabling or Disabling Word Predict

Press or to Utilities. Press to Word Predict: Your radio can learn common word
select. sequences that you often enter. It then predicts the
next word you may want to use after you enter the
338
English
first word of a common word sequence into the text •
Other Systems
editor. Press to disable Microphone Dynamic
Distortion Control. If disabled, disappears
1 beside Enabled.
2 Sentence Cap
Press or to Utilities. Press to This feature is used to automatically enable
select. capitalization of the first letter in the first word for
every new sentence.
3
to select.
2
Press or to Text Entry. Press select.
to select.
3
5 Press Press or to Radio Settings.
Press or to Word Predict. Press
Press to select.
to select.
4
6 Do one of the following: Press or to Text Entry. Press
to select.
•
Press to enable the Word Predict. If 5
Press or to Sentence Cap. Press
enabled appears besides Enabled.
to select.
339
English
• select.
Press to enable Sentence Cap. If enabled
appears besides Enabled. 6
•
Press to disable Sentence Cap. If to select.
disabled, disappears beside Enabled. The display shows the list of custom words.
Viewing Custom Words Editing Custom Words

You can add your own custom words into the in-built You can edit custom words saved in your radio
dictionary of your radio. Your radio maintains a list to
1
contain these words. Press to access the menu.
1 2
Press to access the menu. Press or to Utilities. Press to
select.
2
select. 3
Other Systems
3 to select.
Press Press or to Radio Settings.
Press to select. 4
to select.
4
to select.
340
English
Other Systems
5 10
Press or to My Words. Press to Press once your custom word is completed.
select.
The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming
6 your custom word is being saved.
• If the custom word is saved, a tone sounds and
to select. the display shows positive mini notice.
Display shows the list of custom words. • If the custom word is not saved, a low tone sounds
and the display show negative mini notice.
7
Press or to the required word. Press
Adding Custom Words
to select. You can add custom words into the in-built radio
dictionary.
8
Press or to Edit. Press to 1
9 Use the keypad to edit your custom word. 2

• select.
• 3
Press key to move one space to the right. Press or to Radio Settings. Press
•
Press the key to delete any unwanted to select.
characters.
4
• Press or to Text Entry. Press
to select.
341
English
5 • If the custom word is not saved, a low tone sounds
Press or to My Words. Press to and the display show negative mini notice.
select.
Deleting a Custom Word
6 Follow the procedure to delete the custom words
Press or to Add New Word. Press saved in your radio.
to select. 1
Display shows the list of custom words. Press to access the menu.
7 Use the keypad to edit your custom word. 2

• select.
• 3
Press key to move one space to the right. Press or to Radio Settings. Press
•
Press the key to delete any unwanted to select.
characters.
• 4
Long press to change text entry method. Press or to Text Entry. Press
to select.
Other Systems
8
Press once your custom word is completed. 5
The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming select.
your custom word is being saved.
6
• If the custom word is saved, a tone sounds and Press or to the required word. Press
the display show positive mini notice.
to select.
342
English
Other Systems
7 4
Press or to Delete. Press to Press or to Text Entry. Press
select. to select.
8 Choose one of the following. 5

• select.
The display shows Entry Deleted. 6
•
Press or to No. Press to to select.
return to the previous screen.
Deleting All Custom Words •
Follow the procedure to delete all custom words from At Delete Entry?, press to select Yes.
the in-built dictionary of your radio. The display shows All Entries Deleted.
1 •
Press to access the menu. Press or to No to return to the
previous screen. Press to select.
2
select. Job Tickets
This feature allows your radio to receive Job Tickets,
3 which are messages from the dispatcher listing out
tasks to perform.
to select.
You can respond to Job Tickets in order to sort them
into Job Ticket Folders. By default, the folders are
343
English
“All", "New", "Started", and "Completed". Check with 3
your dealer or system administrator for an additional Press or to the required folder. Press
10 folders.
to select.
Your radio supports a maximum of 100 Job Tickets,
all of which can be seen in the "All" folder. New Job 4
Press or to the required Job Ticket.
Tickets and Job Tickets with recent change in state
are listed first. Upon reaching the maximum number Press to select.
of Job Tickets, the next Job Ticket automatically
replaces the last Job Ticket in your radio. Logging In or Out of the Remote Server
This feature allows you to log in and log out of the
Job Tickets are retained even after radio is powered remote server by using your user ID via the menu.
down and powered up again.
Your radio automatically detects and discards the 1
duplicated Job Tickets with the same subject line.
2
Accessing the Job Ticket Folder Press or to Log In. Press to
Follow the procedure to access the Job Ticket folder. select.
1 Do one of the following: If you are already logged in, menu displays Log
Other Systems
Out.
• Press the programmed Job Ticket button.
Proceed to Step 3. The display shows a transitional mini notice,
• confirming that you have been logged in
Press to access the menu. successfully.
2 If you have failed to log in, the display shows a

Press or to Job Tickets. Press negative mini notice.
to select.
344
English
Creating Job Tickets
Other Systems
2
Your radio is able to create Job Tickets, which are or to Job Tickets. Press to
based on a Job Ticket template and send out tasks select.
that need to be performed.
3
CPS programming software is required to configure or to the required folder. Press
the Job Ticket template. to select.
1 4
Press to access the menu. or to the required job ticket. Press
2 to select.
or to Job Tickets. Press to
select. 5
Press once more to access the sub-menu.
3 You can also press the corresponding number key
or to Create Ticket. Press to (1–9) to Quick Reply.
select.
6
4 Continue with either Sending Job Tickets Using or to the required job ticket. Press
One Job Ticket Template on page 346 or Sending
to select.
Job Tickets Using More Than One Job Ticket
Template on page 346. The display shows transitional mini notice,
confirming your message being sent.
Responding to Job Tickets
If successful:
1
Press to access the menu. • A positive indicator tone sounds.
345
English
If unsuccessful: If the message is not sent, the display shows
negative mini notice.
• The display shows a negative mini notice. Sending Job Tickets Using More Than One Job
Ticket Template
Sending Job Tickets Using One Job Ticket If your radio is configured with more than one Job
Template Ticket template, perform the following actions to send
If your radio is configured with one Job Ticket the Job Tickets.
template, perform the following actions to send the
Job Ticket. 1
or to the required option. Press
1 Use the keypad to type the required room number. to select.
Press to select. 2
or to Send. Press to select.
2 The display shows transitional mini notice,
or to Room Status. Press to confirming your message is sent.
select.
If the message is not sent, the display shows
3 negative mini notice.
or to the required option. Press
Other Systems
to select. Deleting Job Tickets

Follow the procedure to delete job tickets on your
4
or to Send. Press to select. radio.
The display shows transitional mini notice,
confirming your message is sent.
• Press the programmed Job Ticket button.
Proceed to Step 3
346
English
• is not a necessary requirement for receiving a
Other Systems
Press to access the menu. transmission. While on a privacy-enabled channel,
the radio is still able to receive clear or unscrambled
2
or to Job Tickets. Press to transmissions.
select.
Your radio supports two types of privacy, but only one
3 can be assigned to your radio. They are:
or to All. Press to select.
• Basic Privacy
4 • Enhanced Privacy
or to the required Job Ticket. Press
To unscramble a privacy-enabled call or data
to select. transmission, your radio must be programmed to
have the same Privacy Key for Basic Privacy, or the
5 same Key Value and Key ID for Enhanced Privacy as
Press again while viewing the Job Ticket.
the transmitting radio.
6 If your radio receives a scrambled call that is of a
or to Delete. Press to select.
different Privacy Key, or different Key Value and Key
Privacy ID, you will either hear a garbled transmission for
Basic Privacy or nothing at all for Enhanced Privacy.
This feature helps to prevent eavesdropping by
unauthorized users on a channel by the use of a Note:
software-based scrambling solution. The signaling This feature is not applicable in Citizens Band
and user identification portions of a transmission are channels that are in the same frequency.
not scrambled. The green LED lights up when the radio is
Your radio must have privacy enabled on the channel transmitting, and blinks rapidly when the radio is
to send a privacy-enabled transmission, although this receiving an ongoing privacy-enabled transmission.
347
English
Note: 5 Do one of the following:
Some radio models may not offer this Privacy
feature, or may have a different configuration. •
Press or to On. Press to
Check with your dealer or system select. The display shows beside On.
•
Turning Privacy On or Off
Follow the procedure to turn privacy on or off on your
radio. Multi-Site Controls
1 Do one of the following: These features are applicable when your current
radio channel is part of an IP Site Connect or
• Press the programmed Privacy button. Skip
Capacity Plus--Multi-Site configuration.
the steps below.
• Starting Manual Site Search
Press to access the menu. Follow the procedure to start manual site search
when the received signal strength is poor in order to
2 attempt to find a site with better signal. .
select.
If the radio finds a new site:
Other Systems
3 • A positive indicator tone sounds.

If the radio fails to find a new site:
to select.
4
Press or to Privacy. Press to
select.
348
English
Site Lock On/Off
Other Systems
2
When toggled on, the radio searches the current site select.
only. When toggled off, the radio searches other sites
in addition to the current site. 3
Press the programmed Site Lock button. to select.
If the Site Lock function is toggled on: 4
Press or to Neighbor Sites. Press
• You hear a positive indicator tone, indicating
the radio has locked to the current site. to select.
• The display shows Site Locked.
Security
If the Site Lock function is toggled off:
This feature allows you to enable or disable any radio
• You hear a negative indicator tone, indicating in the system. For example, you may want to disable
the radio is unlocked. a stolen radio to prevent unauthorized users from
• The display shows Site Unlocked. using it, and enable the radio when it is recovered.
Accessing Neighbor Sites List You can enable or disable a radio by using one of
This feature allows the user to check the adjacent these features:
sites list of the current home site. Follow the • Programmable Button
procedure to access the Neighbor Sites List:
• Contacts List
1 • Manual Dial (via Contacts)
349
English
You will not receive an acknowledgment if you press • The display shows a negative mini notice.
during Radio Enable or Radio Disable Disabling Radios by Using the Contacts List
operation. Follow the procedure to disable your radio by using
Note: the Contacts list.
1
administrator for more information. Press to access the menu.
Disabling Radios
2
Follow the procedure to disable your radio. Press or to Contacts. Press to
select.
1 Press the programmed Radio Disable button.
3
2 Press or to the required alias or ID.
Press to select.
Press to select.
The display shows a transitional mini notice, 4
indicating the request is in progress. The green Press or to Radio Disable. Press
LED blinks. to select.
Other Systems

If successful:
LED blinks.
• The display shows a positive mini notice. 5 Wait for acknowledgment.
If successful:
If unsuccessful:
350 • A negative indicator tone sounds.
English
Other Systems
5
If unsuccessful: proceed.
6
• The display shows a negative mini notice. Press or to Radio Disable. Press
Disabling Radios by Using the Manual Dial to select.

Follow the procedure to disable your radio by using The display shows a transitional mini notice,
the manual dial. indicating the request is in progress. The green
LED blinks.
1
Press to access the menu. 7 Wait for acknowledgment.
If successful:
2
Press or to Contacts. Press to • A positive indicator tone sounds.
select.
3 If unsuccessful:
to select. • A negative indicator tone sounds.
4
Enabling Radios
to select. Follow the procedure to enable your radio.
The first text line shows Radio Number:.
1 Press the programmed Radio Enable button.
351
English
2 3
Press or to the required alias or ID. Press or to the required alias or ID.
Press to select. Press to select.
The display shows Radio Enable and the
subscriber alias or ID. The green LED lights up. 4
Press or to Radio Enable. Press
3 Wait for acknowledgment. to select.
If successful: The green LED blinks.
• A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows Radio Enable and the
• The display shows a positive mini notice. subscriber alias or ID. The green LED lights up.
If unsuccessful:
• A negative indicator tone sounds. If successful:
• The display shows a negative mini notice. • A tone sounds.
• The display shows Radio Enable
Enabling Radios by Using the Contacts List
Successful.
Follow the procedure to enable your radio by using
the Contacts list. If unsuccessful:
Other Systems
1 • A tone sounds.
Press to access the menu. • The display shows Radio Enable Failed.
2
select.
352
English
Other Systems
Enabling Radios by Using the Manual Dial The display shows Radio Enable and the
Follow the procedure to enable your radio by using subscriber alias or ID. The green LED lights up.
the manual dial.
1 If successful:
• A tone sounds.
2 • The display shows Radio Enable
select. Successful.
If unsuccessful:
3
Press or to Manual Dial. Press • A tone sounds.
to select. • The display shows Radio Enable Failed.
4 Lone Worker
Press or to Private Call. Press
This feature prompts an emergency to be raised if
to select.
there is no user activity, such as any radio button
The first text line shows Radio Number:.
press or activation of the channel selector, for a
5 predefined time.
Following no user activity for a programmed duration,
proceed.
the radio pre-warns the user via an audio indicator
6 once the inactivity timer expires.
Press or to Radio Enable. Press
If there is still no acknowledgment by the user before
to select. the predefined reminder timer expires, the radio
The green LED blinks. initiates an Emergency Alarm.
353
English
Only one of the following Emergency Alarms is radio behind and expect your Bluetooth-enabled
assigned to this feature: device to work with a high degree of reliability when
they are separated.
• Emergency Alarm
• Emergency Alarm with Call At the fringe areas of reception, both voice and tone
• Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow quality will start to sound "garbled" or "broken". To
correct this problem, simply position your radio and
The radio remains in the emergency state, allowing Bluetooth-enabled device closer to each other (within
voice messages to proceed until action is taken. See the 10-meter defined range) to re-establish clear
Emergency Operation on page 317 for more audio reception. The Bluetooth function of your radio
information on ways to exit Emergency. has a maximum power of 2.5 mW (4 dBm) at the 10-
Note: meter range.
This feature is limited to radios with this Your radio can support up to three simultaneous
function enabled. Check with your dealer or Bluetooth connections with Bluetooth-enabled
system administrator for more information. devices of unique types. For example, a headset, a
Bluetooth scanner, and a PTT-Only Device (POD). Multiple
connections with Bluetooth-enabled devices of the
This feature allows you to use your radio with a same type are not supported.
Bluetooth-enabled device (accessory) via a Bluetooth
Other Systems
connection. Your radio supports both Motorola and Refer to the user manual of your respective
COTS (Commercially available Off-The-Shelf) Bluetooth-enabled device for more details on the full
Bluetooth-enabled devices. capabilities of your Bluetooth-enabled device.
Bluetooth operates within a range of 10 meters (32 Note:

feet) line of sight. This is an unobstructed path If disabled via the CPS, all Bluetooth-related
between your radio and your Bluetooth-enabled features are disabled and the Bluetooth device
device. It is not recommended that you leave your database is erased.
354
English
Turning Bluetooth On and Off
Other Systems
1
1
2 select.
select. 3
3 select.
Press or to My Status. Press to
select. 4 Do one of the following:
The display shows On and Off. The current status
is indicated by a . •
Press or to the required device.
4 Do one of the following: Press to select.
• •
Press or to On. Press to Press or to Find Devices to
locate available devices. Press or
•
Press or to Off. Press to to the required device. Press to select.
5
Connecting to Bluetooth Devices Press or to Connect. Press to
select.
Turn on your Bluetooth-enabled device and place it in
pairing mode. Your Bluetooth-enabled device may require
additional steps to complete the pairing. Refer to
the user manual of your Bluetooth-enabled device.
355
English
The display shows Connecting to <Device>. 2
Wait for acknowledgment. select.
If successful: 3
Press or to Find Me. Press to
select. The radio can now be found by other
• The display shows <Device> Connected and the Bluetooth-enabled devices for a programmed
Bluetooth Connected icon. duration. This is called Discoverable Mode.
• The display shows beside the connected device.
Wait for acknowledgment.
If unsuccessful:
If successful:
• The display shows Connecting Failed. • A positive indicator tone sounds.
• The display shows <Device> Connected and the
Note:
If pin code is required, refer Accessing Radios
by Using Passwords on page 120. • The display shows beside the connected device.
Connecting to Bluetooth Devices in Discoverable If unsuccessful:

Other Systems
Mode • A negative indicator tone sounds.

Turn on your Bluetooth-enabled device and place it in • The display shows Connecting Failed.
pairing mode. Disconnecting from Bluetooth Devices
1 1
356
English
• The disappears beside the connected device.
Other Systems
2
select. Switching Audio Route between Internal Radio
Speaker and Bluetooth Device
3 Follow the procedure to toggle audio routing between
Press or to Devices. Press to internal radio speaker and external Bluetooth device.
select.
Press the programmed Bluetooth Audio Switch
4 button.
Press or to the required device. Press
to select. The display shows one of the following results:
• A tone sounds. The display shows Route Audio
5 to Radio.
Press or to Disconnect. Press
to select. • A tone sounds. The display shows Route Audio
The display shows Disconnecting from to Bluetooth.
<Device>.
Viewing Device Details
Note: Follow the procedure to view the device details on
Your Bluetooth-enabled device may require your radio.
additional steps to disconnect. Refer to
respective user manuals of any Bluetooth- 1
enabled devices.
2
Wait for acknowledgment. Press or to Bluetooth. Press to
select.
• A tone sounds.
• The display shows <Device> Disconnected and
the Bluetooth Connected icon disappears. 357
English
3 4
Press or to Devices. Press to Press or to the required device. Press
select.
to select.
4
Press or to the required device. Press 5
to select. select. The display shows Device Deleted.
5 Bluetooth Mic Gain

Press or to View Details. Press This feature allows the user to control the microphone
to select. gain value of the connected Bluetooth-enabled
device.
Deleting Device Name
You can remove a disconnected device from the list 1
of Bluetooth-enabled devices.
2
1 Press or to Bluetooth. Press to
2
Other Systems
Press or to Bluetooth. Press to 3

Press or to BT Mic Gain. Press
select. to select.
3 4
Press or to Devices. Press to Press or to the BT Mic Gain type and
select.
the current values. Press to select. You can
edit the values here.
358
English
a)
Other Systems
5 Press or to Bluetooth and press
Press or to increase or to decrease
values. Press to select. to select.
a)
Press or to Indoor Location and
Indoor Location
press to select.
Note:
Indoor Location feature is applicable for b)
Press to turn on Indoor Location.
models with the latest software and hardware. The display shows Indoor Location On. You
Check with your dealer or system hear a good key tone.
Indoor Location can be used to keep track of radio
users location while indoors. When Indoor Location is • If successful, the Indoor Location Available
activated, the radio is in a limited discoverable mode. icon appears on the Home screen display.
Dedicated beacons are used to locate the radio and • If unsuccessful, the display shows Turning
determine its position. On Failed. You hear a bad key tone.
c)
Turning Indoor Location On or Off Press to turn off Indoor Location.
You can turn on or turn off Indoor Location by The display shows Indoor Location Off.
performing one of the following actions. You hear a good key tone.
a) • If successful, the Indoor Location Available
Press to access the menu. icon disappears on the Home screen
display.
359
English
• If unsuccessful, the display shows Turning • If unsuccessful, the display shows Turning
Off Failed. You hear a bad key tone. Off Failed. If unsuccessful, you hear a
negative tone.
a) Long press the programmed Indoor Location Accessing Indoor Location Beacons Information
button to turn on Indoor Location. Displays information on Indoor Location Beacons
The display shows Indoor Location On. You
hear a positive tone. 1
2
• If successful, the Indoor Location Available Press or to Bluetooth and press
to select.
On Failed. If unsuccessful, you hear a 3
negative tone. Press or to Indoor Location and
press to select.
The display shows Indoor Location Off. 4
Other Systems
You hear a positive tone. Press or to Beacons and press

to select.
• If successful, the Indoor Location Available The display shows the beacons information.
display.
360
English
Notification List
Other Systems
3
Press or to the required event. Press
Your radio has a Notification list that collects all your
unread events on the channel, such as unread text to select.
messages, telegrams, missed calls and call alerts.
4
The display shows the Notification icon when the Long press to return to the Home screen.
Notification list has one or more events.
Auto-Range Transponder System
For text messaging and missed call/call alert
notification events, the maximum number are 30 text The Auto-Range Transponder System (ARTS) is an
messages and 10 missed calls/call alerts. This analog-only feature designed to inform you when your
maximum number depends on individual feature (job radio is out-of-range of other ARTS-equipped radios.
tickets or text messages or missed calls/ call alerts) ARTS-equipped radios transmit or receive signals
list capability. periodically to confirm that they are within range of
Accessing Notification List each other.
Follow the procedure to access the Notification list on Your radio provides indications of states as follows:
your radio.
First-Time A tone sounds.
1 Alert
Press to access the menu. The display shows In Range after
the channel alias.
2
Press or to Notification. Press ARTS-in- A tone sounds, if programmed.
Range Alert The display shows In Range after
to select.
the channel alias.
361
English
ARTS-Out- A tone sounds. The red LED rapidly • A tone sounds. The display shows Updating
of-Range blinks. Restarting. Your radio restarts by powering off
Alert and on again.
The display shows Out of Range
alternating with the Home screen. • You can select Restart Now or Postpone. When
you select Postpone, your radio returns to the
Note: previous screen. The display shows the OTAP
Check with your dealer or system Delay Timer icon until the automatic restart
administrator for more information. occurs.
Over-the-Air Programming When your radio powers up after automatic restart:
Your dealer can remotely update your radio via Over- • If successful, the display shows Sw Update
the-Air Programming (OTAP) without physical Completed.
connection. Additionally, some settings can also be • If unsuccessful, the display shows Sw Update
configured via OTAP. Failed.
When your radio undergoes OTAP, the green LED See Checking Software Update Information on page
blinks. 146 for the updated software version.
When your radio receives high volume data: Transmit Inhibit
Other Systems
• The display shows the High Volume Data icon. Transmit inhibit feature allow users to block all
• The channel becomes busy. transmission from the radio.
• A negative tone sounds if you press the PTT Note:
button. Bluetooth and Wi-Fi features are available in
When OTAP completes, depending on the Transmit Inhibit mode.
configuration:
362
English
Selecting Third-Party Peripherals Connection Modes The display shows the selected connection mode.
Other Systems
The screen returns to the previous menu.
Follow the procedure to select one of the following
third-party peripherals connection modes: Received Signal Strength Indicator
• Motorola This feature allows you to view the Received Signal
• PC and Audio Strength Indicator (RSSI) values.
• Data Accessory
The display shows the RSSI icon at the top right
• Telemetry
corner. See Display Icons on page 256 for more
• Generic information on the RSSI icon.
1 Viewing RSSI Values
Follow the procedure to view RSSI values on your
2 radio.
When you are at the Home screen:
select.
3 Long press to return to the Home screen.

Press or to Radio Settings.Press
to select. Password Lock Features
This feature allows you to restrict access to the radio
4 by asking for a password when the device is turned
to select. on
You can use a keypad microphone or Scroll Up/
5 Down buttons to enter the password.
Press or to the required connection
mode. Press to select. 363
English
Accessing Radios by Using Passwords Note:
Follow the procedure to access your radio by using a In locked state, your radio responds to
password. inputs from On/Off/Volume Control Knob
and programmed Backlight button only.
1 Enter the current four-digit password.
The use of Emergency footswitch cancels out Unlocking Radios in Locked State
password input to access the radio. Your radio is unable to receive any call, including
emergency calls, in locked state. Follow the
• Use a keypad microphone. procedure to unlock your radio in locked state.
•
Press or to edit the numeric value 1 Power up the radio.
of each digit, and press to enter and Your radio restarts the 15-minutes timer for locked
move to the next digit. state.
2 2 Wait for 15 minutes.

Press to enter the password.
If successful, the radio powers up. Your radio responds only to On/Off button in
locked state.
If unsuccessful:
3 Repeat the steps in Accessing Radios by Using
Other Systems
• After the first and second attempt, the display

Passwords on page 120 to access the radio.
shows Wrong Password. Repeat Step 1.
• After the third attempt, the display shows Turning Password Lock On or Off
Wrong Password and then, Radio Locked. A Follow the procedure to turn password lock on or off
tone sounds. The yellow LED double blinks. on your radio.
Your radio enters into locked state for 15
minutes. 1
364
English
Other Systems
select. •
Press or to Turn On. Press
3 to select.
The display shows beside Turn On.
to select. •
Press or to Turn Off. Press
4 to select.
Press or to Passwd Lock. Press
to select. The display shows beside Turn Off.
5 Enter the current four-digit password. Changing Passwords

Follow the procedure to change passwords on your
• Use a keypad microphone. radio.
•
Press or to edit the numeric value 1
of each digit, and press to enter and
move to the next digit. 2
A positive indicator tone sounds for every digit select.
pressed.
3
Press to enter the password.
If the password is incorrect, the display shows to select.
Wrong Password and automatically returns to the
previous menu.
365
English
4 The screen automatically returns to the previous
Press or to Passwd Lock. Press menu.
to select.
Front Panel Configuration
5 Enter the current four-digit password, and press
You are able to customize certain feature parameters
to proceed. in Front Panel Configuration (FPC) to enhance the
If the password is incorrect, the display shows use of your radio.
Wrong Password and automatically returns to the Entering Front Panel Configuration Mode
previous menu. Follow the procedure to enter front panel
programming mode on your radio.
6
Press or to Change PWD. Press
Long press at any time to return to the Home
to select.
screen.
7 1
Enter a new four-digit password, and press Press to access the menu.
to proceed.
2
8 Re-enter the new four-digit password, and press Press or to Utilities. Press to
Other Systems
select.
to proceed.
If successful, the display shows Password 3
Changed. Press or to Program Radio. Press
If unsuccessful, the display shows Passwords Do to select.

Not Match.
366
English
Editing FPC Mode Parameters Turning Wi-Fi On or Off
Other Systems
Use the following buttons as required while navigating Note:
through the feature parameters. This feature is applicable to XPR 5550e/XPR
5580e only.
•
, – Scroll through options, increase/ The programmed Wi-Fi On or Off button is
decrease values, or navigate vertically. assigned by your dealer or system
• administrator. Check with your dealer or
– Select the option or enter a sub-menu.
•
– Short-press to return to previous menu or radio has been programmed.
to exit the selection screen. Long-press to return You can turn on or turn off Wi-Fi® by performing one
to Home screen. of the following actions.
Wi-Fi Operation
• Press the programmed Wi-Fi On or Off button.
Wi-Fi® is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance®. Voice Announcement sounds Turning On Wi-Fi or
Note: Turning Off Wi-Fi.
5580e only.
a)
This feature allows you to setup and connect to a Wi- Press to access the menu.
Fi® network. Wi-Fi supports updates for radio b)
firmware, codeplug, and resources such as language Press or to WiFi and press
packs and voice announcement. to select.
c)
press to select.
367
English
Press to turn on Wi-Fi. The display shows 4
beside Enabled.
Press to turn off Wi-Fi. The disappears
from beside Enabled. 5
to select.
Connecting to a Network Access Point
Note: 6
This feature is applicable to XPR 5550e/XPR When the connection is successful, the radio
5580e only. displays a notice and the network access point is
When you turn on Wi-Fi®, the radio scans and saved into the profile list.
connects to a network access point.
Refreshing the Network List
You can also connect to a network access point via
the menu. Note:
1 5580e only.
Other Systems
• Perform the following actions to refresh the

2 network list.
select. a)
3 b)
Press or to Networks and press Press or to WiFi and press
368
English
c)
Other Systems
to select. select.
3
automatically refreshes the network list. Press or to Networks and press
to select.
• If you are already in the Networks menu, perform
the following action to refresh the network list. 4
Press or to Add Network and press
a)
Press or to Refresh and press
to select.
to select.
5 Enter the Service Set Identifier (SSID) and press
The radio refreshes and displays the latest
network list. .
Adding a Network 6
Press or to Open and press to
Note: select.
5580e only. 7
If a preferred network is not in the available network
list, perform the following actions to add a network.
The radio displays to indicate that the
1 network is successfully saved.
369
English
Viewing Details of Network Access Points Access Control (MAC) address, and Internet
Protocol (IP) address are displayed.
Note:
This feature is applicable to XPR 5550e/XPR For a non-connected network access point, the
5580e only. Service Set Identifier (SSID) and Security Mode
are displayed.
Perform the following actions to view details of
network access points. Removing Network Access Points
1 Note:
2 5580e only. Enterprise network access points
Press or to WiFi and press to that are added via CPS can only be removed
select. via CPS.
3 Perform the following actions to remove network

Press or to Networks and press access points from the profile list.
to select.
1
Other Systems
2
and press to select. Press or to WiFi and press to
select.
5
Press or to View Details and press 3
For a connected network access point, the Service
370 Set Identifier (SSID), Security Mode, Media
English
Other Systems
4 Tight This setting filters out unwanted calls
Press or to the selected network and/or background noise. Calls from
access point and press to select. remote locations may also be filtered out.
5 Note:
Press or to Remove and press to This feature is not applicable in Citizens Band
select. channels that are in the same frequency.
6 Setting Squelch Levels

Press or to Yes and press to Follow the procedure to set the squelch levels on
select. your radio.

The radio displays to indicate that the
selected network access point is successfully • Press the programmed Squelch button. Skip
removed. the following steps.
•
Utilities Press to access the menu.
This chapter explains the operations of the utility 2
functions available in your radio. Press or to Utilities. Press to
Squelch Levels select.
You can adjust the squelch level to filter out
3
unwanted calls with low signal strength or channels Press or to Radio Settings. Press
with a higher than normal background noise.
to select.
Normal This is the default setting.
371
English
4 Note:
Press or to Squelch. Press to This feature is not applicable in Citizens Band
select. channels that are in the same frequency.
5 Do one of the following: Setting Power Levels

Follow the procedure to set the power levels on your
• radio.
Press or to Normal. Press to
select.
The display shows beside Normal. • Press the programmed Power Level button.
• Skip the steps below.
Press or to Tight. Press to
select. •
The display shows beside Tight.
2
The screen automatically returns to the previous Press or to Utilities. Press to
menu. select.
Power Levels 3
You can customize the power setting to high or low
Other Systems
for each channel. to select.
High This enables communication with radios 4

located at a considerable distance from you. Press or to Power. Press to
select.
Low This enables communication with radios in
closer proximity. 5 Do one of the following:
372
English
•
Other Systems
Press or to High. Press to 3
select.
to select.
The display shows beside High.
• 4
Press or to Low. Press to Press or to Tones/Alerts. Press
select.
to select.
The display shows beside Low.
5
6 Press or to All Tones. Press to
Long press to return to the Home screen. select.
Turning Radio Tones/Alerts On or Off 6

You can enable and disable all radio tones and alerts, Press to enable or disable all tones and
if needed, except for incoming Emergency alert tone. alerts.
Follow the procedure to turn tones and alerts on or off If enabled appears besides Enabled.
on your radio. If disabled, disappears beside Enabled.
1 Do one of the following: Turning Keypad Tones On or Off
• Press the programmed Tones/Alerts button. Follow the procedure to turn keypad tones on or off
Skip the steps below. on your radio.
•
2
select.
select.
373
English
3 2
Press or to Radio Settings. Press Press or to Utilities. Press to
select.
to select.
3
to select.
to select.
4
5 Press or to Tones/Alerts. Press
Press or to Keypad Tones. Press
to select.
to select.
5
6 Press or to Vol. Offset. Press
Press to enable or disable keypad tones. to select.
Press or to the required volume offset
• If disabled, disappears beside Enabled. level.
A feedback tone sounds with each corresponding
Other Systems
Setting Tones/Alerts Volume Offset Levels volume offset level.

This feature adjusts the volume of the tones or alerts,
allowing it to be higher or lower than the voice 7 Do one of the following:
volume. Follow the procedure to set the tones and
alerts volume offset levels on your radio. •
Press to select. The required volume
offset level is saved.
1
374
English
•
Other Systems
Press to exit. The changes are 6
Press to enable or disable the Talk Permit
discarded. Tone.
Turning Talk Permit Tone On or Off
Follow the procedure to turn Talk Permit Tone on or • If enabled appears besides Enabled.
off on your radio. • If disabled, disappears beside Enabled.
1 Turning Power Up Tone On or Off
Follow the procedure to turn Power Up Tone on or off
2 on your radio.
select. 1
3
to select. select.
4 3
Press or to Tones/Alerts. Press Press or to Radio Settings. Press
5 4
Press or to Talk Permit. Press Press or to Tones/Alerts. Press
to select.
to select.
375
English
5 4
Press or to Power Up. Press to Press or to Message Alert. Press
select.
to select.
6
Press to enable or disable the Power Up 5 Do one of the following:
Tone.
•
If enabled appears besides Enabled. Press or to Momentary. Press
If disabled, disappears beside Enabled. to select.
Setting Text Message Alert Tones The display shows beside Momentary.
You can customize the text message alert tone to •
Momentary or Repetitive for each entry in the Press or to Repetitive. Press
Contacts list. Follow the procedure to set the text to select.
message alert tones on your radio.
The display shows beside Repetitive.
1
Press to access the menu. Changing Display Modes
You can change the display mode of the radio
2
Other Systems
Press or to Contacts. Press to between Day or Night, as needed. This feature

select. affects the color palette of the display. Follow the
procedure to change the display mode of your radio.
3
Press or to the required alias or ID. 1 Do one of the following:
Press to select. • Press the programmed Display Mode button.
Skip the following steps.
376
English
• • Press the programmed Brightness button.
Other Systems
Press to access the menu. Proceed to Step 5.
2 •
Press or to Utilities.Press to Press to access the menu.
select.
2
3 select.
to select. 3
4 to select.
Press or to Display. Press to
select.
4
The display shows Day Mode and Night Mode. Press or to Brightness. Press
to select.
5 The display shows the progress bar.
Press or to the required setting. Press
to select. 5
Press or to decrease or increase the
display brightness. Press to select.
Adjusting Display Brightness The setting value is varied from 1 to 8.
Follow the procedure to adjust the display brightness
on your radio. Display brightness cannot be adjusted Turning Horns/Lights On or Off
when Auto Brightness is enabled. Your radio is able to notify you of an incoming call via
incoming call sounds the horn and turns on the lights
of your vehicle. This feature needs to be installed 377
English
through your radio rear accessory connector by your • If disabled, disappears beside Enabled.
dealer. Follow the procedure to turn all horns and
lights on or off on your radio. Turning LED Indicators On or Off
Follow the procedure to turn the LED indicators on or
1 Do one of the following: off on your radio.
• Press the programmed Horns/Lights button. 1
Skip the steps below. Press to access the menu.
•
2 select.
select. 3
3
Press or to Radio Settings. Press to select.
to select. 4
Press or to LED Indicator. Press
4
Press or to Horns/Lights. Press to select.
Other Systems
to select. 5
Press to enable or disable the LED indicator.
5 The display shows one of the following results:
Press to enable or disable Horns/Lights. The
display shows one of the following results: • If enabled appears besides Enabled.
378
English
Turning Public Address System On or Off Turning External Public Address System On or
Other Systems
Follow the procedure to enable or disable the internal Off
public address (PA) system of your radio. Follow the procedure to enable or disable the external
public address (PA) system of your radio.
• Press the programmed Public Address button.
Skip the following steps. • Press the programmed Ext Public Address
• button. Skip the following steps.
Press to access the menu. •
2
select. Press or to Utilities. Press to
select.
3
to select.
to select.
4
Press or to Public Address. Press 4
Press or to External Public
to select.
Address. Press to select.
5
Press to enable or disable Public Address. 5
Press to enable or disable external public
address.
379
English
• If disabled, disappears beside Enabled. • If disabled, disappears beside Enabled.
Turning Introduction Screen On or Off Setting Languages

You can enable and disable the Introduction Screen Follow the procedure to set the languages on your
by following the procedure. radio.
1 1
2 2
Press or to Utilities. Press to Press or to Utilities. Press to
select. select.
3 3
4 4
or to Display. Press to select. Press or to Languages. Press to
select.
5
Other Systems
or to Intro Screen. Press to 5

select. Press or to the required language.
6 Press to select.
Press to enable or disable the Introduction The display shows beside the selected
Screen. language.
380
English
Identifying Cable Type Note:
Other Systems
This feature is not applicable in Citizens Band
Do the following steps to select the type of cable your
channels that are in the same frequency.
radio uses.
You can enable or disable VOX by doing one of the
1 following:
• Press the PTT button during radio operation to
2 disable VOX.
select. • Turn the radio off and then power it on again to
enable VOX.
3 • Change the channel via the Scroll Up/Down
buttons to enable VOX.
to select. • Change the channel via the Volume/Channel
Knobto enable VOX.
4 • Turn VOX on or off via the programmed VOX
to select. button or menu to enable or disable VOX.
If the Talk Permit Tone is enabled, use a trigger word
5 The current cable type is indicated by a . to initiate the call. Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to
finish before speaking clearly into the microphone.
Voice Operating Transmission See for more information.
The Voice Operating Transmission (VOX) allows you
to initiate a hands-free voice-activated call on a Note:
programmed channel. The radio automatically Turning this feature on or off is limited to
transmits, for a programmed period, whenever the radios with this function enabled. Check with
microphone on the VOX-capable accessory detects your dealer or system administrator for more
information.
voice. 381
English
Turning Voice Operating Transmission On or Off This is typically useful when the user has difficulty
Follow the procedure to turn Voice Operating reading the content shown on the display. This audio
Transmission (VOX) on or off on your radio. indicator can be customized according to customer
requirements.
• Press the programmed VOX button. Skip the Turning Option Board On or Off
steps below. Option board capabilities within each channel can be
• assigned to programmable buttons. A channel can
Press to access the menu. support up to 6 option board features. Follow the
procedure to turn option board on or off on your radio.
2
Press or to Utilities. Press to Press the programmed Option Board button.
select.
Text-to-Speech
3 The Text-to-Speech feature can only be enabled by
your dealer or system administrator. If Text-to-Speech
to select. is enabled, the Voice Announcement feature is
automatically disabled. If Voice Announcement is
4 enabled, then the Text-to-Speech feature is
Press or to VOX. Press to select.
Other Systems
automatically disabled.
5 This feature enables the radio to audibly indicate the
Press to enable or disable VOX.
following features:
Turning Voice Announcement On or Off • Current Channel
This feature enables the radio to audibly indicate the
• Current Zone
current zone or channel the user has just assigned, or
the programmable button the user has just pressed. • Programmed button feature on or off
382 • Content of received text messages
English
• Content of received Job Tickets
Other Systems
5
Press or to any of the following
This audio indicator can be customized per customer
requirements. This feature is typically useful when the features. Press to select.
user is in a difficult condition to read the content The available features are as follows:
shown on the display.
• All
Setting Text-to-Speech • Messages
Follow the procedure to set the Text-to-Speech
• Job Tickets
feature.
• Channel
1 • Zone
• Program Button
2 appears beside the selected setting.
select. Turning Automatic Call Forwarding On or Off
You can enable your radio to automatically forward
3
Press or to Radio Settings. Press voice calls to another radio.
to select. 1
4
Press or to Voice Announcement. 2
383
English
3 3
Press or to Call Forward. Press Press or to Radio Settings. Press

Press or to Display. Press to
• select.
Press or to enable Call
Forwarding. If enabled, appears beside 5
Enabled. Press or to Menu Timer. Press
• to select.
Press or to disable Call
Forwarding. If disabled, disappears beside 6
Enabled. Press or to the required setting. Press
to select.
Setting Menu Timer
You can set the time your radio stays in the menu Turning Analog Microphone AGC On or Off
before it automatically switches to the Home screen. The Analog Microphone Automatic Gain Control
Follow the procedure to set the menu timer. (AGC) controls the microphone gain of the radio
Other Systems
automatically while transmitting on an analog system.

1
Press to access the menu. This feature suppresses loud audio or boosts soft
audio to a preset value in order to provide a
2 consistent level of audio. Follow the procedure to turn
Press or to Utilities. Press to Analog Microphone AGC on or off on your radio.
select.
1
384
English
Other Systems
2 1
Press or to Utilities. Press to Press to access the menu.
select.
2
Press or to Radio Settings. Press select.
to select. 3
4
Press or to Mic AGC-A. Press to to select.
select.
4
5 Press or to Mic AGC-D. Press to
Press to enable or disable Analog select.
Microphone AGC.
The display shows one of the following results: 5
Press to enable or disable Digital
• If enabled appears besides Enabled. Microphone AGC.
• If disabled, disappears beside Enabled. The display shows one of the following results:
Turning Digital Microphone AGC On or Off
The Digital Microphone Automatic Gain Control • If disabled, disappears beside Enabled.
(AGC) controls the microphone gain of the radio
Turning Intelligent Audio On or Off
automatically while transmitting on a digital system.
Your radio automatically adjusts the audio volume to
This feature suppresses loud audio or boosts soft
overcome current background noise in the
audio to a preset value in order to provide a
environment, inclusive of both stationary and non-
consistent level of audio. Follow the procedure to turn
stationary noise sources. This is a receive-only
Digital Microphone AGC on or off on your radio.
feature and does not affect transmission audio. 385
English
Follow the procedure to turn Intelligent Audio on or off •
on your radio. Press or to On. Press to
Note: •
This feature is not applicable during a Press or to Off. Press to
Bluetooth session. select. The display shows beside Off.
1 Do one of the following: Turning the Acoustic Feedback Suppressor
• Press the programmed Intelligent Audio Feature On or Off
button. Skip the steps below. This feature allows you to minimize Acoustic
• Feedback Suppressor in received calls. Follow the
Press to access the menu. procedure to turn the Acoustic Feedback Suppressor
on or off on your radio.
2
3 2
Press or to Radio Settings. Press Press or to Utilities. Press to
select..
to select.
Other Systems
3
Press or to Intelligent Audio.
to select.
Press to select.
4
5 Do one of the following: Press or to AF Suppressor. Press
to select.
386
English
Other Systems
• Press to enable Acoustic Feedback
Suppressor. If enabled appears besides to select.
Enabled.
4
• Press to disable Acoustic Feedback Press or to Trill Enhance. Press
Suppressor. If disabled, disappears beside
Enabled. to select.
Turning Trill Enhancement On or Off 5 Do one of the following:

You can enable this feature when you are speaking in •
a language that contains many words with alveolar Press or to On. Press to
trill (rolling “R”) pronunciations. Follow the procedure select. The display shows beside On.
to turn Trill Enhancement on or off on your radio. •
1 Do one of the following: select. The display shows beside Off.
• Press the programmed Trill Enhancement Audio Ambience

button. Skip the steps below. You can customize the audio ambience for your radio
• according to your environment.
Default This is the default setting.
2
Press or to Utilities. Press to Loud This setting enables Noise Suppressor
select. and increases speaker loudness for use
in noisy surroundings.
387
English
Work This setting enables AF Suppressor • Choose Default for the default factory
Group and disables AGC for use when a settings.
group of radios are near to each other. • Choose Loud to increase speaker loudness
when using in noisy surroundings.
Setting Audio Ambience • Choose Work Group to reduce acoustic
Follow the procedure to set the audio ambience on feedback when using with a group of radios
your radio according to your environment. that are near to each other.
1 The display shows beside the selected setting.
Audio Profiles
2
Press or to Utilities. Press to You can customize the audio profiles for your radio
select. according to your preference.
3 Default This is the default setting.

Level 1, Level These settings are intended to
to select. 2, and Level 3 compensate for noise-induced
hearing loss that is typical for
4 adults in their 40’s, 50’s, and 60’s
Other Systems
Press or to Audio Ambience. Press

or over.
to select.
Treble Boost, These settings are intended for a
5 Mid Boost, tinnier sound, a more nasal sound,
Press or to the required setting. Press and Bass and a deeper sound.
Boost
to select.
388
English
Setting Audio Profiles •
Other Systems
Choose Level 1, Level 2, or Level 3 for
Follow the procedure to set audio profiles on your audio profiles intended to compensate for
radio. noise-induced hearing loss that is typical for
adults over 40 years of age.
1 •
Press to access the menu. Choose Treble Boost, Mid Boost, or Bass
Boost for audio profiles that align with your
2 preference for tinnier, more nasal, or deeper
Press or to Utilities. Press to sounds.
select.
• Default
3 • Level 1, Level 2, or Level 3
• Treble Boost, Mid Boost, or Bass Boost
to select.
4
Press or to Audio Profiles. Press Turning the Global Positioning System (GPS) On
or Off
to select. Global Positioning System (GPS) is a satellite
navigation system that determines the radio’s precise
5
Press or to the required setting. Press location. Follow the procedure to turn GPS on or off
on your radio.
to select.
The settings are as follows. Press the programmed GPS button to toggle the
feature on or off.
• Choose Default to disable the previously
selected audio profile and return to the default
factory settings.
389
English
Flexible Receive List The display shows a positive mini notice.
Flexible Receive List is a feature that allows you to •
Press or to Turn Off. Press
create and assign members on the receive talkgroup
to select.
list. Your radio can support a maximum of 16
members in the list. This feature is supported in A negative indicator tone sounds.
Capacity Plus.
The display shows a negative mini notice.
Turning Flexible Receive List On or Off
Follow the procedure to turn Flexible Receive List on General Radio Information
or off. Your radio contains information on various general
parameters.
The general information of your radio are as follows.
• Press the programmed Flexible Receive List
button. Skip the following steps. • Radio alias and ID.
• • Firmware and Codeplug versions.
Press to access the menu. • Software update.
• GPS information.
2
Press or to Flexible Rx List. • Site information.
Other Systems
Press to select. Note:

You return to the previous screen when you
press , and to the Home screen when
•
Press or to Turn On. Press you long press , at any time. The radio
to select. exits the current screen once the inactivity
timer expires.
A positive indicator tone sounds.
390
English
Checking Radio Alias and ID Checking Firmware and Codeplug Versions
Other Systems
Follow the procedure to check the radio alias and ID Follow the procedure to check the firmware and
on your radio. codeplug versions on your radio.

• Press the programmed Radio Alias and ID
button. Skip the steps below. 2
A positive indicator tone sounds. select.
•
You can press the programmed Radio Alias and to select.
ID button to return to the previous screen.
4
2 Press or to Versions. Press to
Press or to Utilities. Press to select.
select. The display shows the current firmware and
codeplug versions.
3
to select. Checking Software Update Information
This feature shows the date and time of the latest
4 software update carried out via OTAP or Wi-Fi. Follow
Press or to My ID. Press to the procedure to check the software update
select. information on your radio.
The first text line shows the radio alias. The
second text line shows the radio ID. 1
391
English
2 • Horizontal Dilution of Precision (HDOP)
select. • Satellites
• Version
3
1
4 2
Press or to SW Update. Press to Press or to Utilities. Press to
select. select.
The display shows the date and time of the latest
software update. 3
or to Radio Info. Press to
Software Update menu is only available after at least select.
one successful OTAP or Wi-Fi session. See Over-the-
4
Air Programming on page 362 for more information. or to GPS Info.Press to select.
Checking GPS/GNSS Information
Displays the GPS/GNSS information on your radio, 5
or to the required item.Press to
such as values of:
Other Systems
select.The display shows the requested GPS/

• Latitude GNSS information.
• Longitude Displaying Site Information
• Altitude Follow the procedure to display the current Linked
Capacity Plus site name your radio is on.
• Direction
• Velocity 1
392
English
Other Systems
2
select.
3
to select.
4
Press or to Site Info. Press to
select.
The display shows the current site name of Capacity

Plus-Multi-Site.
393
English
Authorized Accessories List
394
English
• UHF, 494 – 512 MHz, 3.5 dB Gain, Through-Hole

Authorized Accessories List Mount, Mini-U (HAE4013_)
• Fixed Mount GPS Active Antenna (PMAN4000_)
Antennas • Window Mount GPS Active Antenna
(PMAN4001_)
• VHF, 136 – 144 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole
Mount, Mini-U (HAD4006_) • Magnetic Mount GPS Active Antenna
(PMAN4002_)
• VHF, 146 – 150.8 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole
Mount, Mini-U (HAD4007_) • Combination GPS+RF, Base Only, Through-hole
Mount, Mini-U (PMAN4004_)
• VHF, 150.8 – 162 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole
Mount, Mini-U (HAD4008_) • UHF, 403 – 527 MHz, 2.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole
Mount, Mini-U (HAE6022_)
• VHF, 162 – 174 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole
Mount, Mini-U (HAD4009_) • Combination GPS+RF, 806 – 941 MHz, 1/4 Wave,
Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAF4029_)
• UHF, 403 – 430 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole
Mount, Mini-U (HAE4002_) • Combination GPS+RF, 806 – 941 MHz, 3.0 dB
Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAF4030_)
Mount, Mini-U (HAE4010_) • UHF, 445 – 470 MHz, 5.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole
Moun, Mini-U (with base) (RAE4004_RB)
Mount, Mini-U (HAE4011_) • UHF, 445 – 470 MHz, 5.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole
Mount, Mini-U (without base) (RAE4004_)
Mount, Mini-U (HAE4012_) • Combination GPS/VHF, 136 – 144 MHz, 1/4
Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (RAD4214_)
395
English
• Combination GPS/VHF, 146 – 150.8 MHz, 1/4 • Combination GPS/UHF, 450 – 470 MHz, 5.0 dB
Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (RAD4215_) Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (PMAE4034_)
• Combination GPS/VHF, 150.8 – 162 MHz, 1/4 • 800/900, 806 – 941 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole
Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (RAD4216_) Mount, Mini-U (HAF4025_)
• Combination GPS/VHF, 162 – 174 MHz, 1/4 • 800/900, 806 – 941 MHz, 3.0dB Gain, Through-
Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (RAD4217_) Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAF4026_)
• Combination GPS/VHF, 146 – 172 MHz, 3.0 dB • 800/900, 806 – 941 MHz, Stubby Antenna,
Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (RAD4218_) Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAF4013_)
• Combination GPS/UHF, 403 – 527 MHz, 2.0 dB • 800/900, 806 – 941 MHz, 5.0dB Gain, Through-
Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAE6019_) Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAF4027_)
• Combination GPS/UHF, 470 – 527 MHz, 1/4
Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAE6020_) For use with base PMAN4004_ only:
• Combination GPS/UHF, 470 – 494 MHz, 3.0 dB
• UHF, 403 – 430 MHz, 1/4 Wave (PMAE4039_)

Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAE6024_) • UHF, 450 – 470 MHz, 1/4 Wave (PMAE4041_)
• Combination GPS/UHF, 494 – 512 MHz, 3.0 dB • UHF, 406 – 420 MHz, 3.5 dB Gain (PMAE4040_)
Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAE6026_) • UHF, 450 – 470 MHz, 3.5 dB Gain (PMAE4042_)
• Combination GPS/UHF, 403 – 430 MHz, 1/4 • UHF, 450 – 470 MHz, 5.0 dB Gain (PMAE4043_)
Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (PMAE4030_)
• VHF, 162 – 174 MHz, 1/4 Wave (RAD4223_)
• Combination GPS/UHF, 450 – 470 MHz, 1/4
• VHF, 150.8 – 162 MHz, 1/4 Wave (RAD4224_)
Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (PMAE4031_)
• VHF, 146 – 150.8 MHz, 1/4 Wave (RAD4225_)
• Combination GPS/UHF, 406 – 420 MHz, 3.5 dB
Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (PMAE4032_) • VHF, 136 – 144 MHz, 1/4 Wave (RAD4226_)
• Combination GPS/UHF, 450 – 470 MHz, 3.5 dB • VHF, 146 – 172 MHz, 3.0 dB Gain (RAD4227_)
Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (PMAE4033_) • UHF, 470 – 527 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole
Mount (HAE6030_)
396
English
• UHF, 403 – 527 MHz, 2.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole • Bluetooth Accessory Kit, SP, 9.5” Cable

Mount (HAE6029_) (NNTN8190_)
• UHF, 470 – 494 MHz, 3.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole • Operations Critical Wireless Earpiece, 9.5” Cable
Mount (HAE6028_) (NNTN8126_)
• UHF, 494 – 512 MHz, 3.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole • Wireless Covert Kit, includes two sets of 2-Wire
Mount (HAE6027_) Earbuds (1 Black and 1 White), 1-Wire Earbud
(Black), and a 3.5 mm Adapter to plug into any off-
Audio the-shelf headphones (NNTN8296_) [11]
• Wireless Neckloop Y-adapter and retention hook
• Telephone Style Handset (HMN4098_)
for Completely Discreet Kit (NNTN8385_) [11]
• Desktop Microphone (RMN5050_)
• HK200 Bluetooth Headset (89409N)
• Compact Microphone (RMN5052_)
• Compact Microphone Replacement Cable
• IMPRES 4-Way Navigation Keypad Microphone (3075336B07)
(RMN5127_)
• Heavy Duty/Keypad Microphone Replacement
• Heavy Duty Microphone with Enhanced Audio Cable (3075336B10)
(RMN5053_)
• Completely Discreet Earpiece Kit (RLN4922_) [11]
• Visor Microphone with Enhanced Audio
• XBT Behind-the-Neck, Non-Secure Wireless
(RMN5054_)
Heavy Duty Headset (RLN6490_)
• Operations Critical Wireless Earpiece, 12” Cable
• XBT Overhead, Non-Secure Wireless Heavy Duty
(NNTN8125_)
Headset (RLN6491_)
• Operations Critical Wireless Push-to-Talk POD
• MOTOTRBO Bluetooth Accessory Kit with NA
(NNTN8127_)
Power Supply (RLN6500_)
• Non-Secure Wireless Headset & Push-to-Talk
• Swivel Earpiece with In-Line Microphone for
Device with Push-to-Talk Audio, 12-Inch Cable
Bluetooth Accessory Kit Pod, Pack of 3
(NNTN8189_)
(RLN6550_) [11]
397
English
• Flexible Fit Swivel Earpiece with Boom Mic • MAP Programming Cable (PMKN4010_)
(PMLN7181_) [11] • MAP Programming and Test Cable (PMKN4016_)
• Flexible Fit Swivel Earpiece with Boom Mic, • Remote Mount (3-metre) Cable (PMKN4143_)
Multipack (PMLN7203_) [11] • Remote Mount (5-metre) Cable (PMKN4144_)
Desktop Accessories
Cables • Radio Power Cable for GPN6145 (GKN6266_)
• Power Cable to Battery, 10-foot (3-metre) Cable, • Desktop Tray without Speaker (GLN7318_)
15 amp (1 – 25 Watt) (HKN4137_) • Desktop Tray with Speaker (RSN4005_)
• Power Cable to Battery, 10-foot (3-metre) Cable, • Switchmode Power Supply (1 – 25 Watt Models)
20 amp (1 – 45 Watt) (HKN4191_) (CE marked) (GPN6145_)
• Power Cable to Battery, 20-foot (6-metre) Cable, • Power Supply and Cable (HPN4007_)
20 amp (1 – 45 Watt) (HKN4192_) • Hardware Kit for Rear Accessory Connector

• Mobile and Repeater Rear Accessory Connector (PMLN5072_)
Universal Cable (PMKN4018_) • US Line Cord (3060665A04)
• Ignition Sense Cable (RKN4136_)
• Mobile Mic Extension Cable, 10 feet Mounting Kits
(PMKN4033_)
• In Dash (DIN) Mounting Kit (RLN6465_)
• Mobile Mic Extension Cable, 20 feet
• Low Profile Trunnion Kit (RLN6466_)
(PMKN4034_)
• High Profile Trunnion Kit (RLN6467_)
• Mobile Front (MMP) Programming Cable
(HKN6184_) • Key Lock Trunnion Kit (RLN6468_)
398 11 Your radio is compatible with the accessories listed here. Contact your dealer for details.
English
• Low Profile Trunnion – Bag (RLN6469_) • IMPRES Mobile MAP Non-PC Adapter

• Remote Mount Transceiver Interface (PMKN4070_)
(PMLN6402_) • Surge Protector, Tower Mount Kit (DQT1)
• Remote Mount Control Head Interface • Surge Protector, Coax Protector Bulkhead
(PMLN6403_) (DSISB50LNC2MA)
• Generic Option Board (PMLN5718_S)
Speakers • Operations Critical Wireless 1-Wire Surveillance
Kit with translucent tube (PMLN7052_) [12]
• 13-Watt External Speaker (RSN4002_)
• 7.5-Watt External Speaker (RSN4003_)
• 5-Watt External Speaker (RSN4004_)
Miscellaneous Accessories
• PL259/Mini-U Antenna Adapter, 8-foot (2.4-metre)
Cable (HKN9557_)
• Microphone Hang Up Clip (All Microphones)
(HLN9073_)
• Universal Microphone Hang Up Clip (All
Microphones) (HLN9414_)
• Push Button PTT (RLN5926_)
• Emergency Footswitch (RLN5929_)
• IMPRES Mobile MMP Non-PC Adapter
(PMKN4072_)
12 Your radio is compatible with the accessories listed here. Contact your dealer for details. 399
English
Additional information about operating
Maritime Radio Use in the VHF requirements in the Maritime Services can be
Frequency Range obtained from the full text of FCC Rule Part 80
and from the US Coast Guard.
Special Channel Assignments
Maritime Radio Use in the VHF Frequency Range
Table 1: VHF Marine Channel List

Operating Frequency Requirements
Channel Num- Frequency (MHz)
A radio designated for shipboard use must comply ber
with Federal Communications Commission Rule Part Transmit Receive
80 as follows: 1 156.050 160.650
• on ships subject to Part II of Title III of the 2 156.100 160.700
Communications Act, the radio must be capable of
operating on the 156.800 MHz frequency. * 156.150 160.750
• on ships subject to the Safety Convention, the 4 156.200 160.800
radio must be capable of operating:
5 156.250 160.850
• in the simplex mode on the ship station
transmitting frequencies specified in the 6 156.300 –
156.025 – 157.425 MHz frequency band, and
7 156.350 160.950
• in the semiduplex mode on the two frequency
channels specified in the table below. 8 156.400 –
Note: 9 156.450 156.450
Simplex channels 3, 21, 23, 61, 64, 81, 82, 10 156.500 156.500
and 83 cannot be lawfully used by the general
11 156.550 156.550
400 public in US waters.
English
12 156.600 156.600 60 156.025 160.625
13** 156.650 156.650 * 156.075 160.675
14 156.700 156.700 62 156.125 160.725
15** 156.750 156.750 63 156.175 160.775
16 156.800 156.800 * 156.225 160.825
17** 156.850 156.850 65 156.275 160.875
18 156.900 161.500 66 156.325 160.925
19 156.950 161.550 67** 156.375 156.375
20 157.000 161.600 68 156.425 156.425
* 157.050 161.650 69 156.475 156.475
22 157.100 161.700 71 156.575 156.575
* 157.150 161.750 72 156.625 –
24 157.200 161.800 73 156.675 156.675
25 157.250 161.850 74 156.725 156.725
26 157.300 161.900 75 *** ***
27 157.350 161.950 76 *** ***
28 157.400 162.000 77** 156.875 –
401
English
78 156.925 161.525 Note:
A – in the Receive column indicates that the
79 156.975 161.575 channel is transmit only.
80 157.025 161.625
Declaration of Compliance for the Use of
* 157.075 161.675 Distress and Safety Frequencies

* 157.125 161.725
The radio equipment does not employ a modulation
* 157.175 161.775 other than the internationally adopted modulation for
maritime use when it operates on the distress and
84 157.225 161.825 safety frequencies specified in RSS-182 Section 7.3.
85 157.275 161.875
Technical Parameters for Interfacing External
86 157.325 161.925
Data Sources
87 157.375 161.975
RS232 USB SB9600
88 157.425 162.025
Input Volt- 18V 3.6V 5V
Note: age (Volts
Peak-to-
* Simplex channels 3, 21, 23, 61, 64, 81, 82, peak)
and 83 cannot be lawfully used by the
general public in US waters. Max Data 28 kb/s 12 Mb/s 9.6 kb/s
Rate
** Low power (1 W) only.
Impedance 5000 ohm 90 ohm 120 ohm
*** Guard band.
402
English
applicable warranty period. All replaced parts of
Limited Warranty
Limited Warranty Product shall become the property of MOTOROLA.
MOTOROLA COMMUNICATION PRODUCTS This express limited warranty is extended by

MOTOROLA to the original end user purchaser only
and is not assignable or transferable to any other
I. WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERS AND FOR
party. This is the complete warranty for the Product
HOW LONG: manufactured by MOTOROLA. MOTOROLA
MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS, INC. (“MOTOROLA”) assumes no obligations or liability for additions or
warrants the MOTOROLA manufactured modifications to this warranty unless made in writing
Communication Products listed below (“Product”) and signed by an officer of MOTOROLA.
against defects in material and workmanship under Unless made in a separate agreement between
normal use and service for a period of time from the MOTOROLA and the original end user purchaser,
date of purchase as scheduled below: MOTOROLA does not warrant the installation,
maintenance or service of the Product.
Digital Mobile Radios 24 Months
MOTOROLA cannot be responsible in any way for
Product Accessories 12 Months any ancillary equipment not furnished by MOTOROLA
which is attached to or used in connection with the
MOTOROLA, at its option, will at no charge either Product, or for operation of the Product with any
repair the Product (with new or reconditioned parts), ancillary equipment, and all such equipment is
replace it (with a new or reconditioned Product), or expressly excluded from this warranty. Because each
refund the purchase price of the Product during the system which may use the Product is unique,
warranty period provided it is returned in accordance MOTOROLA disclaims liability for range, coverage, or
with the terms of this warranty. Replaced parts or operation of the system as a whole under this
boards are warranted for the balance of the original warranty.
403
English
II. GENERAL PROVISIONS III. STATE LAW RIGHTS:
This warranty sets forth the full extent of SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION
MOTOROLA'S responsibilities regarding the Product. OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR
Repair, replacement or refund of the purchase price, CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR LIMITATION ON
at MOTOROLA’s option, is the exclusive remedy. HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, SO
THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN IN LIEU OF ALL THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSIONS MAY
OTHER EXPRESS WARRANTIES. IMPLIED NOT APPLY.
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION,
This warranty gives specific legal rights, and there
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
may be other rights which may vary from state to
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
state.
ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS
LIMITED WARRANTY. IN NO EVENT SHALL
MOTOROLA BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN
IV. HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICE
EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE You must provide proof of purchase (bearing the date
PRODUCT, FOR ANY LOSS OF USE, LOSS OF of purchase and Product item serial number) in order
TIME, INCONVENIENCE, COMMERCIAL LOSS, to receive warranty service and, also, deliver or send
LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS OR OTHER
Limited Warranty
the Product item, transportation and insurance

INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL prepaid, to an authorized warranty service location.
DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR Warranty service will be provided by MOTOROLA
INABILITY TO USE SUCH PRODUCT, TO THE through one of its authorized warranty service
FULL EXTENT SUCH MAY BE DISCLAIMED BY locations. If you first contact the company which sold
LAW. you the Product (e.g., dealer or communication
service provider), it can facilitate your obtaining
warranty service. You can also call MOTOROLA at
1-800-927-2744 US/Canada.
404
English
• any of the seals on the battery enclosure of
Limited Warranty
V. WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT cells are broken or show evidence of
COVER tampering.
1 Defects or damage resulting from use of the • the damage or defect is caused by charging or
Product in other than its normal and customary using the battery in equipment or service other
manner. than the Product for which it is specified.
2 Defects or damage from misuse, accident, water, 8 Freight costs to the repair depot.
or neglect. 9 A Product which, due to illegal or unauthorized
3 Defects or damage from improper testing, alteration of the software/firmware in the Product,
operation, maintenance, installation, alteration, does not function in accordance with
modification, or adjustment. MOTOROLA’s published specifications or the FCC
4 Breakage or damage to antennas unless caused certification labeling in effect for the Product at the
directly by defects in material workmanship. time the Product was initially distributed from
MOTOROLA.
5 A Product subjected to unauthorized Product
modifications, disassembles or repairs (including, 10 Scratches or other cosmetic damage to Product
without limitation, the addition to the Product of surfaces that does not affect the operation of the
non-MOTOROLA supplied equipment) which Product.
adversely affect performance of the Product or 11 Normal and customary wear and tear.
interfere with MOTOROLA's normal warranty
inspection and testing of the Product to verify any VI. PATENT AND SOFTWARE PROVISIONS
warranty claim.
MOTOROLA will defend, at its own expense, any suit
6 Product which has had the serial number removed brought against the end user purchaser to the extent
or made illegible. that it is based on a claim that the Product or parts
7 Rechargeable batteries if: infringe a United States patent, and MOTOROLA will
pay those costs and damages finally awarded against
405
English
the end user purchaser in any such suit which are furnished by MOTOROLA, nor will MOTOROLA have
attributable to any such claim, but such defense and any liability for the use of ancillary equipment or
payments are conditioned on the following: software not furnished by MOTOROLA which is
attached to or used in connection with the Product.
1 MOTOROLA will be notified promptly in writing by
The foregoing states the entire liability of
such purchaser of any notice of such claim,
MOTOROLA with respect to infringement of patents
2 MOTOROLA will have sole control of the defense by the Product or any parts thereof.
of such suit and all negotiations for its settlement
or compromise, and Laws in the United States and other countries
3 Should the Product or parts become, or in preserve for MOTOROLA certain exclusive rights for
MOTOROLA’s opinion be likely to become, the copyrighted MOTOROLA software such as the
subject of a claim of infringement of a United exclusive rights to reproduce in copies and distribute
States patent, that such purchaser will permit copies of such MOTOROLA software. MOTOROLA
MOTOROLA, at its option and expense, either to software may be used in only the Product in which
procure for such purchaser the right to continue the software was originally embodied and such
using the Product or parts or to replace or modify software in such Product may not be replaced,
the same so that it becomes non-infringing or to copied, distributed, modified in any way, or used to
grant such purchaser a credit for the Product or produce any derivative thereof. No other use
Limited Warranty
parts as depreciated and accept its return. The including, without limitation, alteration, modification,
depreciation will be an equal amount per year over reproduction, distribution, or reverse engineering of
the lifetime of the Product or parts as established such MOTOROLA software or exercise of rights in
by MOTOROLA. such MOTOROLA software is permitted. No license is
granted by implication, estoppel or otherwise under
MOTOROLA will have no liability with respect to any MOTOROLA patent rights or copyrights.
claim of patent infringement which is based upon the
combination of the Product or parts furnished
hereunder with software, apparatus or devices not
406
English
Limited Warranty
VII. GOVERNING LAW
This Warranty is governed by the laws of the State of
Illinois, U.S.A.
407
English
Motorola Solutions, Inc.
1303 East Algonquin Road
Schaumburg, Illinois 60196 U.S.A.
MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS and

the Stylized M logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under license.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective
owners. © 2011–2016 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All rights
reserved.
Wi-Fi® is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance®.
May 2016
www.motorolasolutions.com/mototrbo
*68009504001*
68009504001-GD

XPR 5550 Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

XPR 5550 Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO

Capacity Max Operations.............. 21

Call Indicator Settings.............. 82

Bluetooth Mic Gain.................221 Tone On or Off.................. 230

Privacy ............................... 347

2 This device must accept any interference re-

For a list of Motorola-approved antennas and other

#5,226,084 and #5,195,166.

* These buttons are programmable. 17

Keypad Microphone Buttons

Key Number of Times Key is Pressed

If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled on Assignable Radio Functions

Channel messages for the current

Capacity Max Operations

Tones/Alerts Toggles all tones and alerts on or 2

Follow the procedure to access programmed

1 Do one of the following:

In the Contacts list, it indicates a

Capacity Max Operations

Timer Site Roaming

1 Only applicable for XPR 5550e/XPR 5580e

Bluetooth-enabled PTT the display in the Sent Items folder.

Solid Radio is in Bluetooth Discoverable A monotone sound. Sounds

Radio is locked. Sounds only once for a duration

High Pitched Tone Positive Indicator Tone

Low Pitched Tone Negative Indicator Tone

Capacity Max Operations

This chapter explains the operations to select a zone screen.

Capacity Max Operations

flashes to indicate a site search.

Press the programmed Site Lock button. Site Trunking

Capacity Max Operations

Your radio must be configured as part of a group to

Capacity Max Operations

4 Release the PTT button to listen. 3

2 Hold the microphone 1 inch to 2 inches (2.5 cm to

Capacity Max Operations

Capacity Max Operations

Broadcast Call 3 Do one of the following:

1 Do one of the following: 2

Recipient users are not allowed to Talkback

Capacity Max Operations

3 Release the PTT button to listen.

4 The call ends when there is no voice activity for a 4

access code and press the button to

Capacity Max Operations

programmable button press.

Capacity Max Operations

3 9 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled,

• To decline a Private Call, do one of the following: pressing .

Press to decline a Private Call. depending on system configuration. An All Call is

Capacity Max Operations

the display shows the subscriber alias or ID, and

Capacity Max Operations

If the entry for the One Touch Access button is

3 Press the PTT button to respond to the call.

Capacity Max Operations

58 If the call is successful:

Capacity Max Operations

10 If the deaccess code was not preconfigured, enter Note:

Capacity Max Operations

to select. If the call is unsuccessful:

Capacity Max Operations